
Class 
Book. 



Fiqa 






_ 



Gfi#tB?. 



COPYRIGHT DEFOSm 



FRAGMENTS OF TRUTH 



BY 
RICHARD INGALESE 

AND 

ISABELLA INGALESE 




NEW YORK 

DODD, MEAD AND COMPANY 

1921 



3>7 



COPYRIGHT, 1921 

By RICHARD INGALESE 



i 



\ j 



tgftt <au(nn & goben Cotngang 

BOOK MANUFACTURERS 
R A H W A Y N EW JERSEY 



§)CU611159 



jietricatton 

TO THOSE FAITHFUL STUDENTS WHO 
ARE LIVING THE TEACHINGS OF 
OCCULTISM, IS THIS BOOK DEDICATED 



CONTENTS 

CHAPTEB PAGE) 

I Psychic Phenomena 1 

Richard Ingalese 

II Miracles 34 

Richard Ingalese 

III Vibration 53 

Isabella Ingalese 

IV Cosmic Evolution 68 

Isabella Ingalese 

V Moses the Magician 8£ 

Richard Ingalese 

VI Soul Slavery 108 

Isabella Ingalese 

VII Stray Leaves op Occult History . . 120 

Richard Ingalese 

VIII Vanity 153 

Isabella Ingalese 

IX Death and After ....... 166 

Richard Ingalese 

X Reciprocity 192 

Isabella Ingalese 

XI The Spiritual Renaissance of the Nine- 
teenth Century 205 

Richard Ingalese 

XII The Esoteric Christ . . . . • . 220 

Richard Ingalese 

XIII Infinite Intelligence — God . . . 242 

Isabella Ingalese 

XIV Judgment Day 282 

Isabella Ingalese 

Index 295 



FRAGMENTS OF TRUTH 



FRAGMENTS OF TRUTH 

CHAPTER ONE 

PSYCHIC PHENOMENA 

Phenomenon challenges man's curiosity, even 
when it does not permanently hold his interest; 
and death has always been the chief phenomenon 
of his observation. From the time when the first 
mother gazed, through her misty eyes of tears, 
at the dead body of her child, and sought to 
follow, into the silence and darkness, the ani- 
mating principle which had made that body so 
dear to her, man has fitfully tried to penetrate 
the misty veil, in order to ascertain what has 
become of the unwilling pioneer of the Shadow 
World. At all times some souls have sought to 
solve the mystery of life and death and to prove 
if there is anything in man that persists after the 
body becomes cold and dumb. 

Both profane and sacred history record that, 
in every period, some thinkers have believed in 
the immortality of man, and have endeavored 
to keep in touch with those who died; while the 
priesthood has ever sought to discourage, or pro- 
hibit, this public practice. To the inquiring mind, 

1 



2 FRAGMENTS OF TRUTH 

this would seem a strange position for priest- 
craft to assume, since any discovery would tend 
to support the contention of the priests; there- 
fore, a thinker must conclude that such investiga- 
tions would either ultimately destroy the re- 
ligious orders, or that the priesthood had esoteric 
knowledge, on the subject, that proved, the prac- 
tice inimical to the investigator. The Occultist 
says there is truth in both alternatives. 

Old wine in new bottles. Psychic phenomenon 
is the re-christened lesser Magic of the ancients — 
a phase of the power of mind, as old as humanity. 
By Magic is meant, of course, the control of cer- 
tain natural forces, through a knowledge of their 
laws, and not the tricks of legerdemain. In its 
modern aspects, it does not delve as deeply into 
Soul Power, nor cover as wide a range in ex- 
pression as did the ancient Temple Magic, or 
mediaeval Ceremonial Magic. This is due to the 
fact that people have largely neglected the study 
of the lower aspects of Occultism, as well as of 
the higher, during the last thousand years — the 
second half of the Piscine Age. During this 
period; man has been more interested in the ob- 
jective — the material — than in the subjective. 
There have been times, however, when his atten- 
tion has been diverted, temporarily, and he has 
turned, wonderingly, to examine his own inner 
nature and its relationship to the evolutionary 
plan. 



PSYCHIC PHENOMENA 3 

Modern psychic phenomenon, like ancient 
Jewish psychism, is largely, though not exclu- 
sively, confined to necromancy, but with this 
difference: at present, either the ourja board, or 
automatic writing, often takes the place of a 
medium, for there is a distinct tendency, in this 
age, to individualization and to acquire knowledge 
without the intervention of intermediaries. 
Necromancy, however, is always the same in re- 
sults, whether it be produced through a medium, 
as in Spiritism, by the help of an ouija board, as 
in modern parlor pastime, or as practised in 
ancient demonism, or through blood sacrifices, as 
in voodooism and in devil worship. 

Broadly speaking, modern psychic phenomenon, 
of this class, is embraced in five general groups 
of manifestation : 

First, inspirational writing and speaking. 

Second, visions, premonitions, phantoms and 
phantasms. 

Third, clairvoyance and clairaudience, yoga and 
crystal gazing. 

Fourth, psychic healing. 

Fifth, physical phenomena. 

In discussing a topic, of this kind, with the 
general public, a student of Occultism is somewhat 
perplexed, how to proceed, because of the infinite 
complexity of the subject. The grossly material- 
istic, the mercenary religionist and the credulous 
creed-man will, perforce, deny the actuality of the 



4 FRAGMENTS OF TRUTH 

phenomena. It is, therefore, useless to waste 
effort in those directions. The reader, the 
thinker, the investigator must acknowledge the 
facts of the phenomena even though they may 
doubt the various explanations given to account 
for them. The divergence of opinions has greatly 
narrowed, during the last fifty years, until there 
may be said to be but three remaining explana- 
tions ; namely, fraud, Spiritism and Occultism. It 
is admitted, by all investigators, that fraud runs 
through much of the phenomena, but it is equally 
true that there is a residuum wherein neither con- 
scious nor unconscious fraud exists and this be- 
comes more and more evident as the accumulation 
of evidence multiplies. 

The chief differences in opinion between the 
progressed Spiritist and the Occultist, are these : 
the latter maintains that some phenomena are 
produced by intelligences less than man, under 
man's direction; some by the Subjective mind, 
either of the medium, or of the investigator, or of 
both co-operating ; while still other manifestations 
are by incarnated egos who temporarily and volun- 
tarily operate, at times, out of their physical 
bodies for the purpose of producing such phe- 
nomena. This was particularly true in the third 
quarter of the nineteenth century. Then .ma- 
terialism was aggressive and theology was rapidly 
being destroyed by facts, and with it much of the 
innate religious convictions of men. To counter- 



PSYCHIC PHENOMENA 5 

act this, some of the religious, Occult Brother- 
hoods, notably those which are the souls of Bud- 
dhism and of Brahminism, respectively (as the 
Society of Jesus is the soul of Catholicism), re- 
solved to use their knowledge of magic for the 
purpose of awakening an interest in matters per- 
taining to spirit. Some of those Occultists, there- 
fore, attended, subjectively, test seances, espe- 
cially those in which learned occidental scientists 
were interested, and there produced a higher and 
a more marvellous class of phenomena than is 
usually now seen. This was convincing, to many 
of the investigators, and thus an impetus was 
given to Spiritism, which is destined to aid in 
destroying materialism. 

It is true that, through their investigations, 
many individuals have suffered and others will 
have cause to suffer; but the movement was not 
originated, merely accelerated, by the Occultists 
referred to, on the theory that a legitimate end 
justifies the means — a proposition which does not 
meet with the approval of all esotericists. 

All psychic phenomenon is produced through 
the control of certain natural forces ; whether the 
producer be an Occultist, an excarnated man, or 
an elemental. The law, of course, is the same 
and is sometimes used by evil entities, selfishly and 
malignantly; often by practical jokers, mischiev- 
ously — for death does not change the nature of a 
man — and still more often by the mentally vain- 



6 FRAGMENTS OF TRUTH 

glorious, who desire to be worshipped and to direct 
the affairs^ of others— as so many do while in- 
carnated; and, occasionally, by Occultists for an 
unselfish and higher purpose, as narrated. 

If one is resolved to make a personal investiga- 
tion of these dangerous matters, it is well to heed 
Saint Paul's warning and "try the spirits. ,, One 
is at liberty also to investigate whether, or not, 
arsenic destroys life. Some persons have found 
that, in small quantities, it does not; in larger 
quantities, it does: that some forms of life, 
human or otherwise, resist the poison better than 
others. One may adopt the conclusions of scien- 
tific investigators, in either of the cases cited, or 
follow to satiety the rounds of phenomena and of 
experimentation. 

It does not require a highly trained intelligence 
to produce phenomena in modern Spiritism. The 
essential element is passivity — the yielding of 
one 's body, brain and mind to any chance intelli- 
gence who cares to manifest through those cen- 
ter. The word mediumship connotes a higher, or 
a stronger control. The medium, having tem- 
porarily yielded his body to another entity, is 
seldom in a position to observe the phenomena 
produced through it, and, therefore, personally, 
can learn little through such an experience. In- 
vestigators can, through physical observation, 
watch the phenomenon of obsession but cannot 
actually know the method by which it is accom- 



PSYCHIC PHENOMENA 7 

plished, nor the identity of the operator — unless 
the investigator, himself, has clairvoyant powers 
to observe, on the subjective side of life, the 
operating entity and his procedure. Therefore, 
the investigation of psychic phenomena, by either 
mediums, or non-clairvoyant investigators, is un- 
reliable and unsatisfactory. 

It is true that the medium may excite the won- 
derment, or the admiration of some people, 
through the display of his easily acquired powers, 
or make a precarious living in that manner, or 
give temporary comfort to those who receive mes- 
sages from real, or pretended, departed friends; 
and, if any of these is the motive for mediumship, 
then no one has the right to question it. But if 
the effort is to obtain facts — ultimate truth — a 
better way must be found. 

It may not be out of place to give a word of 
caution to persons now contemplating entering 
upon mediumship. The history of Spiritism, since 
its recrudescence in 1849 with the Fox sisters, is 
not such as to encourage mediumship. In the vast 
majority of cases, in which genuine phenomenon 
is produced, is found a rapid impairment of the 
body and of the intelligence of the medium, and 
the greater the phenomena produced the quicker 
the deterioration. Nor is physical injury the only 
thing to be feared; for often, with the bodily 
havoc, there is an equal moral degeneration. 
The reason for this is not hard to understand 



8 FRAGMENTS OP TRUTH 

when it is learned how phenomenon is produced. 

The law of psychic phenomenon, as observed 
from the occult side, is: Phenomenon is pro- 
duced by the self-directed magnetism of the 
operator acting upon the tractable magnetism of 
the body, or thing, through which the phenomenon 
occurs. 

The human, incarnated ego has a physical body 
which it moves at will. The ego is a more in- 
tangible entity than its body. How, then, can it 
control its physical counterpart? 

The Occultist answers, through the red cor- 
puscles, or magnetic portion of the blood. The 
magnetic force of the ego, acting upon the mag- 
netism of the blood, forces the blood magnetism 
over selected nerves causing them to automatically 
act upon the muscles ; and these, in turn, upon the 
bones and flesh. Thus an arm is raised or 
lowered. 

Again : apply this law to moving a table. The 
particles composing that piece of furniture are 
held together by the magnetism that is inherent 
in the atoms composing the wood. If the wood 
were completely demagnetized, disintegration 
would take place and the table would crumble into 
finest powder. The man not only controls his 
own magnetism, arm and hand, but also the 
tractable magnetism of the atoms of the table, 
and thus there is exerted magnetic and mechanical 
force, controlled by mind or will. 



PSYCHIC PHENOMENA 9 

When the ego loses, or lays down, its physical 
vehicle, it is still an intangible, magnetic entity 
and uses the same law in producing physical 
phenomena. If it desires to move a table and is 
strong enough to do so — for there is a difference 
in mental strength between egos both incarnated 
and excarnated — it uses its own magnetism to 
control the magnetism of the atoms of the table, 
causing it to move. If the excarnated ego has a 
medium to use in the experiment, it uses the body 
of the medium in the same manner as it formerly 
used its own. Or, the excarnated ego, not being 
sufficiently strong in itself, may draw upon the 
magnetism of the medium and of any negative in- 
vestigators present; and, by the absorption of 
such extraneous magnetism, acquire sufficient 
force to move the table. It is this constant vam- 
pirization of the magnetism of the medium which 
depletes his body; and it is the lack of magnetism 
in the medium which prompts him to resort to 
fraud when unable to furnish the obsessing entity 
the requisite force to produce the phenomena. 
This explains why different persons get differ- 
ent results from the same medium at various 
times, as witness Slade, Paladino and hosts of 
others. 

The investigator is not without danger also, 
though to a less degree than the medium. A 
trained, positive mind is seldom influenced at the 
beginning of such investigations. It will be on 



10 FRAGMENTS OF TRUTH 

guard and naturally critical, as scientific agnos- 
ticism generally is. As long as it remains positive, 
it is comparatively safe; but no mind, at this 
period of our evolution, is continually positive. 
Business complications, family cares, overwork, 
sickness or indisposition all interact on mind and 
body and produce, or intensify, negativeness. 
When negative, even a strong mind is vulnerable 
by psychic forces. For, be it remembered, the 
influence of the seance room does not cease with 
the closing of its doors. The entities which are 
attracted to a center of that kind will attach them- 
selves to an investigator and seek to influence 
him in his own home, or elsewhere, and await their 
opportunity in that regard. For this reason al- 
most all investigators are, in a measure, sooner 
or later affected by the influences they study. 

This is noticeable, even with leading scientists 
and trained minds, who, after years of research 
along these lines, accept evidence, as conclusive, 
which, in the beginning of their investigations, 
they would have entirely rejected — evidence which, 
in their professional work, they would exclude. 
Under the influences brought to bear upon them by 
the disembodied entities, their minds seem to lose 
discerning power, and the relationship between 
cause and effect. And this should not be a cause 
of wonderment to those who have given any atten- 
tion to the power of suggestion. An ego loses 
nothing of its mental power by giving up its body. 



PSYCHIC PHENOMENA 11 

It can therefore mentally suggest to another ego, 
either in or out of a physical body. 

A constantly repeated suggestion is like the 
dripping of water on a stone, it wears out op- 
position, and, in time, the suggestion is accepted 
wholly, or in part. Fortunately, for humanity, all 
disembodied spirits are not malignant. They are 
like humanity, as we see it in daily life — minus 
their physical bodies. Therefore they are ac- 
tuated by ordinary, human impulses and must be 
judged solely from this viewpoint. For ex- 
ample : 

A propagandist is a fanatic, whether incarnated, 
or excarnated. If he were a Spiritist in earthlife 
he would naturally continue persistently in his 
work after death. If he could convince a noted 
scientist, writer, speaker or statesman, he would 
spare no effort to accomplish his purpose, because, 
through such a convert, many other proselytes 
would be made to his cause. 

On the subjective plane there are good, bad and 
indifferent entities and no one can foretell the 
character of the mind one may contact during 
psychic investigation. It is not in accordance with 
experience, in such matters, to say that each mind 
will attract to itself only such minds as are in 
consonance with its own character. The insane 
asylums are filled with negatively good people who 
adorned family and social life before they were 
obsessed. Nor is it to be understood that in all 



12 FRAGMENTS OF TRUTH 

such cases their insanity was produced through 
the study of psychism. Negative persons are 
always in danger of psychic influences but are 
more apt to escape them if they ignore that realm 
than if they voluntarily intrude upon it. It is 
true that minds, of similar natures, are attracted 
to each other on the subjective, the objective and 
the interblended planes. And, while our friends, 
in physical life, may be similar, in a measure, to 
ourselves, yet it is also true that we sometimes 
suffer from undesired contact with criminals — and 
the same is true in the astral world. In neither 
of the cases cited, do we know of the danger until 
after the damage is done. 

Possession and obsession are but varying de- 
grees of the same condition — the partial, or com- 
plete control of one mind or body by another 
mind. And it may be interesting, viewed from 
the subjective side of life, to see how this is ac- 
complished. The obsessing entity approaches its 
victim and studies his character — which is in- 
dicated by the victim's aura and the pictures con- 
tained therein. The obsessor works upon the 
victim's weaknesses. If one of those weaknesses 
is vanity, then it flatters him and tells the victim 
what a great ego he is and how he has been se- 
lected to be a messenger to the people — to teach 
new and greater truths to the world. Or, if love 
is his vulnerable side, then the victim's love nature 
is appealed to and the obsessor poses as a child, 



PSYCHIC PHENOMENA 13 

a parent, or a lover; and, through the victim's 
human emotions, wins his confidence. The mes- 
sage may be conveyed to the victim through a 
medium, ouija board, or through mental sugges- 
tion, but, slowly, as the snake approaches the 
charmed bird, the obsessor draws nearer to its 
victim until, at length, the two auras blend. Little 
by little the victim's hand and arm may be con- 
trolled, as in automatic writing, until soon, if the 
practice is persisted in, the mind, will and body of 
the victim comes under the dominion of the ob- 
sessor to do with as it wills. Then, when the 
obsessor desires to use the body of its victim, it 
overpowers and crowds out the ego and usurps 
his rightful place. Commencing as subjective 
hypnotism it ends too frequently in insanity. 

Obsession may be guarded against by observ- 
ing a few common-sense rules. First, never under- 
take psychic investigation until duly equipped for 
the work. The proper method of preparation will 
be given later. 

Second, cultivate a positive, mental attitude at 
all times. This does not mean to be aggressive, 
but to have a calm reserve and watchfulness of all 
mental processes. Never drift mentally; but, con- 
sciously direct the mind along any selected line of 
thought. In other words, practise concentration 
at all times. 

Third, learn to practise self-control and then 
no one else can ever control you. 



14 FRAGMENTS OF TRUTH 

Fourth, put aside the fear of being controlled, 
and never doubt your own ability to protect your- 
self; fear lowers the vibration of one's aura and 
renders one more negative. 

The investigation of psychic phenomena has not 
produced unalloyed evil. Pioneers always pay the 
price of leadership, while those who follow, reap 
the benefits. During the last fifty years, humanity, 
as a whole, has benefited through the investiga- 
tion of psychism, for, by an overwhelming pre- 
ponderance of evidence, it has been established 
that the human personality survives bodily death. 
And, while this does not prove immortality, it 
lays the foundation for it. It is only logical to 
infer that if the mind persists independently of 
the body, even for a brief time, then, unless some 
other cause intervenes, it may persist indefinitely 
— and this is in perfect accord with Occult Phi- 
losophy, which teaches that as long as man, by con- 
scious effort, seeks evolvement, he will be im- 
mortal ; and that only devolvement, or stagnation, 
will destroy his identity. 

A further benefit has come to the Occident, 
through the investigation of psychic phenomena, 
and that is the removal of the fear of death. The 
old theology, of the West, painted death so hor- 
ribly, and so forbiddingly described an inane 
Heaven and a gruesome Hell, that both the transi- 
tion and the post-mortem states of existence filled 
one with fear. Man is prone to believe that which 



PSYCHIC PHENOMENA 15 

he desires to believe, and many men gladly ac- 
cepted the alternative view of the materialist — 
that death was annihilation. But now the Occident 
begins to know what the Occultist has always 
known, that death is but a change of consciousness 
— a passing from a denser into a finer form of 
matter. 

There is, undoubtedly, much of value to be 
learned through the proper study of psychism, 
but, so far, the results seem negligibly small com- 
pared with the effort and the cost — not only dur- 
ing the last seventy years, but through all the 
weary centuries of man's evolution on this planet 
— for we are still but tasting the old wine from 
new bottles. 

Physicists have carefully investigated modern 
necromancy, but have any new laws of physics 
been revealed to, or through, them? Chemists 
have investigated, but has the world been enriched 
through new facts revealed to them by subjective 
entities? In turn all the learned professions, arts 
and sciences have furnished votaries to the cult, 
but the spirits have added but little to the store 
of human knowledge. Why? 

We have collected an amazing mass of platitudes 
and of chatter, but no substantial revelations. 
Why? 

Is it because man becomes less intelligent as he 
gains experience and broadens his vision? 

That is not in accordance with past observa- 



16 FEAGMENTS OF TRUTH 

tions. The channel of communication between 
the two worlds seems to be open, and no pro- 
hibition seems placed on spirits to speak either 
wisely, or foolishly. In the absence of any other 
satisfactory answer to these questions, may we 
not accept, as a possible explanation, the teachings 
of Occultism, on this subject? 

Occultists say that when a man dies he is drawn 
by gravic force to that state, plane or subjective 
world, corresponding to his general vibration — or 
character. That the less developed characters and 
intelligences are, therefore, earthbound, because 
the first subjective plane is denser than the others. 
The more highly developed man, therefore, quickly 
passes through the first subjective plane to other 
and better states, leaving the undeveloped men 
and "angel guides," to contact this world of ours 
and to blindly lead the blind. 

Is it not possible, then, to reach higher in- 
telligences, to contact finer, inner worlds and to 
gain valuable information? 

The Occultist would answer, yes. There is 
always a proper and an improper way of doing 
everything, and there is a successful and an un- 
successful method of studying psychism — of in- 
vestigating psychic phenomena. 

There has always been a higher and a lower 
Occultism, a greater and a lesser magic. Aaron 
had studied this subject well and did not hesitate 
to compete with the Egyptian Magicians of 



PSYCHIC PHENOMENA 17 

Pharaoh's Court, and, by reason of his greater 
knowledge, overpowered them. 

By the study of Occultism, the occult may be 
mastered. All explorers, who go into an unknown 
country, first seek to learn what they can about 
that country — and, particularly, the dangers to be 
encountered there. Then, protecting themselves, 
as best they can, and, having made all provisions 
that foresight may suggest, they enter upon their 
quest. A like procedure is a sensible one in the 
study of psychism — or lesser magic; but, probably 
the unwise will, in the future, as in the past, rush 
in where the wiser ones cautiously tread. 

Before a student of Occultism enters upon an in- 
vestigation of necromancy, and of other branches 
of lesser magics — for there are other branches — 
he first studies the art of concentration. Having 
the theory well fixed in his mind, he commences 
the practice of specialized concentration upon the 
free Cosmic Forces which surround him — par- 
ticularly the positive force of Cosmic Blue. The 
correct shade of this color can be seen in the 
current leaping from pole to pole in a static 
machine, or where the trolley makes an imperfect 
contact with the wire. As has been shown more 
fully in "The History and Power of Mind," con- 
centrating upon a Cosmic Force draws that Force 
into the human aura. If the Force is of higher 
vibration than the aura, it will raise the vibration 
of the aura to its own rate. No malignant or ig- 



18 FRAGMENTS OF TRUTH 

norant entity ever vibrates as high as the color 
mentioned, therefore, it would be as impossible for 
an entity to obsess a person whose aura vibrates 
that color as it would be for glass to cut a 
diamond — for the higher vibration repels the 
lower, and even Paul became blind in the presence 
of an Angelic Being. 

The student whose aura is normally vibrating 
electric blue, is not only invulnerable to psychic 
influences, but is prepared to contact the higher 
planes of the inner life which correspond to that 
color — by reason of synchronous vibrations. 

The next step for the student is to develop in- 
dependent clairvoyance and clairaudience, by con- 
centrating upon the electric Blue Force, before 
mentioned, and later, upon the Yellow Cosmic 
Force. When these Forces are condensed in the 
two ganglia of the brain, known respectively as the 
pineal gland and the pituitary body, the vibration 
of these ganglia is raised until they function as 
inner vision and inner hearing. 

Having acquired the ability to see the inner 
worlds, the student now looks down upon the first 
subjective plane and studies the psychic forces 
there at work — much as a person looks down from 
an upper window on the street below and watches 
the " madding crowd.' ' 

Stepping behind the scenes and looking through 
the eyes of the student of Occultism at the actors — 
producers of psychic phenomena — and their work, 



PSYCHIC PHENOMENA 19 

the first thing that impresses one is the seeming 
inextricable blending of truth and falsehood. A 
total falsehood soon dies, though it may cause 
much destruction and sorrow during its brief life. 
But a lie, which is half a truth, gains power and 
vitality by reason of its truthful element; and, 
therefore, its life is longer and more dangerous. 

The lowest class associated with Spiritism is 
composed of tricksters, who pose as mediums, and, 
through sleight of hand, or mechanical contriv- 
ances, beguile the untrained investigator until 
they are either self-exposed, by carelessness, or 
crude effort, or are exposed by a careful observer. 
These imitations of mediums bring derision to the 
movement, which they misrepresent, and but little 
profit to themselves — since they are soon driven 
out of town, as common frauds, by the authorities ; 
and, becoming compulsive itinerants, never again 
acquire a serious following. 

The next class are real mediums who are con- 
stantly, or intermittently, controlled by disem- 
bodied entities. But here again truth and false- 
hood blend, for many mediums, abandoned by their 
former controls, or, unable, for a time, through 
physical depletion, to furnish the controlling entity 
with the requisite magnetism, resort to fraud to 
hold their followers. This is so confusing to the 
non-clairvoyant investigator, who is attracted by 
the actual phenomena and repelled by the fraud, 
that he often abandons the entire study in disgust. 



20 FRAGMENTS OP TRUTH 

Many controls are what they claim to be, In- 
dians, criminals and annualized men and women 
without physical bodies. Some are of the ordinary 
run of humanity, who have never progressed much 
along intellectual, or ethical lines, in their late 
lives. Others are materialists who are earth- 
bound, because of their mode of thought, but help 
to compose that motley throng who cannot rise to 
higher planes and are contented with using the 
minds and bodies of those left on earth. 

Occasionally, there are sincere souls, who, un- 
wisely, seek to use a medium to send comfort to 
the dear ones left behind ; but, whenever this effort 
is made, it is usually followed later by messages 
from impersonators, with ulterior motives. And 
last and worst of all, are the various grades of 
devolving egos, those who are hopelessly depraved 
and destructive, who are on the downward path to 
annihilation, for all destructive centers, sooner or 
later, destroy themselves. 

When watching the kinds of phenomena pro- 
duced, one is again confronted by the real and the 
imitation, the true, the false and the compounding 
of the two ; and this is particularly the case during 
the examination of the first four of the enumerated 
classes. 

Inspirational writing and speaking belong to the 
highest order of psychic phenomena, because they 
blend into true inspiration; and here the line of 
distinction sometimes becomes very thin. In these 



PSYCHIC PHENOMENA 21 

cases the intelligence of the medium must co- 
operate with a secondary intelligence, not neces- 
sarily that of a spirit, or of an individual, for, in 
true inspiration, a connection between the medium 
and the Universal Consciousness may be made. 
Most of the sacred writings have come to the 
world in this way — and, therefore, are called in- 
spired. 

Some one, keenly sensitive along spiritual lines, 
receives from Divine Consciousness — God — cer- 
tain ideas, or sometimes words, and these are 
transmitted to others through speech, or writing. 
And this, in a lesser degree, is true of all the 
greatest writers of the world. They are people 
who have not necessarily received their ideas from 
other intelligences, but who have been able to at- 
tach themselves subconsciously to the Universal 
Consciousness and to receive from It ideas, 
phrases and sometimes whole treatises. 

For example, Tennyson said that sometimes 
couplets came to him complete, and all that he did 
was to commit to paper that which floated into his 
mind from the ether. And was it not Byron who 
said: "I lisped in numbers, for the numbers 
earner' 

This does not necessarily mean that those poets 
were communicating with spirits. It was more 
probable that their sub-conscious minds were con- 
nected with the literary current in the Universal 
Consciousness and, through It, received an inflow 



22 FRAGMENTS OF TRUTH 

of ideas ; and, their minds being rhythmical, they 
expressed those ideas in poetry. This kind of in- 
spiration is much more rare than are cases in 
which the secondary intelligence is that of an in- 
dividual. 

It would not be fair to discuss psychic phe- 
nomena unless this aspect were included in the 
discussion, though, strictly speaking, it belongs to 
higher Magic, or Occultism. The mere mention 
of it, as a possibility, opens the door to subsequent 
imposition, so excarnated entities — spirits — may 
try to pose as Deity and impose upon sensitives 
who are experimenting along the line indicated. 

But there is a safeguard for the student, even 
though he be not an independent clairvoyant: 
In true inspiration there never is a magnetic, or 
psychic control, either mental or physical. True 
inspiration is, as the root words indicate, a breath- 
ing in, an absorption of ideas, expressions, or both, 
and there is no danger of obsession ; but, instead, 
a great benefit and uplift is given to the speaker, 
or writer, who is able to consciously tap Cosmic 
Consciousness, for his source of supply. And it 
should be clearly understood that the tapping 
process is done through concentration, effort and 
intellectual preparation. It is not a gift of God 
to be bestowed upon passive, negative, ignorant 
individuals. There is no royal road to inspiration, 
learning and success. 

In Spiritism the large majority of inspirational 



PSYCHIC PHENOMENA 23 

writers and speakers do not derive their power 
from Cosmic Consciousness through their own 
efforts, but, passively receive it from excarnated 
minds ; and this invariably leads to a lower form 
of mediumship, on the one hand, and to possession, 
or obsession, on the other. 

When the obsessing entity desires to use the 
hand and arm of its victim for automatic writing, 
it merely crowds out the medium's ego, from that 
portion of his body, and substitutes its own mag- 
netic member in the vacated physical arm and 
hand of its victim ; and, after enveloping the body 
and brain, of the now passive medium, with its 
own magnetism, it writes whatsoever it will, using 
the borrowed member of its victim as if it were 
its own. 

With the lower order of so-called inspirational 
speaking, it is somewhat different. Here it is 
sometimes possession and sometimes obsession. 
When possession, the " Guide," surrounds, or en- 
velops, the mind and body of the medium and 
impresses such thoughts and language as it wishes 
to convey, while in obsession, the mind, or ego, of 
the medium is entirely forced out of his body and 
the obsessor, entering it, uses it temporarily, 
speaking through it as though it were its own. 

But there is a unique group of cases, which is 
constantly enlarging, where inspiration is self-en- 
gendered. The subjective mind of man has poten- 
cies and potentialities far beyond any powers 



24 FRAGMENTS OF TRUTH 

active, or latent, of the objective mind. As man 
develops, his subjective self comes more and more 
into evidence, and when he has gained self-mas- 
tery, or dominion of the objective self, he uses 
his illimitable storehouse of memory and of knowl- 
edge along any desired line. At this point, in the 
race development, we sometimes see fitful evi- 
dences of the awakening of subjective minds. As 
a source of inspiration in speaking, it usually 
manifests by impressing its objective mind with 
the expressive word, apt illustration, or correct 
explanation, in such a manner that often the 
speaker and his audience realize that "he builded 
better than he knew. ' ' 

In writing, the subjective mind, at times, im- 
presses upon its objective self entire plays, poems 
and stories. Characters seem to float into the ob- 
jective consciousness, not as mental creations but 
as actual human beings. And here again let it 
be noted, as a test of this aspect of psychological 
power, there is never attached any extraneous, 
magnetic, or psychic control, either mental or 
physical. 

In the second enumerated group of phenomena 
— visions, premonitions, phantoms and phan- 
tasms — is another bewildering mixture of mental 
auto activity and induced activity, the source of 
which is varied. Again reverting to the subjective 
mind, it is found that it plays no small part in 
premonitions and in visions. Coming events, both 



PSYCHIC PHENOMENA 25 

good and evil, cast their shadows before, because 
they are largely self-created, and are psychically 
attached to their creators. Having originated on 
the mental plane, the subjective self becomes con- 
scious of them as they approach materialization. 
Sometimes the subjective mind succeeds in im- 
planting, in its objective mind, a picture of an 
approaching event ; sometimes it is merely an im- 
pression, more often merely an unformulated 
idea — or, as it is more popularly known, a 
" hunch.' ' 

Divine Consciousness, at times, in a man's tran- 
quil moments, and often when he is passing from, 
or into, sleep, impresses him with a prophetic 
knowledge of matters which affect him directly or 
indirectly. These impressions may, or may not, 
be in pictures, and are never accompanied by 
spirit control. In both classes of cases mentioned 
the vision, or the premonition, nearly always be- 
comes an actuality, in time. And the more care- 
fully men adapt their lives to this source of 
information, the greater will become their recep- 
tivity to further knowledge. 

The denizens of the deceptive realm also pro- 
duce a large number of visions and premonitions 
which beguile, afflict or entertain, psychic inves- 
tigators, sensitives, psychics and ultra passive, or 
negative individuals. Through telepathy, the ex- 
carnated entity implants pictures, or impressions, 
upon the unresisting mind of its victim. In fact, 



26 FRAGMENTS OF TRUTH 

it is often by such means, that one's attention is 
at first attracted, and, later, held by such pictures, 
or thoughts, and this is but one of the many de- 
vices used by the astral charmer. The, more fre- 
quent the practice, the weaker becomes the will 
of the victim and the stronger the power of the 
obsessor. It is needless to add that such visions 
and premonitory impressions are uncertain, de- 
pending upon the good, or bad, judgment, and the 
actual information of the entity who produces 
them. 

If a phantom is understood to be a fancied 
vision, an unreality, a thought picture, then the 
sources of phantoms are many. The astral world, 
the first subjective plane, is a limitless picture 
gallery. In it are all the photographs of the acts 
of men. These pictures float into the vision of the 
sensitive, the negative and the developing psychic, 
and are, largely, useless time killers. To indulge 
in this form of astral moving pictures, is but to 
encourage greater passivity, and to throw open 
wider the doors to psychic influences of the 
mediumship sort. These influences are not slow in 
taking advantage of such opportunities and soon 
commence to implant, through their power of 
suggestion, their own thought pictures into the 
minds of such sensitives, changing the curious in- 
vestigator into a conscious or, perhaps, an uncon- 
scious medium. 

There are also phantoms which are the pictures 



PSYCHIC PHENOMENA 27 

of each man's individual past, photographed in 
his own photosphere, or aura. When he can, 
through concentration and conscious effort, recall 
these phantoms he can connect his present with 
his past and wisely build his future. It is only 
an independent and trained clairvoyant who can 
always distinguish between a phantom and a 
phantasm. 

Among Occultists the word phantasm has grown 
to mean an apparition, a subjective entity, an ego 
without its body ; and applies to certain abnormal 
conditions of the living as well as of the dead. 
The most frequent cases met with, are those of 
persons who have just died, or who have died 
recently. The reason for this is that the excar- 
nated ego stands, as it were, in the doorway be- 
tween the two worlds and functions, in a measure, 
in both. Until disintegration of the body has pro- 
gressed to where the form has largely disap- 
peared, the soul, or ego, is magnetically attached 
to it, and can, if mentally strong, draw upon the 
magnetism of its body and, so clothe itself with 
electrical invisibles, as to appear to a psychic, or 
to a normal person abnormally passive at the 
moment. 

This phenomenon may best be understood when 
it is remembered that the human body is composed 
of electrical invisibles ; and when enough of them 
are condensed and arranged together, the human 
form is produced. Originally the incarnating ego, 



28 FEAGMENTS OF TRUTH 

being a magnetic center, draws the electrical in- 
visibles from its mother's blood, and it is thus 
that the embryo and finally the fetus are formed. 
After death, as the decomposing body liberates 
these electrical invisibles, they can be magnetically 
attracted, temporarily, by the ego, and massed so 
as to be sensed, or seen, upon the physical plane. 

As a rough illustration, suppose a ray of sun- 
light were permitted to enter a dark room. The 
slowly floating particles of dust in the room are 
invisible until the ray of light enters. Then the 
quickening vibration of the light draws and con- 
denses the unseen particles and they move more 
rapidly until the ray of light is clothed with 
myriads of vibrating particles. 

Sometimes an incarnated ego, burning with the 
desire to see a loved one, or to convey a message, 
unconsciously slips from his body, and, clothed 
with its magnetic particles, is able to appear to 
that one at a distant place. And what is done 
unconsciously by the uninstructed ego, is con- 
sciously done by a student of Occultism, with his 
own mind and body; and may be done by a 
denizen of the psychic realm, whose body has long 
been disintegrated, by vampirizing a medium, or 
by drawing upon the magnetism of the person it 
obsesses. Such denizen may thus procure sufficient 
magnetic invisibles to materialize and to appear to 
the living, for some sinister motive of its own. And 
because that magnetic form is but temporary and 



PSYCHIC PHENOMENA 29 

can be shaped at will, an " angel guide" is able to 
mask as a friend, or relative, and to deceive any 
one unless that one should be an independent 
clairvoyant. 

Because certain Occultists, during the last 
quarter of the nineteenth century, were accus- 
tomed to visit, in their thought bodies, some of 
their students, later the " spirit controls" imitated 
the Adepts and imposed upon some of the less 
developed students. By working on their vanity, 
these astral imposters directed those students to 
found scores of "Occult Brotherhoods," " Secret 
Orders," and " Hindoo Cults." Under the guid- 
ance of their directors, those students filched an- 
cient, honorable names for their bogus organiza- 
tions and deceived hundreds of honest seekers 
after occult truths. A teacher of higher Occultism 
is never found in the astral deception realm, and 
those who believe otherwise will eventually find 
themselves in another form of Spiritism. 

In the third class of psychic phenomena are 
clairvoyance and clairaudience and here again are 
to be found sunshine and shadow, the real and the 
imitation. Sometimes these powers develop in 
normal evolution as a man grows in character, 
knowledge and force. And it is just in accordance 
with a man's rate of vibration, that these powers 
develop and manifest. Some persons are able to 
see and hear only on the first subjective, or 
psychic, plane, while others are able to see on all 



30 FRAGMENTS OF TRUTH 

the higher planes connected with this planet. It 
will be observed that here the action is personal 
and the functioning is due entirely to the will of 
the ego. He opens and shuts his inner vision as he 
opens and shuts his physical eyes. In such cases 
as these the vision is clear and accurate. 

But there is also a false clairvoyance induced 
by the intervention of another's will, or through 
mechanical processes, and both lead to the same 
results — the impressing of another's thoughts 
upon the mind of the experimentalist. This false 
clairvoyance is illustrated first in mesmerism and 
hypnotism. The operator, whether he be incar- 
nated, or excarnated, puts his subject into an arti- 
ficial sleep and induces an abnormal state of 
consciousness. This is not true clairvoyance be- 
cause the subject does not function through his 
own volition. 

During an artificial sleep of this kind, the 
operator may force the subjective mind of his sub- 
ject from its body and send it to any point, or 
place, upon the earth; and while the subjective 
and objective minds of the subject are thus sep- 
arated, the subjective mind "wirelesses" to its 
objective mind such messages and describes such 
scenes as the operator desires or suggests. And 
the objective mind of the subject, who is still in its 
body, repeats the messages from its subjective 
mind to the operator. 

Then there is an artificial sleep produced 



PSYCHIC PHENOMENA 31 

through what is called self-induced hypnosis ; this 
is when an experimentalist, through the use of a 
crystal, or revolving disks, or a brilliant object 
suspended before his eyes, produces a self -induced 
sleep. While in this abnormal condition the body 
and brain of the experimentalist becomes an easy 
prey to any passing entity who may choose to 
use it, and the scenes that he describes and the 
messages he may give, while under this influence, 
are entirely undependable and perhaps absolutely 
false. 

A third method of producing unnatural, or false 
clairvoyance is through Yoga practices, which 
bring about physical and psychical disturbances. 
This is done by changing the polarity of the brain 
and reversing the natural circulation of the blood. 
Here again there is a lower psychical power de- 
veloped, which is more, or less, under the control 
of the experimentalist, but it is also true that this 
practice opens the way for other entities to enter 
and control the unhappy victim — as has been seen 
in innumerable cases of the practitioners of that 
art in America. 

In the fourth class of cases, again there is the 
usual admixture of the higher and the lower 
magic; this is called psychic healing. The Oc- 
cultist says such healing comes either from Divine 
Mind as an automatic response to the intense and 
continued desire, or demand, for health from the 
invalid, or, from some conscious and expert 



32 FRAGMENTS OF TRUTH 

manipulator of the Cosmic Currents. In rare 
cases they may be directed by a higher, disem- 
bodied Intelligence from the upper, interior planes 
of being. 

It is true, however, that the denizens of the 
deceptive realm sometimes, by the power of sug- 
gestion, cure imaginary diseases. But they usually 
exact, as an unmentioned price for their services, 
the right to direct, or control, that individual in 
the future. 

The fifth class of cases, physical phenomena and 
trance mediumship, is usually psychism of the 
lowest order, for here the operators are generally 
earth-bound spirits. Trumpet sounding, table tip- 
ping, slate writing, fortune telling, messages, 
materialization, etc. are produced by astral entities 
using the body and the magnetism of the medium, 
or of those, combined with the collective mag- 
netism of the investigators present. 

There are rare cases, however, where such 
phenomena may be duplicated by an embodied Oc- 
cultist, using elementals for his purpose. But no 
person, unless affected by psychic influences, could 
imagine a higher intelligence condescending to in- 
dulge in such astral legerdemain and horseplay as 
are seen in many seances. 

In the case of messages, they are both unre- 
liable as to source, and undependable as to fact. 
It is true that in some of the so-called "test mes- 
sages," facts, supposed to be known only to the in- 



PSYCHIC PHENOMENA 33 

vestigator, and to the excarnated person, are some- 
times given to prove the identity of the sender of 
the message. But this is not necessarily con- 
clusive evidence, because the communicating, dis- 
embodied entity can read in the subjective mind of 
the investigator the facts it is narrating to prove 
its identity. 

The subjective mind is the abode of permanent 
memory. All experiences, all impressions, all 
thoughts are photographed therein. A circum- 
stance may pass from out the conscious memory 
of the objective mind, but remains a sub-conscious 
picture within the higher mind. So, the apparent 
"test" is no test at all, and the only reason people 
are impressed with such phenomena is because 
they have not studied psychology. 

A little knowledge of Occult Philosophy would 
soon reveal the apparently marvellous messages 
and psychic phenomena to be very ordinary but 
dangerous psychic intoxication. Old wine in new 
bottles. Is it not almost time for a voluntary 
psychic prohibition movement? 



CHAPTER TWO 

MIRACLES 

The Christian nations are, or were, until com- 
paratively recent times, accustomed to think of 
miracles as the production of phenomena by super- 
natural means. 

This view was due, doubtless, to two causes: 
first, that the majority of people were ignorant 
of the cause of the phenomena, which we call 
miracles, and, second, our teachers, the priests, 
to give additional glory to the Founder of their 
religion, were accustomed to teach that His acts 
were above nature and that He was superior to 
His creations and could set at naught nature's 
laws whenever He willed to do so. But, those who 
are more widely read, those who have studied com- 
parative religions, those who know the lives of 
the Occultists of the past, realize that miracles 
did not commence with Jesus of Nazareth, nor will 
they end with the Christian Church. 

The orthodox churches, as well as the Christian 
Scientists and kindred cults, of the present day, 
assume that miracles, now, as in the past, are 
produced by supernatural means; that is to say, 
through, or by God; and that He destroys disease, 
performs cures and works other miracles. 

u 



MIRACLES 35 

This is but a repetition of the old mediaeval and 
post-mediaeval thought, taking a slightly different 
form, and is almost as erroneous as was the ag- 
nostic who, when asked to define a miracle, said : 
"It is an unusual phenomenon which never oc- 
curred." 

The oriental view of a miracle is, that it is the 
production of phenomena by superhuman means ; 
the distinction being drawn between supernatural 
and superhuman. Some of the modern students 
of Occultism adopt this view, believing that any 
one who can cause phenomena, or perform a 
miracle, is one who has more than human powers. 
The itinerant religious teacher in the orient, fol- 
lowing an immemorial custom, first attracts his 
audience and then produces phenomena as his cre- 
dentials. This procedure is equivalent to saying 
to his hearers : 

"I am a miracle worker. I have more than 
human powers, therefore I have more than human 
knowledge, consequently, I am worthy to be 
listened to." 

It is rather a natural position to take. When 
the Nazarene went before the Jews, certain of the 
Scribes and of the Pharisees said to Him: 
"Master, we would see a sign from Thee." 

They had been accustomed to have teachers 
along ethical, or philosophical, lines, produce 
phenomena as evidence of their competency to 
teach. If the Occident had adopted this most ex- 



36 FRAGMENTS OF TRUTH 

cellent custom it would have been saved from most 
of the innumerable teachers of the countless cults 
by whom it has been perplexed. 

The real religious leaders of the world have 
always had knowledge and power above those of 
their contemporaries, as the results of their 
evolvement have shown. 

As examples: Moses, Joshua, Elijah, Elisha, 
Daniel, Jesus, all Jesus' disciples, Apollonius 
of Tyana, Simon, the Roman Catholic Saints, the 
Hindoo Priests and others, all have produced phe- 
nomena now called miracles. 

In the human heart there is always the un- 
uttered, if not expressed, demand : f ' Show us your 
credentials. ' ' The leaders of several modern cults 
answered this demand by healing illnesses which 
could not be cured by the medical profession or 
by the pastors and priests of other churches. 
These demonstrations of power were not only an- 
swers to the cry in the hearts for a "sign," but 
challenged the religious world, saying in sub- 
stance : 

"These miracles are our credentials, and our 
mission is to bring new truths to the world. Come 
and accept our teachings, which carry with them 
healing powers." 

Then the members of the older churches said 
to their leaders: "Jesus and His disciples per- 
formed miracles and some of the members of the 
new cults produce many of a like kind : how is it 



MIRACLES 37 

that you are unable to manifest the same power V 

A few sporadic efforts have been made, by some 
Protestant denominations, to answer this question 
by demonstrating along similar lines, but, so far, 
with negligible results. 

The Catholic Church, on the other hand, has 
been more fortunate in this respect, for it always 
has justified its mission by its miracles. Those 
members who performed them were, in due time, 
canonized — and even their relics are still supposed 
to carry power. A novena to Saint Joseph often 
brings results, for which he and the Church both 
receive due credit — though the Occultist would 
give another explanation of the prayer and an- 
swer, as that of mental demand and supply. 

Each system has its own explanation of the 
cause of phenomena — though the phenomena are 
identical. But, no matter what the various teach- 
ers, or their followers, may say, it must be true 
that where identical phenomena are produced, the 
same causes must have been put into operation; 
and it is illogical to accept the miracles of one 
church and reject the same kind from another. 

The Jews' had a long line of miracle workers, 
and when Jesus came and performed His miracles 
it was equivalent to saying: "I justify my mission 
with phenomena." And the Jews had to either 
admit He was a legitimate teacher of a new 
presentation of truth or disqualify Him by say- 
ing: "He hath Beelzebub, and by the Prince of 



38 FRAGMENTS OF TRUTH 

Devils easteth he out devils." And the Christians 
learned that lesson well, for when they became 
powerful and other schools attempted to perform 
miracles, they also said: "We do them through 
the grace of God, but they through Beelzebub." 
And so it has been handed down in the Western 
World that the orthodox do their works by virtue 
of God, while the heterodox do theirs through the 
aid of His antagonist. 

Simon performed, through magic, many phe- 
nomena as wonderful as did Jesus, or His dis- 
ciples; but Simon was called a black magician. 
Today some wonder workers claim to produce 
their phenomena entirely through the love and 
presence of God, while they say other schools 
produce theirs through malicious, animal mag- 
netism — which is nothing more or less than Beelze- 
bub under a new name. 

It is this jealousy among wonder workers which 
often perverts their judgment. And the investi- 
gator of the tenets of a cult cannot safely accept 
the conclusions of a miracle man solely because he 
is a wonder worker ; for the connection between his 
words and works is often remote and illogical. 
The only safe method, therefore, to pursue, is to 
investigate all similar phenomena, deduce from 
them a law and then ascertain if the philosophy of 
the miracle man is in harmony with that law. 

One must make due allowance for the play of 
human imagination in all cases of miracles; and 



MIRACLES 39 

this constitutes the unearned increment of the 
miracle worker. This is true throughout all his- 
tory. Joshua, the great miracle worker of the 
Jews, was said to have made the sun and moon 
stand still ; but every student of occult law, or of 
the laws of astronomy, knows that such a phe- 
nomenon could not be produced by a man, though 
Joshua could and probably did concentrate 
certain Cosmic Forces which gave to his followers 
the appearance of sunlight and moonlight. Joshua 
did work miracles upon the rivers of Palestine 
and among the people, and he even raised the 
dead ; but his claim of making the sun turn back- 
ward in its course and the moon to reverse its 
position in the heavens is absurd, and must be 
considered one of the many unearned increments 
of a miracle worker. 

The "Lord," whoever that entity may have 
been, while talking to Hezekiah, through Isaiah, 
was supposed to have made the sun cast its shadow 
backward ten degrees upon the dial, and this was 
another case * of the unearned increment of the 
agent ; because there is no law by which a human, 
or incarnated mind, can reach into space and re- 
verse the will of Planetary Spirits, or Sun Gods, 
any more than an individual can turn aside the 
will of the Universal. 

When it was stated that the leaders of the First 
Church of Christ, Scientist, of New York City, 
had, by prayer alone, changed the carved words 



40 FRAGMENTS OF TRUTH 

on the cornerstone for their church, while it was 
in transit, because Mrs. Eddy did not approve of 
them, it must be understood that this was another 
case of unearned increment that should go with 
other miracle workers, and be accredited to the 
play of the human imagination. 

What is a miracle ? 

The Occultist says it is the production of phys- 
ical phenomenon by the use of occult means. 

When the Children of Israel had crossed the 
Red Sea and had come to the Waters of Marah 
they found them bitter and they could not drink. 
Moses commanded his followers to cut down a tree 
and cast it into the waters and, when this was 
done, a miracle occurred ; the bitter waters turned 
sweet and the Israelites quenched their thirst. 

When the City of San Diego, California, was 
suffering from a polluted water supply, and the 
inhabitants knew that the very life of the city was 
in jeopardy, a man went there from San Fran- 
cisco, and gave to a boatman a small bag, contain- 
ing an unknown substance, to drag through the 
water of the reservoir. When this was done, the 
contents of the bag was dissolved, the polluted 
water supply of San Diego became pure, and a 
modern miracle had been performed. 

In the case of Moses with the waters of Marah, 
that miracle was produced by the use of the know- 
ledge Moses had of the effect that the chemical 
constituents of the tree would have upon the 



MIRACLES 41 

water. And the miracle at San Diego was per- 
formed by the blue vitriol in the bag killing the pol- 
luting vegetable life and making the water sweet 
and palatable. In both cases what were originally 
miracles, on being analyzed, became known as 
chemical action; and one miracle was as great as 
the other. 

The realm of the miraculous is constantly con- 
tracting, while that of common knowledge is ex- 
panding; and what was a miracle at one period 
of history, is a common occurrence at a later time. 
The occult sciences of mediaeval days are the 
mothers of modern sciences, but their precocious 
children, like most human children, are too prone 
to underestimate the wisdom of their ancestors. 

When Jesus and His disciples performed won- 
derful cures, some two thousand years ago, the 
people thought they were great teachers because 
they used unknown forces. The same miracles 
are performed today by Christian Science, New 
Thought, or by Occult Practitioners. These cures 
have ceased to be miraculous because they are all 
now within our common experience, or knowledge. 
An examination of all historical miracles will re- 
veal them as belonging to one of two general 
classes: first, where the phenomenon is produced 
by the independent functioning of individual mind 
or where there is action of individual mind on 
mind; second, where individual mind acts on oc- 
cult forces. 



42 FRAGMENTS OF TRUTH 

As examples of the functioning of individual 
minds, there are what are commonly known as 
voluntary clairvoyance and clairaudience. These 
occult senses are not, in themselves, miraculous 
but are only super-normal, as compared with un- 
developed humanity of today; and clairvoyance 
is a miracle only to those who do not understand 
its functioning. When Jesus, using these occult 
senses, saw Nathaniel under the fig-tree, far away, 
He impressed all those around Him with His 
superhuman power by describing the conversa- 
tion that occurred and everything that was done 
by Nathaniel. This created in the minds of His 
hearers a worship of His power. In modern times 
a person may also become clairvoyant and see 
what is done at a distance, and the world is just 
beginning to understand, in this twentieth century, 
that such a sense is merely a normal, human power 
developed by every ego at a certain point in its 
evolvement. 

The second division of the first class mentioned 
— where mind acts on mind — is itself divisible into 
two classes, magic and suggestion. Magic is a 
distinct branch of Occultism ; it is one of the occult 
sciences. In another chapter it is dealt with from 
its better known, but lesser aspect, as necromancy. 
It will be touched upon now as one of the working 
tools of the miracle man. Of course it must not 
be supposed that its modus operandi will be dis- 
closed, since that is one of the secrets of the 



MIRACLES 43 

student of the Occult. It is sufficient to say, then, 
that, as a human mind can reach another mind 
telepathically, so the human mind can act upon 
intelligences less than human. For example, as 
a man may control a dog, so may he control certain 
intelligences which, as yet, have not incarnated on 
this earth. These lesser intelligences are called 
elementals, and, through the control of a trained 
mind, can be made to produce physical phenomena, 
such as the carrying of articles from place to 
place, the precipitation of articles, the disintegra- 
tion and reintegration of material things. 

For example: When Jesus was called upon to 
pay His taxes, He directed Simon to go to sea, 
cast his hook, take the first fish caught and in its 
mouth would be found a piece of money to pay 
taxes for them both. Jesus, either clairvoyantly 
saw a fish which had swallowed money — not a rare 
occurrence — and through His will compelled it to 
take the hook, or, knowing where there was money, 
by the use of elementals, disintegrated, conveyed 
and reintegrated it inside the fish. This latter 
process of disintegrating and reintegrating is fre- 
quently seen in these days at spiritistic seances as 
in the precipitation of flowers, etc. 

The difference between the amateur and expert 
worker along these lines is that the precipitated 
articles of the former last but a short time and 
then crumble into dust, while those of the expert 
last their normal lives. This difference is due to 



44 FRAGMENTS OF TRUTH 

the fact that if the interstices between the par- 
ticles that compose the percipitated article are 
unduly extended, they will never again perma- 
nently hold their normal relationship to each 
other, nor will they hold their relationship if de- 
magnetized in the operation — as the elasticity in 
rubber is destroyed by overstretching, so de- 
magnetization and overdistention in precipitation 
weaken the articles precipitated. But the phe- 
nomena cannot be produced without an extension 
of the interstices and an expert judgment based 
on numerous experiences is required to accurately 
adjust the particles. 

The second sub-division — suggestion — is more 
familiar to the present age. Suggestion is a 
thought sent telepathically by one mind to an- 
other. No thought which is repeatedly and force- 
fully sent to another person can fail to reach him ; 
but whether or not it is acted upon is another 
question. Thought travels unimpeded in the 
same manner as the etheric waves, initiated by a. 
spark from a wireless station. The spark causes 
a motion of the ether which goes forth onward 
and outward into space, registering wherever 
there is a receiving instrument. And wherever 
there is a receiving negative mind it catches, 
quickly, a thought sent telepathically into the 
ether; and even a positive mind must receive a 
thought sent by a trained mind directly to it. 

Suggestion plays a most important part in 



MIEACLES 45 

miracle working. In all cases of nervous troubles, 
in almost all cases of functional troubles, sugges- 
tion is an all-powerful instrument in healing. 
Many wonderful cures of the modern miracle 
worker are reported. It may have been a tumor 
that was cured in an instant — all schools cite such 
instances — but there never was a human sugges- 
tion sufficiently powerful to destroy a fibroid 
tumor and there is no authenticated case of 
record, notwithstanding the many claims to that 
effect. But there have been phantom tumors 
which have been cured; that is to say there are 
certain groups of nerves in the human body that 
can be worked upon, by the ego incarnated within 
that body, in such a manner as to cause all the 
phenomenon of a tumor and which cannot be dis- 
tinguished from a real tumor except through 
clairvoyant vision, or an X-ray. 

Through the power of suggestion it is possible, 
in the case of a phantom tumor, to remove the 
creating thought, which produced it, to relax the 
nerves and thus dispel it — and these are the cases 
that are cited in all the modern schools of miracle 
workers. 

Many persons have been nervously bed-ridden. 
They were obsessed with the idea that they could 
not move, that their muscles would not function, 
that their nerves would not act. A strong sug- 
gestion sent forth by a trained mind will change 
the mentality of the person who is suffering and, 



46 FRAGMENTS OF TRUTH 

through that change, bring a reaction to the 
physical body. All nervous conditions can be suc- 
cessfully changed and the many cases of this kind 
cited in the Bible or performed by modern cults 
can thus be explained. 

Cures are sometimes effected by a mental 
change through causes other than suggestion. 
An interesting case of this kind occurred in 
Savannah, Georgia, in 1886, during the Charleston 
earthquake. A leading physician's wife, who had 
been bed-ridden for twenty years, and who had 
been pronounced incurable by all the prominent 
nerve specialists of the Eastern Coast, when she 
felt the house rocking, bounded out of bed, ran 
down two flights of stairs, dashed across the 
street, vaulted the fence into the park and sat on 
a bench for several hours before she could be per- 
suaded to re-enter her house. The earthquake 
brought a nervous shock to her which wrought 
a complete change in her mentality, causing her 
body to once more function normally. 

Suggestion was used by Jesus and His disciples, 
and by all Occultists who had preceded Him, and 
it is used by all similar workers today. When 
Jesus fed the multitude on a few loaves and fishes, 
the phenomenon did not then come within any of 
the known laws of nature, occult or otherwise. 
But it was possible with His power to impress, 
through suggestion upon the minds of the people, 
the belief that they had been fed. The phe- 



MIEACLES 47 

nomenon was produced, the curiosity of the mul- 
titude was satisfied, its hunger appeased, creden- 
tials established and mental suggestion had done 
the work. 

When King Edward, then the Prince of Wales, 
visited India, it is authenticated that there were 
present several thousand people in one of their 
great temples, and that a wonder worker of India 
was brought in who did the well-known basket 
trick. 

How was it done? 

A mind can so dwell upon an image as to cause, 
within its own photosphere, that image to appear; 
and it can be so intensified that every one, looking 
upon the person producing the picture, can see 
nothing but the picture. The mental image is im- 
pressed upon the minds of the spectators with 
such intensity that it cannot be distinguished from 
the reality. 

Moses was not convinced of his mission to the 
Jews until the "Lord God," who came to him in 
the bush, told him to cast down the stick he held 
in his hand and it became a snake. Then he was 
told to catch the snake by the tail, and, when he 
had done it, the snake was transformed into a rod. 
In reality there was no snake, but an image of a 
snake had been impressed upon Moses' mind, and 
it is said that Aaron went through a similar ex- 
perience. 

Moses and the Egyptian miracle workers, in 



48 FRAGMENTS OF TRUTH 

their contest for supremacy, as miracle workers, 
each produced the same phenomena in the same 
way; that is to say, they held the image so com- 
plete in their minds that any person looking at 
them could see nothing hut the image. 

Madam Blavatsky duplicated some of these 
phenomena in New York when she formed the 
Theosophical Society. A gentleman called upon 
her who desired to join the society and to hecome 
her student. When he was boasting of his ability 
and bravery, Madam dropped her handkerchief, 
and, as he stooped to pick it up, to all appearances 
it became a snake. It is needless to say he did not 
join the society. 

When Jesus performed His first miracle of turn- 
ing water into wine, it was done, or could have 
been done, by His imaging the water as wine. The 
guests did not know the difference and were better 
off with the imagined wine than they would have 
been with the fermented juice of the grapes — 
having consumed a quantity of the latter during 
the earlier part of the supper. 

The second class of cases is where an individual 
mind manipulates occult forces. What and where 
are these forces? 

The Occultist says that around, in, and through 
the earth, are subtile forces of nature which the 
human mind, by study and concentration, can use 
as it desires. As the dynamo collects free elec- 
tricity from the atmosphere, by the rapid revolu- 



MIRACLES 49 

tion and friction of its wheel and turns it into 
light, heat, or power, so the human mind, acting 
as a dynamo, can attract to itself the free Cosmic 
Forces of nature, and, drawing them into itself, 
can then send them forth in any direction and for 
any purpose it may desire. Many miracles are 
performed by the mind consciously using these 
occult forces, but only a trained mind is able to do 
it. Merely thinking of them in a passive way 
cannot put them into operation. 

The mind acts upon these forces as the wind 
acts upon water. For example : there is a placid 
lake. Now a little breeze stirs the water slightly; 
the breeze continues, growing in strength, and 
there is a ripple on the water; and as the wind 
increases the ripples finally become waves. 

It is in a like manner that the human mind acts 
upon the Cosmic Forces through concentration; a 
little thought scarcely brings any action of the 
forces. But when concentration is continued for 
any length of time, they are set into motion and 
thus it is that miracles may be performed. . 

When Jesus performed the miracle of the draft 
of fishes, He probably produced the phenomenon 
by putting into operation these same forces of 
nature. He pictured, near the boat, a vortex in 
the water; this caused a movement there, which 
attracted the fish to that center. Then He directed 
His disciples to cast their nets into the vortex and 
they made the miraculous catch. 



50 FEAGMENTS OF TKUTH 

When Jesus stilled the storm He put a Cosmic 
Force into action which nullified the opposing 
force. He drew a higher Cosmic Force into the 
vortex where the storm was raging. The higher 
overcame the lower and dissipated its fury. When 
Jesus saw Lazarus lying dead, He knew that the 
vihrations of the atoms composing Lazarus' body 
had become so slow that the ego could no longer 
control it with its magnetic force. Jesus with His 
tremendous power of concentration directed the 
Orange Cosmic Force into the motionless form of 
Lazarus and commanded him to "come forth.' ' 
Then the conscious ego, who was still near its 
body, re-entered and Lazarus was raised from the 
dead. 

Within a short time after death, life may be re- 
stored by any one who understands the process of 
restoration. The Electrotherapist, on rare oc- 
casions, has resurrected a lifeless body through 
the use of electricity — which is a part of the Blue 
Cosmic Force. The difference between the Oc- 
cultist's method and the Electrotherapist 's is, 
the former does the work through mental proc- 
esses and the latter by aid of an electric battery. 
In the course of the evolution of the human race, 
to triumph over a premature death will cease to 
be a miracle. 

It is contrary to the traditions of Occultism to 
teach other than accepted students, the use of the 
destructive forces of Nature. Mankind, unfor- 



MIRACLES 51 

tunately, is still, like a child, destructive in its 
tendency — as witness Art, Science, Literature, In- 
vention, Manufacture, Transportation — every line 
of human endeavor perverted to destructive pur- 
poses during the last five years. And for this 
reason, details of how Jesus destroyed the fig-tree, 
or how the plagues befell the Egyptians cannot 
be entered into. But it is sufficient to say that the 
destructive forces of Nature can be put into opera- 
tion, by the human mind, in the same manner as 
can the constructive forces and both may be used 
to produce miracles. 

The immediate purpose of this chapter is to 
show that all men are using the forces of Nature, 
through which miracles are performed. The con- 
scious agent produces them quickly, while he who 
uses the forces unconsciously does not get results 
until after many years — and then may be unable 
to trace the causes from their effects. Most per- 
sons drag out unhappy lives, due to their environ- 
ment, totally unconscious that it is self-created, 
and that it is self-curable through a change of 
mental attitude toward it. 

Each person, through the study of psychology 
and philosophy, can learn the rules that govern 
creation and make the Spiritual, Mental and 
Physical environment desired. And since to think 
is to create, all men should carefully scrutinize 
their habits of thought lest they become Franken- 
eteins and create monsters. 



52 FRAGMENTS OF TRUTH 

A man's character determines the quality of his 
thoughts; and therefore, all the Saviours of the 
world have taught the same ethical principles, 
hoping thereby to convince man that ethics are 
not moral platitudes but are statements of the 
immutable laws of Nature. 



CHAPTER THKEE 

VIBRATION 

Scientists tell us that vibration is motion and is 
the underlying cause of everything that exists as 
form. But the Occultist goes further and says 
that vibration began with time, and was the result 
of the desire of the Universal Consciousness for 
light and for mental and material expression in 
forms. 

The Scientist says it is atoms, ions, corpuscles 
and electrical invisibles that vibrate. He admits 
that he has never seen one of these infinitesimal 
divisions of matter, yet he blindly claims that they 
exist, as necessities, since they are the bricks with 
which the Universe is builded, and here he stops 
for lack of further knowledge along this line. 

Such students as are not satisfied with such 
meager information as the Scientist has to give, 
may turn to the Occultist and learn that the atom 
is the smallest indivisible particle of matter and 
is a globular, vibrating center of magnetic force. 
It has two distinct motions, a rotary, or generating 
motion, and an elliptical, or manifesting motion. 
It is an infinitesimal portion of the Universal Con- 
sciousness and has a positive and a negative 
aspect. 

53 



54 FRAGMENTS OF TRUTH 

Its positive aspect is atomic consciousness ; its 
negative aspect is materiality, and neither aspect 
can function without the other. By reason of its 
conscious, or positive aspect, its rotary motion is 
maintained; and by reason of its materiality, or 
negative aspect, its elliptical, or manifesting mo- 
tion is sustained. 

During the long Cosmic Nights, while the Uni- 
versal Consciousness was unconscious and resting, 
there was no vibration of atoms in the Universe. 
There was nothing but darkness and silence. Such 
portions of the Universal Consciousness as had, in 
previous Cosmic Days, been particled into atoms 
were as vibrationless as was the unparticled por- 
tion. All forms had disappeared and the Uni- 
versal Consciousness was a boundless, homoge- 
netic, motionless sea. 

Before the Great Consciousness became uncon- 
scious, It knew how long the coming Cosmic Night 
would last, and, as a finite mind, before sinking 
into repose, knows the hour it must waken, so the 
Universal Consciousness knew when Its rest would 
end, and when Its mental and material manifesta- 
tion would again begin. 

It was in the center of the Universe that vibra- 
tion began on the morning of each Cosmic Day; 
and it was, and it will be, in the center of the 
Universe that vibration ended, and will end, at the 
close of this and of every other Cosmic Day. And 
such centers as were first created, by Universal 



VIBRATION 55 

Consciousness for It to manifest through, were 
formed at the center of the Universe. They were 
and are the vital organs of the Macrocosm and 
stand in the same relationship to the Universal 
Consciousness as do the vital organs of the mi- 
crocosmic man to his physical form of manifes- 
tation. 

It was at these centers — where the vital organs 
of the Macrocosm were to he placed — that atomic 
vibration began, as it was at the centers where the 
vital organs of microcosmic man were to be, that 
his material, atomic vibrations began, before he 
became a manifesting center of consciousness. 

When the first great desire for material mani- 
festation began in the Universal Consciousness, a 
few atoms at the center of the Universe began 
slowly to rotate and, because of their rotary mo- 
tions, those atoms became differentiated, or sepa- 
rated from the homogeneous mass of unconscious- 
ness — of which they had been a part — and became 
individual vortices of force. They were preparing 
to manifest the force they were generating. 

The immediate effect of the rotary motion of 
the first few atoms was to create a magnetic center 
of attraction for more atoms to differentiate and 
to join the vortex already formed, and thus the 
nucleoid of the Macrocosmic heart was created. 

As an illustration : There is a large block of ice. 
It is lying smooth and motionless. Suddenly, in 
the center of that ice, something stirs. Now there 



56 FRAGMENTS OF TRUTH 

appears to be a few infinitesimal grains of ice mov- 
ing slightly; and now more grains of ice are join- 
ing in the movement. As each grain separates 
from the original mass, it is attracted to and joins 
that vibrating center; and now that center is 
changing in appearance. It is no longer ice but 
is transformed into a liquid. The ice has melted. 

The transformation of the solid block of ice into 
liquid was caused by the increased rotary and 
elliptical motions of the atoms composing the ice. 
And the increase of motion, or vibration, was pro- 
duced by the minute bit of consciousness of each 
atom responding to its innate desire for a broader 
manifestation than it could have in its congealed 
form as ice. 

When there was no desire for manifestation in 
a higher form than that of ice, there was neither 
a rotary nor an elliptical motion, perceptible, of 
the atoms composing that mass ; but, when the de- 
sire for a higher manifestation awakened in each 
atom, then vibration and differentiation began and 
the ice evolved into water, the next higher state 
of consciousness above ice. 

In the beginning of a Cosmic Day, before any 
material forms have been created, there are two 
grades of atoms, the negative and the positive. 
The negative grade is that portion of God — Uni- 
versal Consciousness — which has never manifested 
in forms of any kind during any Cosmic Day. 
That grade can be called the superabundance of 



VIBRATION 57 

God. It is really the great reserve of the Uni- 
versal Consciousness and is sometimes called the 
undifferentiated part of God. When compared 
with the positive, manifesting grade of atoms, it 
is as the potter's clay compared with the potter's 
wares. It is fallow now, but, in Days to come, it 
will be gradually brought into manifestation, as 
it is needed to carry out the plans of Deity. 

But it is the vibrating, manifesting portion of 
God — Universal Consciousness — that is now under 
consideration, and It is composed of atoms and 
atoms. Some are vibrating more rapidly than 
others, because they belong to a higher grade of 
consciousness than others. And this is because 
they have been differentiated for a longer time, 
have vibrated more, have generated more force 
and have been used in the composition of higher 
forms than others. It is the difference between 
the experienced and inexperienced atoms which 
makes the distinction. 

In the beginning of this Cosmic Day, when the 
manifesting portion of God desired to again mani- 
fest in the forms of men and things, It knew, by 
Its past experiences in other Days, that the vibra- 
tion of all Its manifesting particles, or atoms, 
must be established before any forms could be 
produced : and it was through the conscious aspect 
of the highest grade of atoms, at the center of the 
Universe, that rotation, or vibration, began. And 
it was from that point, as a center, that the desire 



58 FRAGMENTS OF TRUTH 

emanated which inspired all other rotating atoms 
to vibrate higher. 

As an illustration of the operation of the Law 
of Attraction, or of sympathy, as it is sometimes 
called, the same principle manifests in the human 
family as contagion of action. For example: 
Should a man start to run, on a thoroughfare, al- 
most every one who saw him, would first wonder 
why he was running, and then the street would be 
filled with persons running after him. If a person 
in a crowd begins to laugh and continues laughing 
for a while, every one who hears, laughs also. If a 
pathetic scene upon the stage causes a few in- 
dividuals to weep, the whole audience becomes af- 
fected, through the operation of the Law of Attrac- 
tion, or sympathy, and weep, or feel like weeping. 
And as it is with centers of consciousness, so it is 
with the atoms composing those centers; they 
vibrate, or rotate, according to the extent of each 
one's inherent power, and are in sympathy with 
all other atoms in their individual center. 

The creation of a form began with the amalga- 
mation of two, or more, atoms vibrating at the 
same common rate. And the growth of a form 
is due to the continuous attraction of more atoms 
of a common rate to that nucleus, or center. 

For example: The vortex of atoms that was 
the beginning of a pine tree, began with the amal- 
gamation of a few atoms vibrating at the same 
rate. And, through the magnetic attraction, or 



VIBRATION 59 

sympathy, emanating from those few atoms, as a 
vortex, or nucleus, more atoms of the same rate 
were attracted. But, atoms vibrating at a dif- 
ferent rate, such as would combine to compose an 
elm, or a maple tree, were repelled from that 
center. Through its magnetic attraction, that pine 
tree center slowly accumulated from earth, air and 
water only such atoms as would make it consistent 
in all its parts — which would make it a pine tree 
and nothing else. 

There was another element that entered into 
the creation of the pine tree. There was a certain 
amount of concentration of consciousness, as well 
as the sympathy, or attraction, of its atoms for 
each other. There was consciousness enough in 
each atom composing the pine tree to enable them 
to reject, or repel, as well as to attract and select, 
the right atoms to harmonize with them, and to 
make their center a perfect tree. And this small 
amount of consciousness grew with the tree's 
growth, because each atom that came into it 
brought a bit more consciousness to swell the con- 
glomerate whole until it became a pine tree con- 
sciousness with its own individual form, odor and 
color. But, if that pine tree consciousness had 
not also had the power to repel atoms of a differ- 
ent vibration, instead of bearing pine needles and 
pine cones, it would have borne leaves and fruit. 

Forms, on the spiritual plane of consciousness, 
are composed of atoms vibrating at a very rapid 



60 FRAGMENTS OF TRUTH 

rate, are of tie finest texture and of most ex- 
quisite colorings. The beauty and fineness of 
spiritual forms are due to the fact that they are 
composed of atoms that have evolved from lower 
grades of manifestation, through many forms of 
expression, to the spiritual plane. 

All consciousness is intensified through the ex- 
periences of expression; and, whether it be an 
atom, or a conglomerate mass of atoms forming 
a sun, a world, a man, or an animal, manifestation, 
or expression, is the only means by which con- 
sciousness evolves. 

The atoms on the mental planes are next lower, 
in their rates of vibration, than are those upon 
the spiritual planes and their colorings are also 
varied according to their rates of vibration, but 
each mental form is individualized and manifests 
according to its development, or undevelopment, 
as the case may be. 

For example : There are many so-called unusual 
minds. Unusual because they have mental char- 
acteristics peculiar to themselves. They live upon 
the earth in physical bodies, or they may be ex- 
carnated and abide upon some of the subjective 
planes of consciousness but they are not in rap- 
port with the mass of consciousnesses around 
them. Such minds glorify everything they see. 
To them the color blue is bluer than it is to 
others. The sunshine is more golden and the 
moonlight has a charm that others cannot see. 



VIBRATION 61 

Music, to them, is entrancing; art, uplifting; 
beauty, adorable; and love, glorifying. 

These minds are idealistic ; and the atoms, which 
compose them, vibrate at a more rapid rate than 
do the atoms that compose the minds who never 
can determine the true color of a thing, and who 
like sunshine better than clouds because they feel 
more comfortable on a sunny day. Or, who like 
posters better than pictures because they are 
funnier. 

The Occultist would describe the idealistic mind 
as in rapport with the higher Cosmic Forces, while 
those minds who do not idealize, vibrate with the 
lower shades of the red, green and orange 
Cosmic Forces. 

On the material plane the atoms composing 
physical, or material, forms are of a still lower 
rate of vibration than are those upon the mental 
plane; but everything from the greatest and most 
sublime, down to the smallest and most insig- 
nificant center of consciousness, generates and 
possesses powers that manifest as attraction and 
repulsion, in its individual radius or sphere. And 
whether a center belongs to the constructive, or 
destructive, side of Nature, depends upon its mode 
of manifestation. If it manifests more attraction 
than repulsion it is more constructive than de- 
structive. But if it manifests more repulsion than 
attraction then it is more destructive than con- 
structive. 



62 FRAGMENTS OF TKUTH 

In the morning of this, our Cosmic Day, before 
any forms had been created, the Universal Con- 
sciousness started Its constructive atoms rotating 
from left to right ; and Its destructive atoms rotat- 
ing from right to left. The reason construction 
goes from left to right and destruction from right 
to left has not been revealed by Universal Con- 
sciousness to finite minds. And it is quite unim- 
portant, to finite minds, which direction, construc- 
tive, or destructive, atoms rotate; but, for the 
sake of the evolvement of forms, it is most impor- 
tant that the constructionists should preponder- 
ate in numbers over the destructionists. For, if 
the atoms vibrating destructively should equal, or 
exceed, in numbers the atoms vibrating construc- 
tively then the destruction of all forms, in the 
Universe, would ensue, and evolution would cease. 

As an illustration of how forms composed of 
destructive, or outlaw, atoms disturb constructive 
centers, or forms, in Cosmos, comets may be con- 
sidered. These are centers of consciousness com- 
posed of atoms that rotate from right to left. They 
are Cosmic centers, with no dependable orbits 
of manifestation, but go rushing about in space, 
for a time, colliding with other centers, which 
come in their way. They are destructive and dis- 
orderly and usually end their careers by plunging 
into a sun, somewhere in the Universe, or by ex- 
ploding and scattering their fragments into space. 
When those fragments of broken comets are at- 



VIBRATION 63 

tracted into the atmosphere of a planet, they fall 
upon it and are buried in the ground, or are swal- 
lowed by the sea. These fragments are often 
called meteors. 

Among men, in the body politic, there are minds 
whose atoms rotate from right to left, overturning 
and destroying happy and prosperous, social and 
financial conditions. Such minds are found among 
those who hate and kill other men. They are the 
minds who delight in the downfall of other human 
beings and who seek to rob others of their pos- 
sessions both mental and material. 

Among men's foods and medicines there are 
nourishing, upbuilding things composed of atoms 
that are constructively rotating from left to right, 
and there are poisonous, destructive things com- 
posed of atoms destructively rotating from right 
to left. The poisonous, outlaw atoms clog the 
system, destroy the blood and break down the tis- 
sues. All poisonous things are destructive, and 
are composed of outlaw atoms, and yet, there are 
individuals who deliberately inject into the bodies 
of other individuals the deadly preparations they 
know are destructive. 

Should the body and the mind of a man be mag- 
nified until the atoms, of which he is composed, 
were to become visible to physical eyes, those 
atoms would be seen as rotating, revolving globes, 
or balls, and each a separate and distinct center 
of generating, magnetic force. The atoms com- 



64 FRAGMENTS OF TRUTH 

posing tie mind intermingle with the physical 
atoms influencing and controlling them by reason 
of their greater magnetic power. 

This control of physical atoms, by mind atoms, 
is accomplished through the conscious half of the 
mind atoms coming into contact with the conscious 
half of the physical atoms. It is here, as it is 
throughout the Universe, that the stronger control 
the weaker. 

When a physical body is resting, or sleeping, it 
is not manifesting, or expressing, force but its 
atoms do not stop rotating. Each atom is a minia- 
ture dynamo continuously generating and storing 
force for future use. This is why sleep is neces- 
sary for an exhausted physical body, because, 
when the body is motionless, its atoms are accumu- 
lating more force than they are expending. 

If the magnified physical body should be afflicted 
with cancer, the diseased part would be seen com- 
posed of outlaw atoms rotating in an opposite 
direction from those which compose the harmo- 
nious, or healthy tissues. And those destructive, 
cancerous atoms would be rotating at a slower 
rate, and would be of a different color than the 
harmonious atoms. 

Should an Occultist treat that inharmonious con- 
dition, he would send into the patient's body a 
magnetic stream, or army, of new, constructive 
atoms rotating so much more rapidly than the 
cancerous ones that the outlaws would be forced 



VIBRATION 65 

out and away from the body. And his work would 
be done upon both the mental and the physical 
planes. He would bring such material remedies 
into use, upon the diseased tissues, as would re- 
move the destructive physical atoms, and his reme- 
dies would all be constructive. They would 
strengthen and stimulate the healthy atoms by 
reinforcing them in number, and the new atoms 
would take the places vacated by the outlaw, or 
cancerous ones. 

But, if relief were not brought to this physical 
body and it were left to the destructive power 
of the cancerous atoms, then the rotary motion of 
the healthy atoms would gradually become slower 
and the patient's whole body would become nega- 
tive to the destructive outlaw atoms. Positiveness, 
whether constructive or destructive, overcomes 
negativeness everywhere in the Universe ; and the 
positive, destructive, cancerous atoms in this pa- 
tient's body would gradually overpower and 
change the rotary motion of the negatively con- 
structive ones until the whole physical body and 
blood would become inharmonious and cancerous. 
But if the patient had evolved mentally and 
physically to a state of positive constructiveness, 
then his mental atoms would control his physical 
atoms and, repelling the destructive ones, prevent 
their entrance among them. 

Observation and experience have shown that, 
soon or late, destruction destroys itself; that a 



66 FRAGMENTS OF TRUTH 

destructive center continues to attract destructive 
atoms to itself until there comes a revulsion among 
the destructionists and it is disrupted. And, while 
it is true that destroyers work more rapidly, while 
they work, and do more mischief in a shorter time 
than constructionists can immediately rebuild, yet, 
in the Universe, the destructionists are so greatly 
outnumbered by the constructionists, that evolve- 
ment of forms will continue until the end of this 
Cosmic Day. 

When a constructive, evolving center, or form, 
is large, strong and positive enough to attract and 
control dissipated, unruly atoms, it can, by its 
magnetic power, change the rotary motion of those 
dissipated atoms and force them to rotate from 
left to right in harmony with its own vibration; 
and thus the destructive center may be changed to 
the constructive side of Nature. 

For example : In Cosmos, a comet that plunges 
into a sun is, by the superior magnetic force of 
the sun, stopped in its career. Its atoms are com- 
pelled to vibrate in harmony with those of the sun 
by reason of the greater number and superior, 
magnetic power of the sun's atoms; and the con- 
sciousness of the sun's atoms is so much further 
evolved than is the consciousness of the comet's 
atoms that the sun absorbs the comet without 
shock or injury to itself. 

The continuation, or life, of a center depends 
upon its magnetic power to hold its atoms to- 



VIBRATION 67 

gether, to keep them vibrating in harmony and, 
also, to continuously attract new atoms. And an 
individual mind must continually gain in knowl- 
edge and power of concentration, or become stag- 
nant; for there is no center in the Universe that 
is not changing for better, or worse, during a 
period of evolutionary activity. Everything must 
evolve, or devolve. 

What men call life is evolution. "What men call 
death is dissolution. When the atoms composing 
a man's physical body have ceased to vibrate at 
a rate rapid enough for the mental, or higher, con- 
sciousness to hold them together, as a center of 
physical force, the man has ceased to manifest 
upon the material plane and his physical atoms 
must be dispersed. The dispersed physical atoms 
will again be attracted to other material centers 
while the same magnetic mind will create another 
material body by attracting other atoms, of a 
higher rate of vibration, into its matrix. 

And when this Cosmic Day is done, and this 
period of time has ended, the manifestation of 
God — Universal Consciousness — will again become 
vibrationless. The atoms composing all centers 
in the Universe will cease to rotate and will re- 
main motionless where they once manifested. And 
it shall then come to pass that, "In the place where 
the tree falleth, there it shall be"; and evolution 
will rest until the dawn of another Cosmic Day. 



CHAPTER FOUR 

COSMIC EVOLUTION 

In studying Cosmic Evolution, the student has, for 
his source of information, only such records as 
were made by ancient Occultists and were pre- 
served, in secret archives, by such custodians of 
occult knowledge, as succeeded those ancient re- 
corders. And it has been, only, during the last 
two decades, that any esoteric knowledge, of 
Occultism, has been given, even to students, 
for the purpose of publication. But, now, since 
the grossness, the immorality, the selfishness 
and the ignorance of the Piscine Age is soon to 
disappear in the darkness of oblivion, and, as the 
human race approaches the Aquarian Cycle of 
wisdom and spiritual power, a few fragments of 
occult knowledge are offered. And this is in answer 
to the soul-hungering demands of the few who 
cannot accept, as true, the ecclesiastical dogmas 
for their guides through life. 

The desire to know the truth about his origin, 
why he is here, how he shall live, where he is going 
and what his true relationship is to God and to 
his f ellowmen, had brought forth from the Custo- 
dians of occult knowledge a few truths for man- 
kind's consideration. That all men will not accept 

68 



COSMIC EVOLUTION 69 

these truths and live by them, is a foregone con- 
clusion; but to the few to whom they appeal, 
they are offered as aids in understanding some 
of the mysteries of life. 

To bring to finite mind something of a compre- 
hension of the evolvement of Deity, It may be 
compared with the gestation and birth of an in- 
fant, human body. The Custodians of occult 
knowledge have said, that, before Deity mani- 
fested any force, It had lain for eons in a vast 
state of unconsciousness. That, what is now called 
the Universal Consciousness, or Infinite Mind, 
was then nothing but unconscious passivity. It 
was without form, was void; and darkness was 
everywhere. 

As the human infant, in gestation, lies, for 
months, in darkness in its mother's womb, so 
Deity had lain unconscious and passive. As the 
human infant, during its gestation, knows nothing 
and feels nothing, so Deity, during Its gestation, 
was without sensation and cognition. 

The Custodians of occult knowledge have said 
that, in the early morning of the first Cosmic 
Day, " God alone was." That God was in the 
Universe and God was the Universe, and still It 
was without form and was void, and then came the 
first desire of Deity. As Its gestation came to an 
end, Its first desire awakened and that desire was 
for light ; for, without light, there could have been 
no material manifestation of Deity any more than, 



70 FRAGMENTS OF TRUTH 

without the desire to exist, there could have been 
growth, or development, of the human soul. And 
•on the morning of Deity's first natal day, Its first 
manifestation of activity was at Its center, or 
heart. 

As the heart of the unborn infant begins to 
throb before it makes its entrance into its physical 
activities, of material expression, so did the great 
Unconsciousness begin Its light vibrations at Its 
heart center. 

As an illustration: There is a large pond of 
water lying motionless ; not a ripple disturbs the 
smoothness of its surface. It is cold and dark and 
deep. Its great depth and intense stillness make 
it appear bottomless and limitless. Now a tiny 
bubble appears in the center upon the surface. It 
is the only spot of light in the whole pond and it 
floats slowly round and round. Now another 
bubble appears and follows the first one ; and now 
there is another and another until what seems a 
tiny current, or eddy, is formed. 

At first this current moves in a small circle; 
then, as more bubbles appear, the circle grows in 
size and its momentum increases, and, the faster 
the stream of bubbles moves, the larger grows the 
circle; until, by reason of its own rapid movement 
and force of expansion, it breaks into two portions ; 
but the momentum, or vibration, established, in 
the stream of bubbles continues until the two 
ends of each half circle, unite, and where, in the 



COSMIC EVOLUTION 71 

beginning, there was but one circle of bubbles, 
there are now two, and both of these are whirling 
faster as each circle becomes augmented by more 
bubbles coming to the surface within the widening 
radius. 

And there is also a peculiar sound coming from 
those rapidly moving bubbles. It is a sort of 
rhythmic murmur and increases in volume as the 
circles increase in size, number and velocity. But 
when those circles break and form into smaller 
circles, the sound diminishes in volume to increase 
again as each new circle approaches its breaking- 
point. 

And now there are other similar disturbances 
beginning to manifest in other parts of the pond ; 
and, after a while, a small portion of the water is 
rilled with bubbling, boiling maelstroms. These 
maelstroms are large and small vortices and each 
is apparently moving about without aim or pur- 
pose. 

This illustration gives but a faint conception 
of how Universal Consciousness appeared on Its 
first Cosmic Day. The Custodians say all that 
Deity accomplished on that first Day, was to 
establish the vibration of light and of sound — 
which was the direct result of the vibration of 
light — and it was then that the Law of Cause and 
Effect began to operate. It was set into motion 
when the differentiation of atoms began in what is 
now known as the Universal Consciousness. 



72 FRAGMENTS OF TRUTH 

It has been said that the Universal Conscious- 
ness is not now self-conscious in all Its parts. 
That there are areas so great, that finite minds 
cannot conceive their vastness, where there is 
neither light, nor sound, nor any kind of forms; 
and that it is only through such centers, or vor- 
tices, as have been created and maintained within 
It, during past eons, that Deity has been evolving 
toward self-consciousness. That during Its first 
Cosmic, or natal day, from Universal unconscious- 
ness, Deity became sub-conscious in some of Its 
parts, and then came the Cosmic Night when all 
vibration ceased and, again, absolute unconscious- 
ness prevailed throughout the Universe. 

The Occultist says that the Cosmic Night which 
follows a Cosmic Day is of equal length with that 
Day, and, that, as Deity has grown in strength 
and has become more sub-conscious, It required 
less time for rest, and, gradually, the Cosmic Days 
and Nights have grown shorter as Deity has 
evolved. That many of the details of minor 
things, done each Cosmic Day, are now but repeti- 
tions of those of former Days ; and the plans made 
on the morning of each Day can now be fulfilled 
with greater rapidity than were those of former 
Days ; that the present Cosmic Day will be much 
shorter than any of those preceding it, and that 
the Cosmic Tomorrows will continue to grow 
shorter and still shorter as evolution proceeds. 

On the second Cosmic Day, when the Universal 



COSMIC EVOLUTION 73 

Consciousness awakened, and Its desire for 
activity again began to manifest, the first new 
things to be established were the vibratory wave 
lengths in the ether. And, since the vibrations of 
Its differentiating atoms were to be the keynotes 
to the creation of forms, the basic wave lengths 
of the ether had to be established before any 
substantial form could be produced.* 

As the pendulum of a clock swings a longer, or 
a shorter, distance, according to the length of 
the pendulum and the size of the machinery in the 
clock, so were the basic wave lengths of the second 
Cosmic Day established according to the strength 
and consciousness of Deity on that Day. And it 
is said that the sound vibrations of the waves of 
the ether on that Day, could have been written 
on one line and one space, in the present musical 
scale, and those sounds corresponded to those of 
C and D flat. That D flat was the apex of sound 
while C was the lower note. 

Three was the completed number for the etheric 
wave lengths of the manifesting atoms of the 
Universal Consciousness on the second Cosmic 
Day, and, from that limited range in the musical 

* The following figures and diagram may help to make plain 
an idea of the difference in the etheric wave lengths of different 
Cosmic Days. 



*, »w. 



5 /A 



74 FRAGMENTS OF TRUTH 

scale, the etheric wave lengths have been in- 
creased, during the succeeding Cosmic Days, until, 
on the Day preceding this, number three, or E, 
was the apex of Its wave lengths and five was then 
the completed number. 

But the evolution accomplished during that 
Cosmic Yesterday was such as to make it possible 
for the Universal Consciousness to reach a higher 
note Today, and when the vibratory wave lengths 
of Today were established, the range of tone 
ran from C to F, and four became the apex num- 
ber while seven was the completed number. This 
range of sound having been established in the 
beginning of this Cosmic Day the numbers four 
and seven, and their multiples, are most promi- 
nent throughout all nature, as is shown in the 
number of planets composing the completed 
Planetary Chains of Today, and in the cycles of 
time and Cosmic Periods, as well as in the various 
other completed conditions. , 

A Cosmic Day is an unrevealed number of solar 
years of cosmic activity. It is a period of time 
that Herbert Spencer described as an era of evolu- 
tion, and is what Genesis describes as the seven 
days of Creation. It is the greatest cycle of time 
and is so vast that the finite mind could not realize 
its extent, if it were to be told the exact number 
of years it contains. It is one-half of an eternity, 
and that other half is the Cosmic Night that fol- 
lows it. 



COSMIC EVOLUTION 75 

A Cosmic Day is always divided into as many 
Cosmic Periods as there are numbers, or notes, 
in the basic, etheric wave lengths for that Day; 
and, because of this, the Cosmic Periods in the 
Cosmic Yesterdays were necessarily fewer, but 
of greater length, than are those of Today. 

For example: The last Cosmic Yesterday con- 
tained but five Cosmic Periods, but each Period 
was longer than the Cosmic periods of Today will 
be. And it should be a source of satisfaction and 
encouragement, to finite minds, to know that the 
Universal Consciousness has evolved sufficiently 
to have gained two extra Cosmic Periods since the 
last Cosmic Yesterday. This gain in the number 
of evolutionary Periods, in this Cosmic Day, is 
also evidence of the evolvement of finite minds, 
who are some of the centers through which Deity 
expresses Itself. 

During the fifth Period of the last Cosmic Yes- 
terday, and while Infinite Mind — God — was pre- 
paring for rest, after the activities of that Day, 
It knew what It! wished to accomplish Today. 
Through Its experiences, during Its preceding 
Cosmic Days, It had learned much that could not 
be expressed in forms again until the great Uni- 
versal record had been cleaned of all its remnants 
of unperfected expressions of Itself, and until a 
fresh, clean page had been turned in the book of 
evolution. 

Among the many things that Infinite Mind had 



76 FRAGMENTS OF TRUTH 

learned, was that attraction and repulsion were 
two of Its most powerful and necessary forces; 
and that, without the operation of these forces, 
creation and disintegration of forms could not be 
accomplished. And so, Infinite Mind established 
those forces as permanent laws which would un- 
derlie the creation of everything that should ever 
become an expression of Itself in the Universe. 

Near the end of the last Cosmic Day, the atoms 
that had composed the suns and worlds of that 
Period, and which had functioned as Cosmic 
Centers during that Day, began to lose their at- 
tracting powers. Then their rotary, or generat- 
ing, motions became lessened; and then came the 
time when the old suns, impoverished because of 
their diminishing magnetic forces, became like 
old, worn-out dynamos. 

One by one they flamed up and their lights 
went out; but, before each had disappeared, it 
poured out the last of its forces in a blaze of glory. 
Then the moons, that had reflected the light from 
those old suns, losing their sources of supply, 
also were darkened and disappeared. They be- 
came dead globes floating aimlessly in space ; and 
thus it was at the closing of the last great Cosmic 
Period, as the end approached, the lights in the 
heavens went out one by one. 

It was in the portions of the Universe far- 
thest from the great Central Suns that disintegra- 
tion began. Since those remote suns and worlds 



COSMIC EVOLUTION 77 

and stars had evolved the least, they were de- 
stroyed first. It was the weakest and smallest of 
Cosmic expressions of Infinite Mind that went 
first because the survival of the fittest was, and 
will be, the rule by which Deity has measured, and 
will measure, the length of the existence of Its 
experiences and expressions. 

Like an aged human form, when its days of 
usefulness are waning, and, when, through its 
lack of vital force, it feels its inability to serve, 
the life principle, or vital energy, begins to recede 
first from its extremities. The hands and feet 
become powerless to obey the mind within, and 
then, gradually, the whole body loses its magnetic 
power. As a de-sensitized photographic plate 
fails to register a picture of the object exposed to 
it, so does the old, useless brain fail to register the 
thoughts that Infinite Mind desires to express 
through it. 

In other Cosmic Days, gradually, as each center 
became abandoned by its dependents, one by one 
those centers were disintegrated; since each had 
fulfilled its mission — had given to Infinite Mind 
the experience It desired — and was no longer 
needed for that particular form of expression. 

To Infinite Mind, the disintegration of a sun 
or a world, is but a momentary incident; but to 
finite mind, such disintegration, or destruction, 
seems ages and ages in accomplishment, and ter- 
rible to witness. For it is with tremendous elec- 



78 FRAGMENTS OF TRUTH 

trical shocks that the satellites of a disrupted sun 
receive its dying messages of light and life forces. 
For a time, the satellites and all the creatures 
living upon them riot madly; and then, like 
drunken men, the undeveloped finite minds cease 
all creative work and spend their time in follies, 
or in vices. 

As any unwise individual, who has received an 
inheritance, for which he has given nothing in 
return, spends that inheritance in riotous living, 
so do the undeveloped finite minds, on receiving 
the last messages of life from their dying sun, ex- 
haust those forces, and themselves, in excessive 
emotionalism, while the more developed finite 
minds, feeling that the night is coming, when no 
man can work, intensify their efforts to gain 
more in their development before the light goes 
wholly out. 

And it is during the maddened rush of unde- 
veloped finite minds, to grasp and to hold all 
that they can gain of material possessions, that 
great injustices are done and terrible wars are 
declared and fought upon a planet. It is then 
that nations rise against nations and individuals 
against individuals. It is during those last days 
of a Cosmic Period, or Cycle, that great crimes 
are committed and that colossal cruelties and in- 
human selfishness are manifested between indi- 
viduals composing a nation, or a race. And at 
such times great pressure is brought to bear upon 



COSMIC EVOLUTION 79 

all the inhabitants of a world. Forces are poured 
upon both animals and human beings to bring 
forth the best, or the worst, in their natures. If 
an animal, or a human mind, has more evil than 
good in its nature, the evil will come to the sur- 
face and manifest to the exclusion of the good. 
But if there is more good than evil then the good 
will manifest and the evil will be held in abeyance. 

And whether a sun is great, or small, as the end 
of a great Cosmic Period approaches, the Solar 
Deities, who created and control it, compel it to 
give of its force all that it is capable of giving to 
hasten the evolvement of the creatures depending 
upon it for life and magnetic power. And, in look- 
ing about on this mundane sphere, there are many 
strange and chaotic conditions that could not be 
understood were it not for the explanations given 
by the Custodians of occult knowledge. 

For here are men and women working their 
bodies and brains almost to the breaking-point; 
and yet, no one, on this plane of consciousness, 
seems to know the cause of the pressure being 
put upon them. Some men feel that they must 
amass fortunes and slave night and day for money 
and for property; and then, suddenly and un- 
accountably, they are seized with a desire to spend 
their wealth; and drive their bodies into a state 
of nervous prostration in their efforts to scatter 
it. 

Some students feel the same Cosmic pressure 



80 FRAGMENTS OF TRUTH 

and think ambition is forcing them to study. They 
drive themselves into brain fever, perhaps, in 
their efforts to accomplish the impossible in a few 
years. And now all humanity upon this earth is 
rushing faster and faster ; every conceivable thing 
is invented and put into use to speed on this 
terrific rush ; and when men are asked what they 
are rushing after, every one has a different reason 
to give for his hurry. 

It is said by those who claim to know the truth, 
that on every planet in the Universe, where men 
and things are evolving, this same pressure is 
manifesting; and it is because it is now the Cosmic 
Saturday afternoon for the sixth great Cosmic 
Period in this Cosmic Day; and, humanity, un- 
conscious of the cause of its tremendous haste, is 
getting ready for the Cosmic Sabbath near at 
hand. Humanity is on the home stretch, as it 
were, toward the new cycle of evolution and is 
making its best time to reach the goal of perfec- 
tion for this Cosmic Day. The Universal Con- 
sciousness is finishing Its work for this Cosmic 
Day, and there is still much to accomplish by every 
individualized center, before the great Night 
comes on. 

In the morning of the Seventh Cosmic Period, 
the last human classes will be heard and the final 
examinations will be made in this great evolu- 
tionary school. Such souls as have gained the 
right, by reason of their persistent effort and in- 



COSMIC EVOLUTION 81 

dividual growth, to stand in the highest classes 
will become the greatest products of this Cosmic 
Day ; and when the Cosmic Night comes, they will 
not lose their individuality for which they have 
striven. But, those who have been too weak, or 
too wicked, to gain that distinction will go back 
into the bosom of the Infinite. 

Near the end of the Cosmic Sabbath, there will 
first begin to be a diminution in the vibration of 
the ether. The magnetic power now moving the 
denser planets in the Universe will be gradually 
withdrawn and that great stimulating Force will 
slowly begin to flow out into the Cosmic Currents 
surrounding those planets. This will cause the dis- 
integration of some of the grosser, material forms 
upon the denser worlds, and then, as an aged and 
decrepit person, from w T hose body the magnetic 
forces are going, moves falteringly and slowly, 
so the great planets, once filled with electrical 
force, will begin to move less rapidly. Then their 
daily revolutions will be slower because the atoms 
of which they are composed will be vibrating 
slower. And, as the magnetic attraction within 
them grows weaker, the atoms of which they are 
composed will be held less closely together and 
there will be seen many strange phenomena in the 
heavens. 

After the planets that vibrate as red and green 
have been disintegrated, the next higher grades 
will begin going through the same disintegrating 



82 FRAGMENTS OF TRUTH 

process, and, after a time, they, too, will pass into 
Cosmic, Occult history and with them will go all 
the procrastinated evolution of men and matter 
which belonged to them. Afterwards only the 
seventh class of planets will be left in the Uni- 
verse and upon these will be no men with material 
bodies, for such souls will have then evolved to 
Beings with Godlike wisdom and power ; and they 
will be the ripened fruit of this Cosmic Day. 

And then those Beings will have passed beyond 
the limitations of worlds, and beyond the grosser 
grades of matter. They will have become sunlike 
centers of consciousness in the unconfined realms 
of Omniscient Mind. And, finally, all the ma- 
terial Universe will cease to exist, as forms, and 
the long rest for God and Gods will again begin. 



CHAPTER FIVE 

MOSES THE MAGICIAN 

A Study in the Law of Compensation 

All values are relative and are due to our con- 
stantly changing perspective. This is true in 
every department of an evolving ego's life; but 
nowhere is it more clearly accentuated than in 
the books he reads — particularly religious, or 
philosophic books. Looked at from a literary 
viewpoint, there is nothing more sublime, imagina- 
tive, dramatic, or more poetical, than the books of 
the Old Testament. They are as powerful in 
their delineation of character, of emotion and of 
events as anything derived from Hellenic sources 
i — now considered, by many, as the standard of 
ancient literature. 

Looked at from the viewpoint -of history, one 
gets a different perspective of these books, and, 
therefore, esteems them differently. Their his- 
torical pretensions are prodigious; covering the 
genesis of evolution, the formation of worlds, the 
creation of man and the birth, maturity, old age 
and death of all prior peoples and nations. But a 
wider reading and a deeper study, along parallel 
lines, bring the inevitable conclusion that the Old 

83 



84 FRAGMENTS OF TRUTH 

Testament books are not as catholic as they claim 
to be, and are not any more accurate than other 
history. The scientific subjects, also, are not as 
fully covered as in other books, dealing with a 
more limited field, or by other historical works, 
appertaining to particular tribes, or nations. 

A critical examination of the Old Testament 
books reveals that they are not chronological, 
either in the order of their arrangement, or in the 
sequence of narrated events. 

For example : taking the cosmogony of the first 
two chapters of Genesis. It is patent it would 
have been a physical impossibility for events 
to have occurred in the sequence in which they 
are described. Life could not have been sus- 
tained, upon a planet, under conditions such as 
are depicted in the present version ; and yet, most 
of the separate facts are substantially true, 
but collectively and chronologically they are 
incorrect. 

It must be remembered that these books were 
written by individuals to give the history of a 
particular tribe, or nation. As light is colored by 
the medium through which it is transmitted, so 
truth is always colored by the instrumentality 
through which it is revealed, which was well illus- 
trated by the story of the lions. 

A lioness took her cubs into a deserted art gal- 
lery, where, on the wall, was hanging a great paint- 
ing of Samson. He, stripped to the waist, had a 



MOSES THE MAGICIAN 85 

lion's mouth stretched wide and was tearing it 
apart. A cub said to its mother, "How could it 
be possible for a mere man to rend, in this manner, 
a lion as strong as our father V 9 

The lioness replied: "The painting was by a 
man." 

And, in reading history, one must always take 
into consideration the purpose for which it was 
written and the character of the author. In read- 
ing political history, in the Old Testament, one 
must make due allowance for the personal preju- 
dices of the writers and for the limitation of edu- 
cation at the time the books were written. 

Viewed as a religious history, the whole per- 
spective changes. If the intent of those writers 
was to narrate circumstances and events in such 
a manner as to throw the religious history of a 
race into the foreground, and, through that means, 
to preserve the ethical truths which were con- 
tained in it, then those books are still valuable. 

From this viewpoint, Genesis may be summar- 
ized as a description of the creation of the Uni- 
verse, and, more particularly, of this planet ; and 
of the effort made by the Elohim to evolve pro- 
gressive men to inhabit the world thus formed — 
men whose lives should manifest the divine intent. 
Through the various chapters of Genesis this 
idea is carried out, and the narration of incidents 
and the biographies of individuals merely throw 
into the foreground the purpose of creation. But, 



86 FRAGMENTS OF TRUTH 

man's ever-growing imperfections marred the 
Divine Plan, and the Elohim, not to be defeated 
in Their purpose, swept the spiritual failures 
from the earth in the deluge. After that came the 
second effort at evolution when the same Divine 
Intent was manifested and the children of Noah 
began to carry it out. Some of them partially 
succeeded and were, according to the Jewish his- 
torians, the forefathers of their race, while those 
who failed went to other parts of the earth to be 
subsequently conquered by those who had faith- 
fully carried out the Divine Mandates. 

Abraham, the father of the multitude, as the 
name indicates, welded a tribal, nomadic people 
into a composite race and became their patriarch. 
Through Joseph, according to Biblical records, 
this race came into close relationship with the 
Egyptians — though they never amalgamated. 
Their strong, animal desires to procreate, wedded 
to the politico-theological belief that they should 
multiply and replenish the earth, caused the Jews 
to rapidly increase in number. This fast grow- 
ing race was inferior, mentally, to the Egyptians, 
who soon exploited them — as is the custom of 
morally undeveloped men in this relationship. 
Then the Jews revolted against their physical, 
social and economic conditions and determined to 
migrate and express themselves, nationally, else- 
where. 

Every mental demand, persisted in, meets in 



MOSES THE MAGICIAN 87 

time its supply and Moses was the answer to the 
prayers, for freedom, of the enslaved Jews. 

There was much of an historical duplication in 
the economic and political conditions of the Jews, 
in the time of Moses, and in that of Jesus, for both 
leaders came to that people to perform a similar 
service ; though, in the case of Jesus, the mission 
was subsequently broadened. There was also 
some similarity in the biographies of each of them. 
At the time of the birth of each, the conquerors 
of the Jews had become apprehensive about 
the fast increasing man power of their people — 
an increase which the rulers could not economi- 
cally utilize and which, therefore, became a politi- 
cal peril. Therefore, just previous to the birth 
of each of those leaders an edict was issued that 
all new born male children, of the Jews, should be 
destroyed, and it became necessary, through some 
device, to save the infant bodies of the respective 
future Saviours. The parallel could be consider- 
ably extended, and the student may find it profita- 
ble to continue it, as showing the evolutionary 
plan, but the immediate purport of this Chapter 
is to make a sketch of the exoteric and the esoteric 
Moses, and of the working of the Law of Com- 
pensation. 

According to the Bible, Amram married his 
aunt Jochebed and Moses was one of the issue of 
that union. To protect the child's life, he was 
hidden in the bulrushes, and there, came to the 



88 FRAGMENTS OF TRUTH 

attention of Pharaoh's daughter who adopted him. 
The new relationship was a most fortunate one 
for Moses, shaping, as it did, his career. 

All ancient nations passed through two, and, the 
more highly developed, through three, stages of 
national life. First, the rule by priestcraft; sec- 
ond, the rule by kingcraft, and, if the masses 
evolved, the rule by the people themselves, or 
by democracy. At the time of Moses, Egypt had 
a monarchical form of government, and, therefore, 
the King was the supreme political power in the 
land. The Hierophants, or priests, were the cus- 
todians of the arts, sciences and religion. All 
instruction was in their hands and only the few 
were permitted to receive an education. For 
political reasons, such opportunities were not ex- 
tended to the Jews ; but, by reason of royal favor 
and influence, all educational doors were thrown 
open to Moses and he availed himself of these 
advantages, to the full extent granted to him, and, 
finally, became an initiate into the priestly caste. 
Among the most cherished branches of learning, 
possessed by the priesthood, was Magic. It was 
both the credential of their superiority and the 
source of their power. This magic was not of 
the higher order, which teaches the method of 
unifying the human with the Divine Conscious- 
ness, and the various uses of the Spiritual Forces 
of Nature, but it belonged to the lesser mysteries 
and was confined to the production of phenomena. 



MOSES THE MAGICIAN 89 

And then, as now, it was phenomena, not philoso- 
phy, which attracted, awed and convinced the 
masses. 

The turning-point, in the career of Moses, ac- 
cording to the Scriptures, was his alleged experi- 
ence at the mountain of Horeb, where, it is said, 
he met the Angel of the Lord. It is a matter of 
common knowledge that, below man, there is a 
descending scale of consciousnesses, from the 
mammoth to the mouse, and, lower still, are other 
varying scales. It is only logical to assume, there- 
fore, that above man there is an ascending scale 
of Beings. In the old Jewish system of classifica- 
tion, such superior Intelligences were called 
Saints, Angels, Archangels, Cherubim, Sera- 
phim, and Elohim. 

An Angel is one who has learned all the lessons 
of life which can be learned on each of the seven 
worlds that constitute a planetary chain. It is 
one of the lesser Gods; one whom the Occultists 
designate as a Master. 

All through sacred literature there are refer- 
ences to Angels' visits ; and whenever one of these 
Beings appeared to a person, it meant that a crisis 
and a drastic change had come in that individual's 
life, as the biographies of Elizabeth, Mary, Peter, 
David, Elijah, Zacharias, Paul, Herod and others 
disclose. 

Moses knew that it would make a great and 
lasting impression upon his people if they were 



90 FRAGMENTS OF TRUTH 

informed that he had been visited by a Celestial 
Being, and that they would give credence to his 
mission which they might otherwise withhold; for, 
according to tradition, such visitations were 
usually followed by stirring events that helped 
to shape the subsequent history of the world. 
Moses, therefore, announced that he had met the 
Angel of the Lord, at Horeb, and claimed Divine 
authorization for his mission. 

All ancient, exoteric history is, more or less, 
erroneous, due to the ignorance, or intent, of the 
historians; and the more ancient the history the 
greater the falsification, or the prejudice. This 
must be apparent even to the most casual reader 
and thinker; for, no one would write contempo- 
raneous history of his cruel, evil ruler when the 
life of the writer would be the price of the truth ; 
and more ancient history could not be accurately 
written for lack of verifiable data. 

When the history of any person, or event, is 
written by a sympathizer, or a sycophant, and 
there is no record to the contrary, one must use 
extra caution and judgment in accepting the 
narrative. It is only when an historical person, or 
event, is also described by opponents that one can 
approximate the truth. 

The ancient historians of the Hebrew race were 
all Jews, writing, primarily, for Jews, and, there- 
fore, only a one-sided view of their history is pre- 
sented. But an effort seems to have been made to 



MOSES THE MAGICIAN 91 

accurately portray the character of Moses, as they 
understood it. According to the writer of Exodus, 
Moses was an enthusiastic reformer, but lacked 
the spirit of the martyr; he criticized, severely, 
the Egyptians and his own people, but could not 
stand the criticism of his followers ; he was a man 
convinced of his own mission and, yet, was forever 
importuning his Lord to convince his people of it ; 
an inspirer of physical prowess while possessing 
only the courage of the assassin; one command- 
ing great influence at Court, but having no moral 
courage to exert it; impressed with his ordina- 
tion, but unstable in his efforts to fulfil it; com- 
manded his people to refrain from lying, and 
conspired with God to deceive Pharaoh; some- 
times an able general and again committed in- 
credible blunders; completely dominated his 
people, generally, but occasionally lost entire 
control of them; divinely inspired, and yet, blun- 
dered for forty years in crossing a land that 
should not have taken that number of months; 
controlled God's anger, and, over the same event, 
lost his own temper; as an organizer made 
mistakes, at critical times, but, with Jethro, 
formed a priestly order that has lasted to the 
present day. 

Such inconceivable contradictions are attrib- 
uted by the ancient records to this complex char- 
acter. And yet, in spite of this description, there 
is a connecting thread of consistency running 



92 FRAGMENTS OF TRUTH 

through the history of Moses which carries the 
conviction that he was a leader of men, and su- 
perior to his contemporaries in knowledge and 
power. But it was manifestly impossible that 
any such contradictory character could have suc- 
cessfully performed the work which Moses did. 
It required strength, fearlessness, consistency, 
perseverance, self-control, experience and a great 
knowledge of human nature. That Moses had 
such knowledge, is disclosed by the laws which he 
formulated for his race ; and it is only logical to 
assume that he possessed the other necessary at- 
tributes. He was not understood by his contem- 
poraries, nor by his biographers ; but the Jewish 
race has always reverenced him in its heart and 
has taken a grateful pride in him as a liberator 
— enjoying the fruit of his efforts more than 
realizing the source of his power. 

The enigmatic character of Moses can only be 
made clear by occult records accessible, exclu- 
sively, to accepted students of esotericism. These 
records are impartial, accurate and of more than 
one kind. They consist first of the pictures in the 
aura of the world; for, like man, it has its own 
photosphere, and in it are photographed all man's 
creative thoughts that have matured into acts. 
These pictures are as accurate as any photograph, 
and, produced unconsciously to man, record not 
only his acts but his thoughts, motives and char- 
acter; and in each man's photosphere is pictured 



MOSES THE MAGICIAN 93 

his personal history. Both of these are referred 
to in Daniel and in Bevelation as "The Books of 
Judgment. ' ' 

Then there are the written records prepared by- 
unbiased observers— Occultists — who preserved 
their chronicles for the benefit of future students. 
When Plato visited Egypt and was fortunate 
enough to be admitted, as a student, under the 
Hierophants, he was shown esoteric records which 
the Egyptians claimed had been uninterruptedly 
kept for thousands of years, antedating the sink- 
ing of Atlantis. And there are other records, in 
Arabia, accessible to advanced students of Occult- 
ism, which give incidents, in Cosmic and mundane 
history, prior to anything the Egyptians had. 
And it was from this source that the Occultists 
drew their inspiration in the eighth century, when 
they caused schools to be established, in Arabia 
and in Spain, for the enlightenment of the 
world. 

Atlantis was a large continent in the ocean be- 
tween Europe and Africa on the east and the 
Americas on the west, and was divided into five 
great kingdoms. The reigning and the priestly 
classes, in each kingdom, were students of lesser 
Occultism and gave particular attention to hypno- 
tism, mental suggestion and magic, They be- 
came very proficient in the use of these occult 
powers, but, because their characters were inferior 
to their mental accomplishments, they perverted 



94 FRAGMENTS OF TRUTH 

their powers and used them to dominate and ex- 
ploit the masses. 

All abuse of power, not alone on the physical 
plane, but on the mental plane also, in time, brings 
retribution. History records many cases where 
an exploited and enslaved class has risen, in un- 
controlled fury, against its rulers and wreaked 
its vengeance upon them. But humanity has yet 
to learn that its misuse of occult forces brings, 
with certitude, its retribution. 

In the readjustment of perverted occult forces 
there is frequently a repercussion upon the physi- 
cal plane. And if the misuse has been continuous 
and general among a class, or a nation, then the 
repercussion is often cataclysmic in its nature. 

The Occultists of a higher order, in Atlantis, 
knowing their Continent was imperilled by the 
mental practices of the ruling class and the de- 
pravity of the five nations, collected the cream 
of the race, and divided it into two groups. Those 
who lived in the western kingdoms went to Yuca- 
tan and Central America and laid there the foun- 
dations of a civilization that has passed away, 
leaving only fragments of their history carved on, 
now decaying, ruins. 

The selected members of the second, and larger, 
group, journeyed east into northern Africa and, 
eventually, established the Egyptian nation. The 
leader of the latter exodus was a prominent priest 
of the middle kingdom, who had acquired a greater 



MOSES THE MAGICIAN 95 

proficiency in magic than his associates. He 
was a man of courage, determination and power. 
Like others of the priesthood, he had not used his 
power wisely at all times nor was his character 
admirable in many respects. His dominant char- 
acteristic was thirst for power, but he was wiser 
and better than most men of his period. 

On account of the number involved, the time 
consumed, the distance covered, and its reflex 
action upon the affairs of the world, this was the 
greatest exodus of history. It required great 
diplomacy, on the part of the leader, to conduct 
the constantly increasing body of fugitives across 
a wide continent inhabited by people hostile to 
the movement. There was constant friction from 
without and from within. The continent was 
fairly well populated and the numerous towns and 
cities had to be avoided to get the requisite 
camping sites and supplies of food and water. 
Often camps were made on the same site for sev- 
eral successive seasons, in order to raise sufficient 
food supplies for further journeying. But the 
greatest trials came while the travellers were 
passing through the easternmost kingdom; there 
they were constantly harassed and finally threat- 
ened with slavery. But their able leader proved 
a successful general in fighting their enemies, and 
safely conducted the fugitives across the narrow 
peninsula connecting Atlantis with Africa. As 
the last of the pilgrims passed into the promised 



96 FRAGMENTS OF TRUTH 

land, the Continent of Atlantis was submerged; 
and this was the foundation of the story of the 
flood which has been preserved, in some form, by 
all nations — it was also the basis of the story 
of the Red Sea engulfing Pharaoh and his 
armies. 

While it is true that these emigrants were the 
cream of the Atlantean race, it should be remem- 
bered that the thickness and richness of cream is 
dependent upon the quality of the milk, and there 
was little milk of human kindness in Atlantis. 
In fact, the people were so degenerate, the Occult 
records say, that the Planetary Spirits had almost 
determined to let the entire race be destroyed, 
bodies and souls, and to attempt the creation of 
a better race of men. But one of the Great Gods 
volunteered to assume the burden of redeeming 
the people, so far as it was possible to do. The 
others consented to His oblation, and, by selecting 
the best of the Atlanteans, for the seed of a higher 
civilization, He commenced His efforts in behalf 
of humanity. 

This is not very complimentary to present 
humanity, when it is remembered that it is the 
reincarnation of the Atlanteans, but analysis of 
the present so-called civilization may give addi- 
tional weight to the occult records referred to, 
as well as show how slowly men evolve in 
thousands of years. 

The selection of this body of men, for preserva- 



MOSES THE MAGICIAN 97 

tion, gave rise to the tradition of a " chosen 
people," and, in sentiment, if not in actual terms, 
has been carefully cultivated by all subsequent 
nations. 

As the itinerants journeyed through northwest 
Africa, they met a semi-barbaric, nomadic tribe, 
which they pressed into service as burden bearers, 
and this tribe, in time, became the Jewish race; 
and, were it not for similar incidents constantly 
repeated in history, it would seem almost incredi- 
ble that men, who had fought for their own free- 
dom, would, at the first opportunity, enslave 
others. 

By reason of their numerical strength, their 
warlike training and their knowledge of the use of 
Occult Forces, it was easy for the escaped At- 
lanteans to hold in subjection the less developed 
Jews. The Atlantean leader, who, for conven- 
ience, will be called Moses, though that did not 
become his name until a subsequent incarnation, 
was able, by his knowledge of magic, to not only 
awe the Jews, but also to continue his authority 
over his own people. 

During the balance of the great Exodus, the evo- 
lutionary position of the Jews was similar to that 
of the negro in America, prior to his enfranchise- 
ment. The close association of an inferior race, 
with a superior one, always quickens the evolution 
of the lower but debases the higher ; and where the 
association is that of master and slave, grave in- 



98 FRAGMENTS OF TRUTH 

dividual wrongs frequently arise which further 
entangle the threads of destiny. 

One of the chief defects in the character of 
humanity is the desire to "get something for 
nothing"; and every man, through self-examina- 
tion, can gauge his own evolutionary growth by 
finding out how far that human weakness has been 
supplanted, in him, by a sense of justice — by the 
desire to make reciprocity a rule in his life. 

Slavery, either physical or industrial, is the re- 
sult of a national effort to "get something for 
nothing"; and slavery always engenders compen- 
satory consequences. The Law of Equilibrium 
manifests ethically, as compensation, and mankind 
learns this truth slowly, as the history of the 
United States testifies. 

The Pilgrim Fathers came to America to gain 
their liberty. An unfriendly climate and a bar- 
ren soil made living precarious for New Eng- 
enders, and, as soon as was possible, they turned 
to trade. It was not long before some of them be- 
came slave hunters, traders and importers. 

The friendly soil and climate of the south At- 
lantic States developed a social, intellectual and 
leisure class, who looked to mother earth for sus- 
tenance and wealth. The natures of the South- 
erners, in conjunction with the nature of their 
soil, produced a market for slaves. The existence 
of the economic conditions, North and South, 
again created slavery; and the fratricidal war 



MOSES THE MAGICIAN 99 

in the States was not the only compensation which 
the nation had to make for its error — costly as 
that war had been. The manhood and woman- 
hood, of the South, had been lowered by its 
" something for nothing" policy, and, when 
thrown upon its own endeavors, required a gen- 
eration to revive. The foundation of the corrup- 
tion of American political life was laid in war 
time and in the decade following. Wealth made, 
directly and indirectly, through slavery and its 
resultant war, went into new avenues and became 
the foundation of an industrial slavery as vicious 
as the preceding one had been, 
i Greed is never cured by gluttony, but by starva- 
tion ; and, as the cure has never yet been tried, the 
fallacious circle still repeats itself. But, many 
wrongs never made a right, and, as the Atlantean 
civilization was destroyed by slavery, so, in some 
manner, must perish the vaunted, but false, civili- 
zation of the twentieth century. 

But it is not only nationally and internationally 
that people suffer for their greed and sequential 
economic errors, but the Law of Compensation 
works also in individual cases. The occult rec- 
ords show that in almost every case, negro out- 
rages, so common in former years, in all the 
States of the Union, were not alone due to the 
animal impulse of the black men, but were also 
due to the fact that the violated white person, in 
a prior life, had either enslaved the offending 



100 FRAGMENTS OF TRUTH 

black man — tearing him from his African home 
and family — or had inflicted a similar cruelty 
upon him when he was enslaved. And it is fur- 
ther known to Occultists, that many of the men 
who have been leaders of the negroes were, 
formerly, white men who were compelled to in- 
carnate in black bodies to suffer the sorrows of 
slavery, which they, themselves, had instituted; 
and to help the colored race upward in its evo- 
lution, as compensation for former wrongs done 
to it. 

Nor must it be forgotten that industrial slavery 
is but another phase of the same question, and that 
equitable adjustment is made, periodically, by the 
Law of Compensation in every such case — as the 
former history of France and the more recent 
history of Russia and of Europe so eloquently 
testify. 

America is merely cited as an example of the 
compensation which follows slavery, because the 
event is of such comparatively recent date: but 
the same law applied to all people and nations, 
where similar conditions existed, as was anciently 
illustrated in the case of the Jews and the At- 
lanteans. 

When seventy years had passed, after the be- 
ginning of their exodus, the Atlanteans arrived at 
the Red Sea, and but few individuals, who started, 
ever reached the "Promised Land." Moses was 
among those who failed to finish the journey, but, 



MOSES THE MAGICIAN 101 

before excarnating, he had organized a strong 
army and had established a permanent priest- 
hood. He had also formulated laws which gov- 
erned the Egyptians until the wills of the later 
Kings superseded them. 

At the end of their journey, the Jews were not 
released; but, as both masters and slaves in- 
creased in numbers, they were held in a more 
restricted slavery and their burdens became 
heavier as the years rolled by. Continuously their 
prayers for freedom ascended to the Gods, and 
then, once more, the wheel of rebirth revolved and 
brought back, into earth life, the original partici- 
pants in the exodus from Atlantis— the weaker 
egos once more incarnated in Jewish bodies, the 
stronger as offspring of the dominant Egyptians. 

In time all desires are fulfilled; but Divine Jus- 
tice, in order to give the Jews the liberty they 
craved, had to raise up a leader for the new exo- 
dus. As Moses had enslaved the Jews, he was 
required, by the Law of Compensation, to incar- 
nate as the son of a Jewish slave to make restitu- 
tion, by enfranchising those whom he had wronged 
in his prior incarnation. His education at 
Pharaoh's Court revived his prior knowledge and 
power and his old ambition for leadership again 
dominated him. He had all the latent qualifica- 
tions and the experiences to enable him to conduct 
a second exodus. As an adopted son of Pharaoh's 
daughter, his ambition to rule could not be grati- 



102 FRAGMENTS OF TRUTH 

fied and it naturally sought expression elsewhere. 
The slave blood, within him, suggested the most 
logical plan and he set himself about preparing 
for his new mission, since a long and careful prep- 
aration was necessary for so great an under- 
taking. 

The occidental conception of a genius is un- 
fortunate for it is both misleading and detrimen- 
tal. To say an individual has uncommon power 
of intellect, because of heredity, or a gift from 
God, is to make a precocious, but vain person, 
especially a child, feel that he has been endowed 
with a mental aptitude that does not require 
self-effort to develop. He considers his ability 
a "gift" and, possessing what he has not earned, 
he neglects his native ability and acquires the 
habit of craving something else for nothing. 

The Occult view is that a genius is a person 
who has a natural aptitude along any line of 
study, or endeavor, because he has acquired it, 
by hard work, in a prior incarnation; that God 
does not unjustly shower talents on one person 
which He, unfairly, denies to another — but that 
all ability is self -acquired through effort in some 
life. 

No effort is ever lost, and the plodder of today 
may, with confidence, look to the tomorrow know- 
ing that his unfulfilled ambitions will surely be 
realized. Moses knew this occult truth and 
shaped his life accordingly. His accomplish- 



MOSES THE MAGICIAN 103 

ments, therefore, were many and consistent and 
have excited the admiration of the world. He 
was pre-eminent as a maker and a codifier of 
laws; and while it is true that they were formu- 
lated for his own time and people, yet, by reason 
of their excellence, some of his laws are as appli- 
cable to the twentieth century as they were to 
his own period. And this is true because many 
of them are based upon ethical principles and, 
consequently, cannot die. It is often hard to dis- 
tinguish just where the civic regulations cease 
and the moral mandate commences, so nicely 
blended are the political decrees with natural law. 

During their years of slavery, the Jews had 
been largely influenced by the exoteric religion of 
their masters; and had lost — if they ever pos- 
sessed — all esotericism. From his great knowl- 
edge of men and of morals, Moses formulated a 
religion, for his followers, which was adapted to 
their comprehension and yet, was infinitely su- 
perior and more elevating than that which they 
possessed. But, to the priesthood which he 
established, he gave his knowledge of magic and 
such little esotericism as he knew — which, in later 
times, became the basis of the Cabala. 

As an organizer and builder of State, Moses 
was unsurpassed, for he took a disorganized, 
hopeless and helpless race of slaves and welded 
them into a nation. His task was no easy one, 
because the Egyptians looked askance at him 



104 FRAGMENTS OF TRUTH 

for his activity among the Jews; and his own 
people distrusted him because of his aristocratic 
environment and friends. He, therefore, left the 
Court and proceeded to the wilderness where he 
became a herdsman, and, in the long* hours of his 
watch, he practised concentration, perfected his 
plans and made himself proficient in his old art 
of magic. 

As in his previous life he had awed the Jews 
through his magical power, he determined to use 
it again to dominate them. It was a part of 
both kingcraft and priestcraft — which he had 
well learned in more than one life — to claim 
vicegerency under Almighty God, in order to re- 
ceive the reverence and obedience of the masses. 
And so he adopted this simple method in his 
work, and, because of his ability to produce 
phenomena, his claim was easily established. 
Whenever he saw his authority waning, he re- 
sorted to the old expedient of calling upon God, 
publicly, to reaffirm the divine right of chosen 
leaders. And when the Jews became restless, or 
rebellious, Moses threatened them with the anger 
of Jehovah, and thus ruled them through their 
fears. He was a martinet, with his own people, 
and a despotic conqueror of others. 

Through his influence at Court and his magic, 
he succeeded, finally, in getting the second exodus 
started, but the Occult records do not coincide 
with the Biblical ones as to this second emigra- 



MOSES THE MAGICIAN 105 

tion. The Jewish historians drew largely upon 
their imaginations in writing their anabasis; 
they filched the legends of the first exodus and 
attributed them to the second — just as they ap- 
propriated and mutilated the Chaldean records to 
form their Genesis. 

Moses, himself, deceived his people about many 
of his so-called miraculous experiences, that are 
reported in the Bible as having happened to him 
in the mountains and at the Court of Pharaoh; 
and these tales, being believed, passed as 
historical facts. There was no question about his 
ability as a leader, an organizer, a law-giver, a 
nation builder, a religion maker and a magician. 
Nor was there any doubt about his defects of 
character, as both the exoteric and esoteric rec- 
ords disclose. But the latter reveal the fact that 
when Moses left his followers, on their journey, 
he crept away and died, like a wounded animal, 
alone in the mountains, leaving the younger 
priests to paint his transfiguration. 

As a further study in the Law of Compensation, 
the second exodus is fascinating in its illumina- 
tion of subsequent history. Moses and his fol- 
lowers believed that they were the chosen people 
of the Almighty, and that everything upon the 
earth should be given to them — that if what they 
desired were not given, then it should be taken. 
Acting upon this aggressive and acquisitive racial 
trait, formulated into a religious belief, they 



106 FRAGMENTS OF TRUTH 

commenced with despoiling the Egyptians and 
continued it with all the tribes of people which 
they contacted throughout their itinerancy from 
Egypt to Canaan, and under their Judges and 
Kings. 

It is not necessary to resort to occult history to 
confirm these facts, as the Jewish records dis- 
close them. They also narrate the facts that the 
Jews contacted many tribes and nations in their 
journeyings, who were barbarians and inferior 
in every way to themselves. Many of these 
tribes, the Jews wantonly warred upon because of 
the difference in their religious belief. Many 
entire tribes were annihilated without cause, 
through mere blood lust and greed. Throughout 
the greater part of the Arine Age, or for two 
thousand years before Christ, the Jews were a 
dominant, aggressive, tyrannical, political power. 
During the Piscine Age, or the two thousand years 
since the time of Christ, the Jews have been a 
race, rather than a nation, a despoiled and perse- 
cuted people in many countries. 

To most thinking people it is not an adequate 
explanation of the status of the Jew, during 
Christian times, to attribute it to the alleged cruci- 
fixion of the Nazarene by a Jewish mob inflamed by 
the priests. The Occultist would say that the 
despoiling of the Jews, throughout Europe, was 
due to the fact that the ancient Hebrews, rein- 
carnated, had again met with those egos whom 



MOSES THE MAGICIAN 107 

they despoiled in ancient days and were making 
unwilling compensation to them. And that the 
massacres of the Jews in Russia, in recent years, 
and throughout the world in Christian (?) times, 
were done by the same egos, again incarnated, 
who were mercilessly slaughtered by the Jews 
during the rule of their Judges and Kings. 

Thus are men tied together by their thoughts 
and acts, and it is not merely a code of ethics 
but a truth founded on natural law, which the 
greatest of the Jews enunciated when he said: 
" Judge not that ye be not judged. For with 
what judgment ye judge, ye shall be judged; 
and with what measure ye mete, it shall be 
measured to you again.' ' 



CHAPTEE SIX 

SOUL SLAVERY 

In the first Chapter of Genesis, paragraph tweaty- 
sixth, of King James' version of the Scriptures, 
it says : 

"And God said: Let us make man in our image 
and after our likeness.' ' In the twenty-seventh 
paragraph of the same Chapter, is written : 

"And God created man in his own image. In 
the image of God created he him." But the second 
Chapter, the seventh paragraph, gives a few more 
details concerning man's creation. Here it says: 

"And the Lord God formed man of the dust of 
the ground and breathed into his nostrils the 
breath of life and man became a living soul." 

These disjointed statements in Genesis give all 
the information the Scripture has to offer con- 
cerning the origin of man; and, to the thinker, 
it is most unsatisfactory. For primitive man, 
who knew nothing and cared nothing about his 
parents, or possibilities, this Biblical Mother 
Goose story may have been satisfying; but, for 
man of the present age, to expect him to accept, as 
truth, the Biblical description of his origin is not 
only impossible but is ridiculous, and he must look 
elsewhere for the knowledge he craves. 

108 



SOUL SLAVERY 109 

In the year 1859 Darwin presented to the world 
his theories concerning man's origin, which some 
thinkers considered plausible, while others laughed 
at them as absurdities. And it is humiliating for 
a self-respecting man to be made to believe that 
he, the masterpiece of all creation, either as- 
cended, or descended, from an ancestral ape. It 
must have been with internal shivers, that Charles 
Robert Darwin stood before a monkey cage in 
some English zoo and tried to recognize, in the 
chattering, performing creatures before him, some 
of his own characteristics. And, many times, he 
must have turned away sad and unsatisfied before 
he, himself, finally accepted, as truths, his own 
theories concerning the unsolved problem of his 
own origin. 

The Occultist says, the description given in 
Genesis of man's creation is symbolic, should not 
be accepted literally ; and offers a somewhat differ- 
ent explanation, with amplifications, that may cast 
further light upon the Biblical story, and also upon 
the Darwinian theories. The Occultist says man's 
physical body, and lower mind, were produced 
from the earth, in as much as the animating life 
principle came upward through the mineral, vege- 
table and animal forms. That it was not created 
in a day, as the Biblical story implies, but was 
ages in the process of evolvement. That the 
"God," spoken of in the first Chapter of Genesis, 
is the Universal Consciousness who made the plans 



110 FRAGMENTS OF TRUTH 

for man's creation; and the "Lord Gods' ' referred 
to in the second Chapter of Genesis, were the in- 
dividualized, Creative Gods who executed God's 
plans. The Creative Gods obeyed the command of 
God — Universal Consciousness — in preparing the 
human-animal bodies for higher, subjective minds 
to use. And when the "Lord Gods," of Genesis, 
' ' breathed into the nostrils, ' ' of animal man, ' ' the 
breath of life," he "became a living soul," be- 
cause, in accordance with the wills of the "Lord 
Gods," the higher, subjective minds came then and 
incarnated in those human-animal bodies. 

The subjective minds, like the Creative Gods, 
were ovoids in form and had been created in the 
image and likeness of their Creators; but when 
they took possession of the human-animal forms 
they assumed the shapes of those forms, as jelly 
assumes the form of the mould into which it is 
poured. 

Those were strange experiences into which the 
subjective minds were forced, by the Creative 
Gods, and were as different from what they had 
ever before known as night is different from day. 
To put those infant, subjective minds among the 
lower animals, was like sending helpless children 
into a wilderness infested by savages, for those 
infant minds were innocent and ignorant, and met 
with the same fate that ignorance and innocence 
always meet, when they come into contact with 
grossness and brutality. They became enslaved 



SOUL SLAVERY 111 

by those whom they came to help, and it was then 
that Soul Slavery began upon this earth, when 
animal minds enslaved subjective minds and made 
them subservient to their wills. And, as those 
subjective minds, or Sons of God, sank deeper into 
the material experiences of earth life, with their 
animal bodies and animal minds, they gradually 
forgot their divine origin, and their former states 
of happiness, and, like the animals they had 
espoused, they also became controlled by the 
throbbing, burning emotions with which the ani- 
mal minds were filled. 

But, in the heart of every Son of God, was left a 
longing for better conditions. Vaguely, at times, 
he seemed to realize that there was something he 
had lost and wondered what it was. Sometimes 
he could almost remember something of a former 
state, when harmony had prevailed with him ; and 
then, storms of emotions swept over him and 
again he forgot, yielded to his animal desires and 
sank lower into the selfish gratification of them. 

After a time it was only on rare occasions that 
man yielded to a reminiscent mood, that seemed 
to take him back in sub-conscious memory to other 
days of peace. Usually it was after a tragedy; 
and, while suffering from the reaction following 
it, or, in the stillness of a night when he was alone 
with that strange, weird something he could not 
see but sometimes could feel, he turned his 
thoughts backward and tried to remember what 



112 FRAGMENTS OF TRUTH 

it was, that he once had, that had now departed. 
And, after many reminiscences and disappoint- 
ments the thought came that it was happiness he 
had lost, and it was happiness he must find again. 
And when the subjective minds, or Sons of God, 
had finally reached the bottom of the pit of phys- 
ical and mental misery, into which they sank after 
becoming enslaved by their animal minds, they 
began to struggle upward dragging those animal 
minds with them, and with, seemingly, nothing but 
hope to help them on. 

That the desire is strongly implanted in the 
human-animal soul to know something about it- 
self, is shown by almost the first questions a child 
asks when it begins to think and to speak coher- 
ently. It looks earnestly and inquiringly into the 
face of its nurse and asks: "Where did I come 
from, and how did I come here?" 

It is the cry of the soul trying to remember its 
origin; and, as the child grows to maturity, that 
same question, many times unsatisfactorily an- 
swered, burns in its heart and springs to its lips. 
And it is really nothing but ignorance, concerning 
his origin, that has caused man's submission to 
the bondage, either mental or physical, that has 
chained him to a limiting environment. 

To most persons, the word slavery brings only 
the mental picture of men and women who are 
giving, to other individuals, the services of their 
physical bodies without remuneration. This is but 



SOUL SLAVERY 113 

one, and the lightest, of all forms of slavery ; since, 
sometimes, the soul of one, whose body is in 
bondage, is free to gain the spiritual happiness 
that all evolving souls earnestly crave. 

Could all industrial slaves but realize that they 
are Sons of God and have the right and innate 
power to become the equals intellectually, finan- 
cially and spiritually of any other Son of God, 
slavery would soon be ended, and there would 
come a pleasanter relationship between the classes 
and the masses. It is the animal nature, prepon- 
derating in man, that makes him feel contempt for 
anything that cringes in fear before him, or sub- 
mits tremblingly to his unreasonable demands. 
And it is the animal nature in the trembling slave 
that makes him hate and wish to kill the man who 
despises and enslaves him. But the recognition of 
the Sons of God, by each other, and the willingness 
of each to give to every other Son of God his 
divine and human rights, without question, or de- 
lay, would not alone end industrial slavery, but 
would build a commonwealth that would take man 
forever out of these unhappy, economic conditions 
and give to him the freedom and happiness he 
craves. 

But there are aspects of slavery other than that 
of economic bondage. There is slavery that binds 
the souls as well as the bodies of men and pre- 
vents them from evolving. And many of these 
aspects are so subtile, and yet so strong, that they 



114 FRAGMENTS OF TRUTH 

are submitted to with pathetic muteness by the 
enslaved — who sometimes does not know that he 
is bound. It is sometimes the man who fears the 
criticism or ridicule of his friends. He would like 
to have a rose-covered cottage in the suburbs and 
take the time to read the books he likes. He thinks 
of how pleasant it would be to have a home with 
three servants, instead of twelve, and to spend 
some of his evenings alone with his family; but 
he fears to make the change lest his social position 
be jeopardized, and his business associates think 
him financially embarrassed. So, he continues to 
keep his town house and sends his wife away for a 
portion of each year. He is tired and sick of 
fashionable dinners and late hours at the club and 
cards and wine. He longs to be free from them 
all, but is so enslaved by the fear of public opinion, 
that he continues his mad rush for money, to keep 
up with his enormous expenses, and to go the pace 
with other men — who, perhaps, are as tired of him 
as he is of them. He becomes irritable, pessi- 
mistic and cynical; is never satisfied, is most un- 
happy and thinks he would gladly exchange places 
with the janitor of his office building, whom he be- 
lieves has not a care in the world. But he is mis- 
taken. The janitor is also a slave — not to public 
opinion, because the public does not know that he 
exists — but to his habits. 

He cannot begin his day's work until he has had 
his coffee and his pipe. When he wakes and rises 



SOUL SLAVERY 115 

from his bed, his head aches and he is miserably 
ill. His face is deadly white and his nerves are 
jerky and uncontrolled. And if his coffee is de- 
layed, or not just right when served, he becomes 
furious and behaves like an enraged animal. He, 
a Son of God, is completely submerged in his 
animal nature and growls like a beast, enslaved 
by the desires of his body and animal mind. But, 
after he has had his coif ee and a smoke, he calmly 
leans back in his chair and thanks the Lord that 
he is not the slave to habit that his next-door 
neighbor is, who cannot get his whisky, since 
prohibition has been enforced, and is half mad 
with desire for alcoholic drinks. 

The spiritual happiness of that Son of God is 
dancing so far ahead of him there is very little 
possibility of his catching up with it in this life, 
unless, through some tremendous awakening to his 
actual enslaved condition, the God part of him 
should rise, assert its power over its animal nature 
and refuse to be longer enslaved. 

There are persons who are enslaved by mistaken 
ideas of duty. For example : There is the devoted 
mother who faithfully and cheerfully waits upon 
and gratifies the whims of her pretty daughter. 
Because that mother gave birth to the beautiful 
body of that Daughter of God and gave her an 
opportunity to incarnate in this world, and to con- 
tinue with her evolvement here, that mother feels 
absolute responsibility for the comfort and pleas- 



116 FRAGMENTS OF TRUTH 

ure of her child. Because she is not able to keep 
a maid to serve her daughter, so she may have 
nothing to do, the mother takes that menial posi- 
tion herself. She denies herself matinees and 
operas that her daughter may have more matinees 
and more operas. She wears old clothes that 
daughter may have new ones. 

The daughter's selfish animal nature takes 
everything her enslaved mother has to give, de- 
mands more and storms because she cannot get 
what she wants ; and both of those Daughters of 
God are hindered in their evolvement and their 
attainment of spiritual happiness, because of the 
mother's enslavement to a false sense of duty 
toward her child. 

It is only about one hundred and forty years 
since the signers of the Declaration of Independ- 
ence wrote that all men had the inalienable right 
to live, to be free and to engage in the pursuit of 
happiness. The fact that those Sons of God placed 
freedom, from governmental tyranny, before the 
possibility of any man's engaging in the pursuit 
of happiness, showed that even they had a glimmer 
of the great truth that freedom from slavery must 
come before even a civic or a national happiness 
can be gained. 

When the slavery of the black men, in the South, 
was abolished some persons believed that all slav- 
ery in the United States was ended ; but they were 
mistaken, for a slavery, greater and more cruel 



SOUL SLAVERY 117 

than anything suffered by the black men, has been 
for years, and is now, in existence in every large 
city in this country. 

There are animal men and women who still 
traffic with the bodies of ignorant girls and 
women; who gain possession of them, sometimes 
by deception and sometimes by physical force, and 
then degrade them to a state of debasement that 
ruins their souls as well as their bodies. For, in 
many instances, the white slaves sink to such 
states of depravity that they never can find their 
way back to happiness. And sometimes they fall 
so low that the subjective mind gives up the battle 
and leaves its animal mind and human-animal body 
to continue on to ultimate destruction. 

Then there are persons enslaved by their belief 
in disease and their fear of death. And those 
Sons and Daughters of God become so helpless 
through their slavish fears that sometimes they 
dare not leave the hospital or sanitarium presided 
over by their adored physician or surgeon, lest 
they lose their lives in consequence. 

And many unscrupulous, animal-minded physi- 
cians take advantage of those helpless, hopeless, 
spineless creatures and create a life-long bondage 
for them by giving a false diagnosis of their con- 
ditions. Sometimes such diagnoses are given ig- 
norantly and sometimes wilfully, with the inten- 
tion of keeping their patients contributing to their 
physician's financial needs. But whether igno- 



118 FRAGMENTS OF, TRUTH 

rantly or wilfully done the results are the same 
and the sufferers are enslaved. 

It is a large-minded, progressive man who stops 
a portion of his own income by telling the truth to 
a fear enslaved patient, when he knows that pa- 
tient is willing to give him anything he asks, if he 
will but keep him for a few more years on this 
side of the Divide, that lies between him and the 
Great Unknown. But sometimes a man does stand 
forth, from among his medical colleagues, who will 
not use his influence to enslave his patients. Such 
a man is a Son of God who has conquered his own 
animal nature and has made it subservient to his 
will. There are not many of these men but there 
are a few. 

Then there are souls who are enslaved by their 
religious beliefs. Because they have been told 
that their only hope for peace and happiness here- 
after is through the Church and the efforts of 
the priests, they become the slaves of Churchianity 
and sometimes contribute everything they can 
live without, to the Church. They spend all their 
time preparing for death and go through life un- 
conscious of the happiness to be had here — for 
the taking. They fear God, the Devil and Death 
and suffer the agonies of a mental Hell, on earth, 
while trying to escape a subjective Hell hereafter. 
And since it is an immutable law that what one 
thinks most about, one draws to oneself, in abund- 
ance, those Sons of God who think of nothing but 



SOUL SLAVERY 119 

death and Hell, will be a long time coming into 
spiritual happiness, unless they change their mode 
of thinking. 

And after all the varied and varying ex- 
periences ; and after all the suffering and striving 
of souls, through the different states of conscious- 
ness, the question sometimes arises : 

"What does a soul actually receive at the end 
of its evolutionary journey — if there is an end — 
to compensate it for all its efforts and the pain 
that came through its evolvement f ' ' 

The Occultist says: There are no rewards of 
merit from God, or Gods ; but there are results, to 
be gained, and the greatest of these is spiritual 
happiness which comes to the soul who has broken 
its last limiting fetter of ignorance, and is no 
longer enslaved by thoughts, or things. 

That the mother of spiritual happiness is Om- 
niscience and its father is Omnipotence. It is 
from the union of these two aspects of the finest 
essences of the Great Universal Consciousness, 
manifesting in the individual soul, that spiritual 
happiness is born. That with the birth of this 
kind of happiness comes absolute freedom from 
all limitations; and the glorified soul who pos- 
sesses it, is no longer confined to one, or to many 
worlds, but its home is the Universe and its com- 
panions are the Gods. 



CHAPTER SEVEN 

STRAY LEAVES OF OCCULT HISTORY 

It is extremely difficult, if not impossible, for an 
uninitiated person to know the facts about the 
Occult movement; and the word " uninitiated, " is 
used in its mystical sense, meaning one who has 
not had conferred upon him the rite of initiation — 
one who has not received the more exalted, eso- 
teric teachings, and who has not gained access to 
Occult records. 

Most of the history of Occultism has been 
written by uninitiated persons, secretly or ad- 
mittedly antagonistic to esotericism; and, there- 
fore, the world has received a wrong impression 
concerning it and holds a wrong conception of the 
Occultists who have presented the philosophy to 
the public, at intervals, during the Piscine Age, 
now rapidly drawing to a close. 

Such histories and biographies, as are extant, 
are mainly interesting as showing the persistency 
of Occult thought ; for there never has been a time 
when there were not competent teachers, of Oc- 
cultism, to instruct the people of each age, ac- 
cording to their capacity to receive esoteric 
truths. The teachings have often become creed- 

120 



OCCULT HISTORY 121 

encumbered, or perverted, by means of misconcep- 
tion ; but, even in their garbled forms, lies hidden 
the key to freedom. 

In this Chapter will be given a few stray leaves 
of Occult history in the Occident, during the 
Christian period, so connected as to form a thumb 
nail, but accurate, sketch of the subject. 

As man has a certain definite length of life — 
though some men may fall below, or exceed, the 
average — so do nations have their cycles of in- 
carnation. It may be stated, as a general law, that 
each leading nation is born, matures, grows old 
and dies within the time it takes the sun, through 
the precession of the equinoxes, to pass through 
one sign of the Zodiac — or a little more than two 
thousand years. 

It is also a noticeable, historical fact that the 
life of a nation is coincident with its dominant 
religion; for "the letter killeth, but the spirit 
giveth life," to men and nations. 

About the year A J). 1, or the end of the Arine 
Age, the entire religious and political life of the 
Western World was changing. Eome had been 
successful in campaign after campaign and had be- 
come the dominant power of the world. In the 
realm of religion, the old philosophies were break- 
ing down. The Greek Gods were dead, or re- 
incarnated into Eoman Deities. Jupiter was, as a 
matter of form, supreme, but played as unimpor- 
tant a part in the love and lives of the people 



122 FRAGMENTS OF TRUTH 

then as Jehovah does today. Even in the slow 
and tenacious Orient, Brahminism was yielding to 
the propaganda of Buddhism. In Palestine, nu- 
merous attempts had been made, unsuccessfully, to 
revitalize the Jewish religion and to break the 
hold of priestcraft on the people. 

Formalism and dogmatism had superseded mys- 
ticism, throughout the Occident, except in Ephesus 
where spirituality was kept alive in the temple of 
Artemis ; and in Eleusis where truths were taught 
the elect in the Mysteries. 

In Judea the Essenes had also preserved eso- 
tericism for the world. That sect was, by practice, 
ascetic and required a strict conformity to its 
rigid rules before it accepted any one as a pro- 
bationer. 

According to the Occult records and to the tra- 
ditions of Christianity, Joseph and Mary belonged 
to this sect and Jesus, Himself, in early youth, 
became a neophyte in the order of the Essenes. 
As all Occultists had done prior to His time and 
as so many have done since, Jesus taught both 
exoterically and esoterically : exoterically to the 
masses whom He instructed in parables and in 
symbols, those being comprehensible to their in- 
telligence ; esoterically to those who had developed 
further in their evolution and were capable of re- 
ceiving higher truths. His mission was, primarily, 
the reformation of the Jews; to tear from 
Judaism all the encumbering thoughts that had 



OCCULT HISTORY 123 

gathered around it since the preceding prophet 
had attempted to revive spirituality. 

Jesus knew, as did all the esotericists of His 
time, that Eome would continue to be the dominant 
nation of the world for a while, and that a great 
truth accepted tkere, would react upon the Roman 
nation and, through it, reach the entire Occident. 
And so He took upon Himself the mission of bring- 
ing to the Western World a knowledge of the an- 
cient truths. After He had performed His mission 
and had retired to an Occultists' retreat, His 
brother James became the visible head of the 
movement. 

James, and some of Jesus' disciples, remained 
in Jerusalem and directed a propaganda from 
there until James was killed, at the instance of the 
Jewish priesthood, and most of the disciples and 
their associates suffered the usual fate of pioneers. 

Peter left Jerusalem and went immediately to 
Rome to carry on the work, believing that once the 
esotericism of Jesus was established, in Rome, it 
would necessarily spread to every part of the 
world, and there he took up his mission. He 
formed a strong Church ; strong, numerically, con- 
sidering the radical departure from the Roman 
beliefs of the time ; and he paid, with his life, for 
the effort he made in behalf of Christianity. • 

The Roman Church that Peter established was 
■rather Essenean, in character, being largely based 
upon the tenets of that order. The movement was 



124 FRAGMENTS OF TRUTH 

opposed by the political powers of Rome who 
stood behind the temples of the ancient gods ; and 
the early Christian Occultists found it necessary 
to meet in secret in the catacombs. The teachings 
of the young Church were philosophic and ethical, 
rather than concerning the power which comes 
from a knowledge of philosophy. The appeal was 
made more particularly to the lower classes of 
Rome, because Peter was under the impression 
that the stronger egos were incarnated in them. 
In each period of history groups of egos incar- 
nate in different strata of society, according to 
the karma made in their past lives. Jesus did 
not seek the patricians of Judea, but appealed to 
the humble people because, at that time, the more 
progressive egos, in that part of the world, were 
incarnating in that class. The same was not true 
in Rome, and therein lay Peter's tactical mis- 
take. 

John the Evangelist, after leaving Jerusalem, 
went into Asia Minor and there found a receptive 
soil. He was able to teach more esotericism than 
had the other disciples because, for a long time, 
the oriental mind had been contemplative, 
thoughtful and receptive to higher truths. The 
people in Asia Minor were natural mystics and 
John made many converts in that country. 
Finally, he deemed it expedient to establish, ac- 
cording to the ancient usages of that country, a 
secret Order rather than a public Church, leaving 



OCCULT HISTORY 125 

the members of the Order to teach the masses as 
they went about as itinerant preachers. 

The real growth of Christianity in the Occident 
commenced with the conversion of Paul who saw 
the emotional side of it. He did not grasp the 
esoteric side of the movement but was a great 
evangelist. He was finally called back to Jeru- 
salem and was shown that he had not an insight 
into the true mysteries, as had been taught by 
the Nazarene Occultist, and was sent to Ephesus 
for the purpose of studying them. Ephesus had 
been the headquarters for Occultism for many 
years, prior to the Christian era, and it was the 
last place where esotericism stood against the 
exotericism of Christianity. Paul was required to 
remain in Ephesus for three years to complete his 
studies of real Christianity. 

The priests of the temple of Artemis — mis- 
takenly identified with the Italian Diana — were all 
initiates. They were miracle workers and were 
custodians of the mysteries until the sixth cen- 
tury of this era; and from all over the world, 
students who desire a greater and a truer know- 
ledge, went to Ephesus for the purpose of en- 
lightenment. Three times was the great temple 
destroyed and three times reared again, and within 
those sacred walls were taught liberating truths. 
The temple influence was felt by all the inhabitants 
of the city; and in time supplemental schools of 
philosophy were established there. 



126 FRAGMENTS OF TRUTH 

The most prominent of these schools — from the 
first to the third centuries — was that founded by 
Apollonius of Tyana. He was an initiate in the 
same Brotherhood as Jesus, and when the latter 
commenced His teachings, Apollonius assisted by 
going from place to place preparing the people 
to receive the new truths. He, too, was a wonder 
worker and duplicated most of the miracles done 
by Jesus. After he had thus assisted the Christian 
movement, he went to Ephesus and established an 
esoteric school. And it was to this school that 
Paul was sent for the purpose of learning some- 
thing about the soul of the religion he advocated. 
But he was not an apt scholar and made but 
little progress in Occultism, which was a most un- 
fortunate thing for Christianity, as it was con- 
verted into Paulism — a crude mythology very far 
removed from the teachings of the Nazarene. 

With the fall of Jerusalem in the year A.D. 70, 
the Christian Church there was disrupted and its 
members scattered broadcast. But it had done 
good work and many souls were considerably ad- 
vanced in their evolution by reason of its brief 
existence. Among the initiates of the early 
Church was one Simeon-ben- Jochai, who lived 
early in the second century. After reaching en- 
lightenment, he determined to attempt the work 
in which his Master had been unsuccessful, and 
rejoined the Jewish Church with the hope of re- 
forming it. His efforts were practically effective, 



OCCULT HISTORY 127 

for he wrote the mystic dissertation which was 
the basis for the Zohar, and this preserved eso- 
tericism for almost a thousand years — to all 
within that Church who were capable of compre- 
hending it. 

Moses-ben-Levi in the thirteenth century, 
amplified the teachings of his master, Simeon- 
ben-Jochai, and thus expanded the work and ex- 
tended its influence for several more centuries — 
for, during the Middle Ages, there were quite a 
number of true Mystics with the Jewish Church. 
The teachings of both the Rabbis, referred to, 
were largely confined to the philosophy of mysti- 
cism and did but little more than touch upon the 
force aspect of the subject. 

After Antioch ceased to be the literary and in- 
tellectual center of the world, that pre-eminence 
passed to Alexandria, and the Christian Occultists 
were naturally attracted there, as were the repre- 
sentatives of all other schools of philosophy. 

John, the Evangelist, was, perhaps, the greatest 
of the early Christian Occultists in Alexandria. 
His teachings were subsequently embodied in the 
Fourth Gospel — the only " orthodox' ' mysticism 
left to Christianity, except a few obscure passages 
in the other three gospels. 

It was comparatively easy for the Alexandrian 
Christians, in the first century, to harmonize 
their philosophy with the Platonic and Gnostic 
Schools which exercised great influence at the 



128 FRAGMENTS OF TRUTH 

time — for the basic principles of the three schools 
were identical. But in the second century, dogma 
began to creep into Eastern Christianity, and 
gradually to crowd out reason and esotericism. 
So marked did this innovation become that Valen- 
tinus, about A.D. 160, felt it necessary to resign 
from the formal Christian movement in order to 
preserve the esotericism of the Master; and he 
established a school of Christian Occultism. 

Valentinus was one of the Illuminati of the 
early Christian movement and without his aid, the 
Church found it difficult to make converts, or suc- 
cessfully to contend against the other philosophic 
schools; therefore, it yielded temporarily to his 
greater wisdom and suppressed dogma to induce 
him to return to the Church. 

But, ignorance, like a noxious weed, grows fast 
and no sooner was Valentinus safely within the 
fold of the Church, than dogma again asserted 
itself and once more he was compelled to with- 
draw from the movement. Then the same con- 
cessions were made to him as before and again he 
took charge of the organization. But, finding it 
impossible to work with the cruder and more 
materialistic minds, who were being attracted to 
Christianity, Valentinus, for the third and final 
time, abandoned the association. 

The Christian Church was fast losing ground 
because the doctrinal factions that had been within 
it from the beginning were increasing enormously; 



OCCULT HISTORY 129 

and so to unify the Church Basilides, in the second 
century, attempted to give to the world the oc- 
cultism of Jesus. Basilides was a disciple of 
Matthew and later a student under Glaucus, who 
was Peter's esoteric pupil, and from these two 
sources he was able to gather all the private teach- 
ings which the great Master had given collectively 
to His disciples. 

In order that there should not, in the future, 
be further contention, as to the exact teachings of 
Jesus, Basilides wrote twenty-four volumes of 
" Interpretation of the Gospels.' ' These were the 
most authentic, extant teachings of the Nazarene 
and helped to unify the Church for a time, though 
the growing mythology of Christianity was con- 
stantly attracting the minds of the masses and re- 
pelling those of the mystics. 

Unfortunately for the Christian Church and for 
the world, about A.D. 264-340, Eusebius of 
Caesarea, a leading politician and bishop in the 
Church, wrote an untruthful "Ecclesiastical His- 
tory," from a dogmatic and exoteric standpoint. 
By reason of his influence with Constantine and 
his political hold upon the Church — which, by that 
time, had become as much a political as a religious 
organization — Eusebius succeeded in having de- 
stroyed most of the books which did not agree with 
his inaccurate productions. Under this ban the 
works of Basilides were destroyed and only here 
and there are found a few scattered leaves. 



130 FRAGMENTS OF TRUTH 

In the latter portion of the second century, 
Ammonius Saccas attempted to bring back to the 
Church the esotericism of Jesus, and failing in 
that, he left the organization and founded the Neo- 
Platonic School of Philaletheians, or " lovers of 
truth." He was known as Theodidakatos, the 
" God-taught, ' ' and was an initiate in Occultism. 
As an organization, his school only lasted about 
one hundred years but his teachings and his in- 
fluence have persisted throughout the centuries 
of Piscine darkness even unto the present 
day. 

Origen was, perhaps, the most noted of the 
ancient pupils of Saccas. He went into the Chris- 
tian Church, as so many Occultists have done prior 
to and since his time, to see if it could not be 
stripped of its dogma and once more be vitalized 
by truth. He became a prominent writer and 
teacher and one of the " Fathers" of the organ- 
ization. But the glamor and the fables of the 
Church appealed to the members more than the 
truth did, and his work was only partially suc- 
cessful. Because of his knowledge of esotericism, 
he was able to contend successfully against the 
other philosophic schools of Alexandria, and his 
work and words were reflected into the Western 
Church and began to attract the more intellectual 
portion of Rome, who, until that time, had held 
aloof from the movement. But, great as his in- 
fluence was, that of ignorance was greater and 



OCCULT HISTORY 131 

very soon truth was once more encrusted with 
creed. 

A less known but nevertheless powerful interest 
was being exerted at this time in the far Orient. 
One Maoi, who had become an esoteric Christian, 
took possession of the schools founded by John, 
the Evangelist, and, through them, gave to the 
Orient "the mysteries of the Kingdom of God," 
as revealed by the Nazarene Master. The Orient 
was prepared for these teachings because of the 
preliminary work done by the disciples of 
Gautama Buddha. In the prior six centuries, 
Buddhism had become much corrupted by formal- 
ism and by the pessimism of its priests, and, while 
the way to a delivery from rebirth was pointed 
out to the devout student, it only ended in an- 
nihilation. 

Immortality was indeed a new revelation to the 
oriental scholar of the mysteries, and was re- 
freshing to him as rain to a parched land. The 
new doctrine of persistent individualism gained 
the adherence of the most advanced scholars. 
Lodges of the Christian Brotherhood were formed, 
through the Orient, and persisted well into the 
thirteenth century, greatly influencing religious 
thought. 

About A.D. 300 the personality of Jesus, in 
the minds of His followers, had eclipsed His teach- 
ings ; and around that personality, grew a mythol- 
ogy as gross as that which enshrouded the dying 



132 FRAGMENTS OF TRUTH 

and dead gods of Rome. At this time the philo- 
sophic controversies, in Alexandria, were at their 
height and were carried on, not only between the 
various schools but also in factions within each 
school. One of the more learned Christian priests, 
Arius, about A.D. 318 entered into open debate 
with his superior, the Bishop of Alexandria, over 
the personality of Jesus, and this debate grew into 
such proportions as to split the entire Christian 
movement, East and West, into two sects, the 
Arians and the Trinitarians. 

It was the object of Arius to try to save the 
Church from the false belief in the childlike fables, 
which, not only the masses, but the priesthood had 
accepted; and in their places to once more sub- 
stitute esotericism. He declared that Jesus was 
created and was not self-existent; that He was 
not immutable nor impeccable; that He was not 
the Logos, or "Word," and that the Scriptures 
attributed that name to Him as they do to other 
created minds. 

He expanded the Occult Philosophy of the 
Logos, which was well known to and accepted by 
all the learned schools of that day, and all the 
ignorant, orthodox bishops sided against him 
while the enlightened minority gave allegiance to 
his teachings — more particularly the priests than 
the bishops. So bitter did the controversy rage 
in Rome and in Alexandria, that finally Constan- 
tine the Emperor, who for political reasons had 



OCCULT HISTORY 133 

adopted Christianity, convoked the Council of Nice 
to pass upon the disputed question. 

Every one familiar with Gibbon's "History of 
the Decline and Fall of the Roman Empire," 
knows the intellectual and spiritual qualifications 
of the delegate to that Council — and it was a fore- 
gone conclusion that Arius, and those who stood 
with him, should be banished from the Church. 

1 ' Once to every man and nation comes the moment 

to decide, 
In the strife of Truth with falsehood, for the 

good or evil side; 
Some great cause, God's new Messiah, offering 

each the bloom or blight, 
Parts the goats upon the left hand and the sheep 

upon the right. 
And the choice goes by forever 'twixt that 

darkness and that light." 

At the Council of Nice, A.D. 325, Christianity 
I died and Churchianity was born. But truth can 
never die, and while it was true that the ignorant 
and materialistic men, who thenceforth dominated 
the Church, were unable to give further esoteri- 
cism to the people, yet the students of Occultism, 
within the Church, began to form secret Brother- 
hoods, within the exoteric body, and continued to 
study the mysteries that Jesus had taught. 

From the fourth to the eighth century of this 



134 FRAGMENTS OF TRUTH 

era, Esotericism or Occultism, for the words are 
synonymous, was preserved to the Occident by 
these Mystic Orders. Members of a Brotherhood 
sometimes got control of a property and then, 
secretly, sent word to known students within the 
Church to come to a designated monastery and 
receive the ancient teachings ; and the real seeker 
for truth was glad to avail himself of such an 
opportunity. 

Judas was not only an individual but also a type, 
and within these Brotherhoods in the eighth cen- 
tury, were members who became envious of the 
greater knowledge and power of their superiors; 
and these traitors, to truth, finally revealed to 
the exoteric heads of the Church, the existence of 
the secret societies, and that they were teaching 
contrary to the accepted dogmas of the Church 
of Rome. In consequence of these revelations, an 
effort was made to entirely uproot all esotericism 
within the Church. Monastery after monastery 
fell before the accusers. Many members of the 
Brotherhoods were taken to Rome and condemned 
as heretics and were dutifully burned, or hanged. 
So thorough was the investigation and severe the 
condemnation, that the .remaining esotericists, 
within the Church, left it. Some fled to the moun- 
tains where they established Occult Retreats, while 
others went to Arabia. Those who went to the 
Retreats carried their books, manuscripts and 
alchemical outfits with them, and they and their 



OCCULT HISTORY 135 

successors, for five centuries thereafter, lived like 
hunted animals — their only offence being their 
love of truth and their willingness to share such 
of it, as they possessed, with any or all who cared 
to receive it. 

Among Western Occultists the Piscine Age is 
known as the Age of Spiritual Darkness for this 
planet, while the Eastern Occultists designate it 
as Kaliyuga, the Black or Iron Age ; and the lowest 
dip of the cycle was during the period just in- 
dicated. Had it not been for the efforts of the 
Occultists to keep the lights of truth, and of in- 
tellectuality, burning during that period, the Oc- 
cident would have completely turned to bar- 
barism ; and as it was it barely escaped that fate 
as even exoteric history discloses. 

Of course there were sporadic attempts made 
within the Church to bring about reformations of 
a minor nature — making clean the outside of the 
platter — but no basic changes in religious thought 
could be attempted in the Middle Ages. The Oc- 
cult Retreats established and maintained, at the 
expense of blood, liberty and life, were the only 
repositories of knowledge, sacred and secular, in 
Europe, outside of Spain, and some of these Re- 
treats have been preserved and are in existence 
today. 

The Occultists who fled to Arabia found a warm 
welcome from the esotericists who were there. 
Some had recently come from India to aid in the 



136 FRAGMENTS OF TRUTH 

Mohammedan Renaissance ; while others were na- 
tive Arabians who were the spiritual heirs of the 
ancient Lemurians and Chaldean priests, and were 
the custodians of the Occult Archives which had 
been kept in Arabia continuously — from a time 
antedating the sinking of Lemuria — the oldest 
records in the world. 

The Europeans carried with them the Greek 
Philosophy which blended, in all but name, with 
that of the esotericism of India. The Arabian 
students became the torch-bearers during the night 
of mediaeval darkness. Absorbing both the know- 
ledge of the East and of the "West, they founded 
schools in Alexandria, Bagdad, Baska, Bokhara, 
Cairo, Cordova and elsewhere and collected enor- 
mous libraries at Alexandria, Bagdad and Cairo. 

In their schools were taught philosophy, mathe- 
matics, medicine, botany, chemistry, poetry, litera- 
ture (except drama), astrology and alchemy. The 
last two sciences, together with esoteric phi- 
losophy, were preserved only for " accepted stu- 
dents," while all the other subjects were offered 
to the world. Students flocked from all over 
Europe to Spain to gain the knowledge, otherwise 
unattainable, in the Occident, and the Arabic 
school in Cordova soon rivalled the literary fame 
of Bagdad. This blaze of intellectual glory, from 
the eighth to the thirteenth centuries, contrasted 
strangely with the densest ignorance of Europe, 
brought about through Churchianity, and threat- 



OCCULT HISTORY 137 

ened to overthrow the power of Rome, which 
finally succeeded, after many efforts, in driving 
out, through force of arms, the Arabians but was 
never able to eradicate the ideas that had been 
given to the Western World. 

In the thirteenth century some of the mem- 
bers of the Christian Brotherhood emerged, from 
the retreats, to fan into flame the protests against 
the Church, which were beginning to manifest in 
all lines of endeavor; for, at that time, the op- 
pression of the Church was felt in all human 
relations. 

Joachim, of Flora in Calabria, a mystic, inter- 
preted the Apocalypse and the Book of Revela- 
tions in such a manner as to threaten the existence 
of the Church. Many of the Franciscans accepted 
his teachings and, under various names or sects, 
created discontent with the Church throughout 
Europe. 

The Arabic text of Aristotle made its myster- 
ious way into Christian schools and awoke specula- 
tive thought and logic, in creed-encrusted minds. 
European politics and national controversies arose 
which the Pope could not control. The disin- 
tegrating force of truth upon error, directed by 
Occultists, continued, during the fourteenth cen- 
tury, and was greatly aided by the removal of the 
papal residence to Avignon (1305-1376) and by 
the Great Schism (1378-1417) when three contem- 
poraneous Popes each claimed to be the sole vicar 



138 FRAGMENTS OF TRUTH 

of God on earth — a schism from which Rome 
never completely recovered. 

Early in the fifteenth century,, printing was 
rediscovered and by the end of that century, 
had become an established business throughout 
Europe. This gave the Occultists enormous facil- 
ities for spreading philosophy and increasing the 
general fund of human knowledge. 

About 1425 Christian Rosencreutz, an initiate, 
thinking the time propitious for an esoteric organ- 
ization, to again do public work, sent emissaries 
to the various Occult Retreats, calling upon the 
occupants to join him in establishing such an 
Order. The response was favorable, and after due 
preparation, in 1459, the Order of the Rosy Cross 
was created in Germany. The next few years 
were spent by the Brotherhood in establishing a 
Lodge in France and another in England; and 
later other Lodges were formed in other European 
countries. The objects of these Orders were the 
reformation of the Church and its teachings, and 
also the propaganda of Occultism and the Occult 
Sciences — especially medicine, magic and al- 
chemy. 

For the first century of its existence, but little 
was publicly known of the Organization. The 
members devoted themselves to sowing the seed 
for the Reformation and to helping worthy in- 
dividuals who were sick in body or in soul. Slowly 
the marvellous cures of the Brotherhood became 



OCCULT HISTORY 139 

more generally known and their activities talked 
about. No one, however, was able to locate the 
meeting places of the Lodges nor to identify the 
members — for centuries of persecution had taught 
them caution. 

The Rosicrucians, as the Brotherhood was then 
known, made its first publication in 1614 and other 
documents followed from time to time, all of which 
were so written as to stimulate inquiry, among 
would-be probationers, and to awaken thought in 
the general public. Rome soon felt the effect of 
these activities, and every effort was made to 
locate the Lodges and their members. But the 
Rosicrucians were at once everywhere and no- 
where. There was not a movement for human 
liberation that they did not either initiate, or aid, 
but their greatest efforts were made, in Germany 
and in Switzerland, to bring about the Reforma- 
tion. Similar efforts were made in France, backed 
by the University of Paris and the educated 
classes, but the King, Francis I, and later, his son 
and successor, Henry II, for political reasons, sup- 
ported the Church and largely suppressed the 
French Protestants. 

In England also the reformers were successful, 
more largely due, however, to the domestic affairs 
of Henry VIII and to his political policies than to 
spiritual enlightenment. The Rosicrucian Order, 
in course of time, closed its Lodges in all the 
countries of Europe and in England, except in 



140 FRAGMENTS OF TRUTH 

Germany and in France, and these two Lodges 
persist to the present day. 

But this ancient and powerful Occult body 
should not be confused with later organizations, 
frankly formed to study the words and works of 
the Order of the Rosy Cross — most notably in 
England — nor with the nve spurious bodies in the 
United States by the same name, each claiming to 
be the genuine successor of the ancient Order; for 
the original Rosicrucians never established, or 
authorized, Lodges outside of England and the 
European Continent. 

The Illuminati was also another mystic Order, 
founded by Occultists in Spain in the sixteenth 
century (about 1520). It was the offshoot of the 
Arabic Esotericists but was finally crushed by the 
Inquisition. Some members went to Paris and es- 
tablished the Order there in 1623-1635, and 
later, another branch in the South of France in 
1722 which persisted until the Revolution. And 
in 1776 the Order was established at Ingolstadt, 
to combat the influence of the Jesuits. The Free 
Masons took up this movement and it grew rapidly 
in Germany, but internal dissensions of unde- 
veloped members caused its disruption in 1785. 

In this brief sketch of Occultism, during the 
Christian era, it is the intent of the author to only 
touch upon those Occult bodies whose work was 
essentially constructive, unselfish and evolution- 
ary. There were other Occult Societies existing 



OCCULT HISTORY 141 

during this period that were established solely for 
the individual benefit of their members ; and still 
others whose work was both constructive and de- 
structive, as the times and occasions fitted with, 
or opposed their organic selfish purposes; and 
lastly there existed and exist, Occult bodies whose 
purposes are evil and destructive. Then, too, in 
this sketch of Occultism, esoteric organizations 
and movements, rather than individual Occultists, 
have been dwelt upon, except in cases where in- 
dividuals initiated a movement, or an organization, 
and were essential to its success. 

There were many Occultists who did an enor- 
mous good, through their writings, during this 
period but who are omitted only because of the 
limit to the scope of this Chapter. It has always 
been the policy of the constructive Occultist to 
emphasize his philosophy, or science, rather than 
to exploit himself — to, as far as possible, follow 
the injunction; "Let not thy left hand know what 
thy right hand doeth." Thus have Occultists 
always been the instruments through which Divine 
Will has shaped the religious history of the world 
and accelerated the evolution of mankind. Neces- 
sarily, then, there have been times when Occultists 
were willing to be immolated for the sake of the 
common good; times when it was impossible for 
them to work silently or secretly and accomplish 
their purposes. Many of those whose mission was 
to do public work received scant appreciation, 



142 FRAGMENTS OF TRUTH 

from their contemporaries, but sometimes earned 
the admiration or worship of posterity while 
others still remained " unwept, unhonored and 
unsung. ' ' 

In the first half of the sixteenth century there 
lived an occultist who, in many lives, had borne 
the burdens of humanity; and who had done as 
much to help shape the intellectual and spiritual 
destiny of mankind as perhaps a*ny other ego, 
evolving on this planet. He was popularly known, 
during the period mentioned, as Paracelsus. It 
is well known to advanced students of Occultism, 
that the ego then known as Paracelsus had worked 
all through the Arine and Piscine Ages in other 
bodies for the uplift of the world ; and had in two 
prior incarnations made history and in many 
other lives, less public, helped to shape it. 

In the earlier part of the Arine Age he was 
known as Elijah and later in that period as 
Socrates. It is well known to all educated people 
what he accomplished during those incarnations. 
As Paracelsus his mission was to aid in the 
Renaissance ; and, more particularly, to reform the 
practice of medicine, to revive an interest in eso- 
teric philosophy, to establish the science of chem- 
istry and to prove the actuality of Alchemy. 

It was to be expected that a man, who taught 
so contrary to orthodox religion and to orthodox 
medicine, would receive but little justice, in the 
judgment of his contemporaries, or from exoteric 



OCCULT HISTORY 143 

historians. And it is somewhat surprising that 
attempts were made in the nineteenth century to 
more accurately appraise him. 

Dr. Arthur Edward Waite has a fair but brief 
biographical preface to his English translation of 
"The Hermetic and Alchemical Writings'' of 
Paracelsus; and all students of Occultism are 
under obligation to Dr. Waite for his painstaking 
efforts in collecting and translating these writings. 

"The Life of Paracelsus,' ' by Dr. Franz Hart- 
mann (1886) is a good biography in English. Anna 
M. Stoddard, in establishing the fame of Para- 
celsus, as the Father of Medicine and Chemistry, 
has in her life of Paracelsus (1911), totally mis- 
understood and belittled the greater side of his 
nature, as a Mystic and Alchemist. 

It is now generally conceded that he was the 
foremost medical practitioner of his time and that, 
by reason of his wide knowledge, he was able to 
expand, if not change, the course of medical educa- 
tion. He was the first to announce the doctrine 
that life processes are chemical. The discovery 
of hydrogen is placed to his credit as are also 
many chemical remedies. 

Important as are all these discoveries, still more 
so are his teachings of Occultism. His greatest 
achievement, from the viewpoint of the Occultist, 
was the rediscovery of the Philosopher's Stone, 
and his writings instructing others how to search 
for it. It has only been since the discovery of 



144 FRAGMENTS OF TRUTH 

radium, that modern physicists and chemists have 
conceded that Alchemy was possibly, or probably, 
a real science. Occultists have known this truth 
for ages though but few have succeeded in master- 
ing its mysteries. 

In the alchemical writings of Paracelsus are 
embodied all that is best in the writings of his 
predecessors, and all that has been written since 
is but surplusage. Probably no Alchemist will 
ever again attempt to write a treatise on the sub- 
ject because Paracelsus has said all that should 
be said. Perhaps a word on Alchemy will not be 
out of place in this connection. 

Alchemy has three aspects : spiritual, mental and 
physical. The greatest object of the Alchemist is 
to transmute his nature so as to quickly evolve. 
Corresponding to this higher philosophic aspect 
of the subject, is the secondary one: the trans- 
mutation of the physical body in order that an 
efficient instrument may be prepared for the use 
of the ego in its evolvement. The Philosopher's 
Stone, symbolically, is the Occult Philosophy 
through which is brought about spiritual, and 
mental transmutation. For the renewal and pres- 
ervation of the physical body, an actual material 
" Stone,' ' or alchemical preparation is neces- 
sary. 

They are no mere idle tales, that are read in the 
Scripture, which ascribe centuries of uninter- 
rupted physical life to the patriarchs and 



OCCULT HISTORY 145 

prophets; for having learned first to live the 
Occult spiritual life, later they gained, after much 
labor, the knowledge of how to perpetuate their 
physical bodies. Nor was it an idle claim of the 
mediaeval Alchemists that they could, by use of 
the Philosopher's Stone, cure any disease and re- 
new their physical bodies, or the bodies of others, 
and prolong life to any age desired. 

The normal life of man, even treated as an 
animal, should greatly exceed his present, average 
age; and there is no scientific reason why there 
should not be discovered a way to eliminate waste 
and to renew the chemicals of the body. 

It is the contention of the Alchemists that all 
disease, including old age, is due to the presence 
of various acids in the body ; and, therefore, their 
elimination is the first step toward a cure which 
is perfected by the introduction into the system 
of the necessary building elements. The Phi- 
losopher's Stone accomplishes both results and 
there are on earth now, twelve Occultists, one a 
woman, who possess the knowledge of how to pre- 
pare and use the " Stone." 

The only object the Occultist has in prolonging 
his physical life is to acquire knowledge and 
1 power, and to thus advance his own evolution, and 
to aid others, who have proven themselves worthy 
of individual attention, in their upward struggle. 
The interruption of death, necessitating rebirth, 
destroys the continuity of consciousness for a time 



146 FRAGMENTS OF TRUTH 

and thus makes evolvement of the individual 
slower. 

The Philosopher's Stone, when strengthened 
and purified, by years of patient toil, will not only 
cure any disease and prolong physical life, but 
will, as Paracelsus declared, transmute baser 
metals into gold; but this latter use is more of a 
laboratory experiment than a commercial process. 
Doubtless, in former ages, when there was a 
scarcity of gold, the process may have been com- 
mercial, but it is not now so viewed by Alchemists. 
It is said, however, that some modern Alchemists 
have the power to change silver into gold, but the 
Philosopher's Stone is not used in that process. 

Paracelsus' great work was incomplete by 
reason of his untimely death, instigated by the 
medical profession, whose short-comings he so 
mercilessly exposed. He excarnated in 1541 and 
reincarnated before the end of that century. The 
first century, of his new life, was devoted to fur- 
ther research in the realms of the Occult Sciences. 
His first public appearance was in the first quarter 
of the eighteenth century. He purchased from 
the Pope a small property called St. Germain, 
in the Italian Tyrol, which carried with it the title 
Count de St. Germain, and as such he was known 
to history. 

Even his enemies admit that he was one of the 
most, if not the most, accomplished linguists of 
Europe* It is also conceded that he was an adept 



OCCULT HISTORY 147 

musician; and it was said that with the violin, 
he rivalled Paganini himself. His knowledge of 
medicine and the sciences was extraordinary. Be- 
cause of his proficiency in history, he was sent 
upon many diplomatic missions by Louis XV. He 
played an important part in placing Catherine II 
on the Eussian throne. In Germany he founded 
freemasonry. He was very wealthy and made 
presents of wonderful jewels to his friends and to 
the crowned heads of Europe. Those jewels he 
said were made by himself, through alchemical 
processes, in his laboratory. He claimed to have 
the power to live indefinitely, through his knowl- 
edge of alchemical medicine. It is further con- 
ceded that he knew, well, all the prominent people 
of Europe and was a welcome visitor at their 
homes. How incredible, then, seem the silly 
stories and exaggerations that his enemies have 
tried to fasten to his personality. 

Having touched upon some of the acknowledged 
accomplishments of this brilliant man, it may 
prove interesting to lightly sketch some of the 
Occult work he sought to accomplish under the 
name of St. Germain. Primarily he desired to 
awaken, in the minds of the people, a curiosity 
concerning Occult Philosophy and its sciences, in 
order that a few should learn to take life more 
seriously and thereby consciously undertake their 
own evolution. He dazzled all classes of society 
by a display of his knowledge and power, hoping 



148 FRAGMENTS OF TRUTH 

that some persons would try to emulate his ac- 
complishments, which could only be done through 
the study of Occultism. It was not a pleasant 
position to assume, for, by nature and by prefer- 
ence, Occultists are silent unseen helpers of the 
world ; but humanity had to be appealed to, on its 
own plane of consciousness, and a few responded. 

St. Germain was a great traveller and took oc- 
casion to meet and to help as many students, 
old and new, as possible; and among the more 
prominent of these was Friedrich Anton Mesmer. 
This ego had been a student of the Count in a 
prior life and at his suggestion removed to Paris 
in 1778. 

The special wort delegated to Mesmer by his 
Teacher, was to stimulate interest in medicine and 
in mesmerism, which he did. Later, Mesmer 
founded an Occult Society known as the " Order 
of Universal Harmony." 

It is common knowledge how well Mesmer suc- 
ceeded, for a time, and how, later, the world de- 
serted him, after a commission composed of 
physicians and scientists had investigated mes- 
merism and reported to the French Government 
that it did not exist. But, fortunately, Mesmer 
studied Alchemy, under St. Germain, and obtained 
the Philosopher's Stone, consequently he lived to 
see the commission's report reversed, by all the 
world, in the following century. For Mesmer did 
not die in 1815, as was commonly reported, but 



OCCULT HISTORY 149 

lived in Paris after the Bevolution until 1918, 
when he left there and went into an Occult Re- 
treat. 

In one of his frequent visits of mercy to the 
poor in Paris, St. Germain found a young man 
suffering with cancer. He was the son of a French 
woman and an Italian, named Cagliostro. St. Ger- 
main recognized in the lad a reincarnation of a 
former student, took the boy to his home and cured 
his disease. By reason of the close association, 
for there was no legal relationship, Cagliostro 
became popularly known, first, as the Count's son 
and, later, as Count Cagliostro. 

Under St. Germain's instruction, Alesandro 
Cagliostro, after a few years, became very well 
educated in the arts and sciences and in Occultism. 
His work, as directed by St. Germain, was to en- 
large the scope of freemasonry. After his initia- 
tion into that Order, he went through Europe es- 
tablishing Lodges. Instead of confining his efforts 
to men, Cagliostro, foreseeing the part women 
were destined to play, in the future of the world, 
admitted them as freemasons and some of their 
Lodges are still extant in France. The ritual of 
today was merely used then to keep out all cowans 
and eavesdroppers; and after the Lodges were 
opened, not only Occultism was discussed but also 
Church reformation and political matters. It was 
because of the activities of masons, in Church re- 
formation, that the Order fell under its ban, which 



150 FRAGMENTS OF TRUTH 

has never been lifted. Rome, in those days, 
especially in France and Germany, never forgave 
a member of the Church who joined the masons. 
Cagliostro, because of his great activities in that 
line, and, peculiarly, because he admitted women 
to membership, was marked for Rome's anathema. 

It was not because of the lessons taught in 
symbolic masonry that the Church objected to the 
Order, but, because it had suffered disruption in 
the Reformation through the work of secret so- 
cieties. Because the Lodges were founded by Cag- 
liostro, therefore, no effort was spared by the 
Church to belittle and besmear the name of Cag- 
liostro — living or dead. 

In December, 1789, the Holy Inquisition con- 
demned him to death for freemasonry. Some his- 
torians say he was executed; others that he was 
imprisoned in the fortress of San Leon, for life. 
Most of the misinformation concerning this mys- 
terious and self-sacrificing Occultist was due to 
the direct efforts of Rome, but not a little was 
the result of mistaken identity. 

A distant relative of Cagliostro, on his father's 
side, one Joseph Balsamo, resembled the Count 
in personal appearance. Balsamo was a most un- 
scrupulous character and frequently impersonated 
Cagliostro throughout Europe. Cagliostro, like 
his teacher and friend, St. Germain, was popular 
among all classes, and those who knew him well 
were not deceived ; but many who desired and did 



OCCULT HISTORY 151 

not have' the honor of Cagliostro 's acquaintance 
were easily imposed upon. Many of Balsamo's 
escapades and dishonest practices were thus mis- 
takenly attributed to Cagliostro. 

Carlyle in his "Miscellanies," (1833) collected 
all the misinformation, which gossip and malice 
could supply, and gave them to the world as Cag- 
liostro 's biography. Mr. W. K. H. Trowbridge 
has made the only serious attempt (Cagliostro, 
1910) in English, to weigh historical evidence and 
deal justly with the great Occultist; and all eso- 
tericists throughout the world appreciate his 
honest effort and believe he did the best he could 
with the evidence at his command. 

According to Occult history, after Cagliostro 
was condemned to death, as a freemason, the night 
before the day set for his execution St. Germain 
succeeded in liberating him and sent him to the 
mountains to remain until after the Revolution. 
But, before he was recalled, he was stricken with 
typhoid fever and died alone in his little cabin in 
the Pyrenees without medicine, or care. 

St. Germain did not escape from France, during 
the earlier part of the Revolution, but disguised 
and concealed himself in the Latin quarter of 
Paris, until conditions became less abnormal, when 
he went abroad, for a time — leaving his title and 
his name behind him as so many others did at 
that period. 

All biographies differ as to the place and time 



152 FRAGMENTS OF TRUTH 

of his death; hut generally unite in saying that 
he died "about" 1780, "although he is said to have 
been seen in Paris as late as 1789, or later." 

The Occultists say that St. Germain returned 
to Paris, after the Revolution, and made that city 
his headquarters until 1918 when he, and a number 
of his European students, retired to a retreat in 
Arabia. 

The activity of the Occultists during the nine- 
teenth century is embodied in the Chapter entitled 
"The Spiritual Renaissance of the Nineteenth 
Century." 



CHAPTER EIGHT 

VANITY 

Vanity is a characteristic of the animal nature 
and did not belong, originally, to the subjective 
mind. When the Sons of God came to earth they 
had no vanity. In the Arcadian lives that they 
had lived, upon the Moon, each looked like the 
others ; and, since they had never made an effort 
to live, they had no ideas of individual superior- 
ity. They had no consciousness of the need of 
individual possessions, and, therefore, knew not 
the difference between "mine and thine/ ' 

But, with the animal minds, whom they es- 
poused, it was different; for, with them, the 
struggle, first, for communal possessions, and 
later, for individual possessions, had been in 
progress since the time the ants learned that a 
few members of their community had accom- 
plished more work, had contributed more food 
and had laid more eggs, in their particular nest, 
than had some of the others. And then was born 
a communal appreciation that caused the more 
ambitious ants to build a new hill, or nest, and 
leave the less active, less competent members of 
their swarm behind. 

In their next state of consciousness, as honey 

153 



154 FRAGMENTS OF TRUTH 

bees, the same spirit of communal appreciation 
manifested again. When their hives, or hollow 
trees, became overcrowded with drones that per- 
sisted in living upon the production of the real 
workers, again they separated into two classes; 
the appreciative bees left their old abiding place 
and secured a new one where they proceeded to 
manifest their activities without the restraint im- 
posed upon them by the drones. 

"When the communal consciousness became di- 
vided and merged into the lower animal con- 
sciousness, then communal appreciation disap- 
peared and self-appreciation and self-reliance 
began to manifest in the small animals. For 
example : 

The almost human expression of self-reliance 
and self-appreciation on the face of the inde- 
pendent little squirrel, shows what he thinks of 
himself as he sits upon the limb of a tree, just 
outside his nest, and looks complacently down, 
from his elevated position, upon his inefficient 
brother squirrels who have procrastinated, with 
their opportunities, and are now frantically dig- 
ging their nuts and acorns out of the snow ; while 
he has gathered his winter-store and has hidden 
it away. 

And that self-appreciative, self-satisfied little 
scrap of individualized consciousness nibbles 
daintily at the nice fat acorn, he has selected 
from his supplies, while he indifferently waves 



VANITY 155 

his handsome tail above the unsuccessful little 
creatures below. Thus he manifests his self- 
appreciation and self-reliance. 

In the human baby, self-reliance begins to 
manifest when it finds it can stand alone and 
walk a few steps unsupported by its nurse. And, 
when it is old enough to begin to understand the 
complimentary things said to, and about it ; when 
it has learned to know something of the meaning 
of the word " pretty,' ' its little heart begins to 
swell with self-appreciation. And when it under- 
stands that it is "the prettiest, smartest, cutest 
child that ever lived," then vanity is born in the 
mind of the human baby. 

There is a fine distinction between self-appre- 
ciation and vanity; and a close analysis is re- 
quired to determine where self-appreciation ends 
and vanity begins. The Occultist says, self-ap- 
preciation comes as a result of self-reliance. 
When an animal, or a man, through effort, over- 
comes obstacles and realizes his power, those two 
characteristics are necessary to the founding of 
his character. But, when he begins to compare 
his appearance and his successes with the appear- 
ance and successes of another, then vanity comes 
into his nature ; and, while self-reliance and self- 
appreciation are constructive to a good charac- 
ter, vanity, like a corrosive acid, destroys it. 

Vanity is such a subtle emotion and appears in 
so many guises that many times men are de- 



156 FRAGMENTS OF TRUTH 

ceived by it. For it manifests, not only with 
regard to personal appearance, but with the men- 
tal and spiritual perceptions of men and women. 
And when it has been eradicated from one form 
of manifestation it often becomes strongly estab- 
lished in another. For example : 

There was a man whom the world called a 
handsome, distinguished gentleman. He was edu- 
cated and refined and held a prominent position 
in society. Friends, of both sexes, admired and 
flattered him ; and he became so accustomed to re- 
ceiving compliments he felt resentful to those who 
did not offer them. His affable, charming manner 
made him an agreeable companion and his real 
goodness of heart won the love of many persons 
who knew him well. He was an admirer of 
beauty, and, because of the compliments continu- 
ally received, became convinced that his taste, 
regarding all things, was best. He compared his 
face and figure with those of other men, and 
decided his admirers were right in their judg- 
ment, that he was the handsomest man he had 
ever seen — and became satisfied with himself, as 
he was. 

Because he believed he knew everything, that 
was necessary to know, and possessed everything, 
that was necessary to have, he had no desire to 
learn anything more difficult than the latest 
dances and the newest fashionable fads. In his 
estimation, he had reached perfected manhood 



VANITY 157 

and there was nothing more for him to attain. 
And here his evolvement paused and trembled 
in the balance, because his vanity told him there 
was nothing more for him to gain. 

The years passed, and, as this man continued 
to live in the atmosphere of flattery, his vanity 
became colossal and his friends called him Apollo, 
which pleased him greatly. But, suddenly a 
change came into his life. He lost his fortune, 
and, soon afterward, met with a mishap which 
temporarily disabled and permanently disfigured 
him. 

His fashionable friends deserted and forgot 
him; and he was left alone to meditate upon his 
new condition. He passed through the valley 
of the shadow of death and despair, and stopped 
just this side of the great Divide. While he lay 
upon his bed of suffering and saw to what his 
vanity had led him, he made a vow never again 
would he allow vanity to influence his thoughts 
or acts ; that he would crush it forever out of his 
consciousness. 

In beginning life all over again, he selected the 
Law for his profession. He reasoned that this 
would be the best profession for him, since beauty 
of face and form was not necessary to the win- 
ning of a verdict with a jury. He remembered 
that some of the brightest men on the Bench, and 
at the Bar, were the ugliest, and then began his 
work in earnest. 



158 FRAGMENTS OF TRUTH 

He studied as diligently as lie had danced and 
flirted and the results were not long in coming. 
He became a counsellor at law whose opinion, 
upon legal questions, was eagerly sought. He 
gained a power of eloquence that was irresistible, 
and, to secure him for an advocate, was almost a 
guarantee of winning a case. His fame spread 
throughout the country as a consequence. 

But he never wore good clothes, was noted for 
his shabby, personal appearance and seemed to 
take great pleasure in shocking his associates, 
and the public, by his untidiness and irregulari- 
ties in dress. He rarely shaved, never combed 
his hair, at the back of his head, and permitted 
it to fall over his forehead almost to his eye- 
brows. He became known as "Shaggy Jack," 
and gloried in this title, believing it and the ir- 
regularities of his dress were evidences that he 
had destroyed, in himself, the last shred of 
vanity. 

He was mistaken, however; his vanity had 
shifted its position from the physical to the 
mental plane, of his consciousness, and was as 
firmly entrenched there as it had been on the 
physical. For, in his position as counselor, 
when he now made a statement concerning a 
point of law, that statement must stand, as he had 
made it. If he decided upon the guilt, or inno- 
cence, of a client it did not matter what evidence 
were brought to prove facts to the contrary, he 



VANITY 159 

refused to accept anythmg that disagreed with 
his decision, and fought cftterminedly to maintain 
it. 

He became bitter and unrelenting, in his ego- 
tism, and intolerant with every one who differed 
from him in opinion. His desire was to rule, or 
ruin, every person with whom he entered into 
any form of relationship. And again he became 
retarded in his evolvement by the mental vanity 
that blinded and made him believe the small ele- 
vation upon which he stood was the top of the 
highest mountain peak of knowledge. Vanity 
had cast a curtain of fog before his mental vision 
and he could see nothing above and beyond him- 
self; and again he believed there was nothing 
more to strive for, nothing more to attain. 

Another example of how that subtle emotion, 
vanity, deceives its possessor was manifested in 
the case of a woman. She, also, had lost her for- 
tune, her beauty and her social position. She 
turned to the Church for consolation and became 
a religious fanatic. After studying the Bible, the 
Catechism and the lives of all the Saints and 
Martyrs, she decided to follow in their footsteps. 

Because she had accepted the King James ver- 
sion of the Scriptures, for her life guide, she be- 
lieved it to be the only guide for any one to fol- 
low. She accepted the fallacy, for a truth, that 
every human soul had been lost who had passed 
from physical life without the knowledge and 



160 FRAGMENTS OF TRUTH 

belief that Jesus of Nazareth came into the world 
to save sinners. She thought she knew that every 
soul, who would pass out of material expression 
without that same knowledge and belief, must 
meet the same fate of the unfortunates of the 
past. 

In her desire for a broader field for her Chris- 
tian labors, she left her helpless old mother to 
be cared for by the county, sent her son and 
daughter to live with relatives, who grudgingly 
accepted them as encumbrances, and sailed for 
the Orient. There, among people whom she 
called heathen, because they had not her religious 
belief, she settled herself to the self-imposed task 
of saving souls from everlasting punishment. 

A few women, of the lower classes, were will- 
ing to be taught sewing and fancy work; but not 
one individual did she find who accepted her re- 
ligious views — because they all believed they had 
better ones. 

For years the spiritual vanity of that woman 
kept her blinded to the fact that she was doing a 
mistaken duty; and, instead, made her believe 
that her work, among the so-called heathen, would 
bring her close to God; and that, in return for 
her efforts, she would be given an exalted place 
in heaven among the Saints and Martyrs. 

Her vanity showed her the alluring mental 
picture of herself clasped in the arms of Jesus, 
while other less fortunate souls looked enviously 



VANITY 161 

at her in that blest exclusiveness. It never 
occurred to her simple mind, that there were 
thousands of other fanatics in the world who 
expect to lie in the arms of Jesus, when their 
life struggles are ended; and if she had thought 
of it, her vanity would have told her that she 
would be the favored one, above all others, to 
win that happiness. 

After years of hard work, disappointment, pri- 
vation and constant prayer this victim, of spirit- 
ual vanity, died alone in a little hut; but, before 
she passed on, she wrote to her family and told 
them that, although she had not saved any souls, 
there, her life had been a sanctified one and she 
was glad to die a martyr to her faith. That her 
one regret was that death could not come to her 
through burning at the stake as it had to many 
other martyrs. That if she had a thousand lives 
she would gladly give them all for her faith; 
that she was going to Heaven where she would 
be perfectly happy, notwithstanding the fact that 
nearly all the people in the world were going to 
be lost. And that woman believed that vanity 
had died out of her soul when she lost her beauty. 

From an evolutionary standpoint her whole 
life had been a failure. She had gained nothing 
and had not the satisfaction of converting one 
soul to her faith. But she had neglected her 
filial and maternal duties, also her social and 
civic duties. She had helped no one, and her own 



162 FRAGMENTS OF TRUTH 

mental and spiritual development had been nar- 
rowed and restricted by her vain belief that she 
was right and that every one, who did not agree 
with her, was wrong. 

There are the egotistical father and mother 
who believe they know best what their children 
should do, or become, in the business and social 
world. Many ne'er-do-wells there are, who, be- 
cause of the vanity of one or both parents, were 
forced to attempt to do the things they were not 
fitted to do, and, therefore, became failures. It 
is a dangerous thing for a parent to decide, un- 
equivocally, whether a son shall become a clergy- 
man, or an artist. And it is a terrible offence 
against the divine Law to force a child to give 
up its ideals, that came with it into this life, and 
to compel it to undertake a lifework for which 
it has no sympathy. 

The ideals, that a soul is born with, are the 
unfinished, mental creations of other lives, which 
should be worked out in this life. Such ideals 
should not be neglected but should be brought 
into material expression, as far as it is possible 
to do. And no parent, or friend, should dare to 
interfere, or discourage another soul, in working 
out its destiny according to its ideals. 

Parents should study the tastes of their chil- 
dren; should win their confidences and listen to 
their aspirations. They should give them the 
freedom of their choice of a profession. Because 



VANITY 163 

the father of a boy has been a successful black- 
smith, he should not force the child, who loves 
music and longs for an opportunity to study it, 
to spend his life at the anvil and forge. 

Because a mother has been a society woman 
and cares for nothing but social functions, she 
should not compel her daughter to spend her 
precious time in dressing and flirting, when she 
hates such frivolities and longs to become a 
literatus. It is vanity that makes parents feel 
that they always know what is best for their 
children to do ; and it is vanity that makes a son, 
or daughter, dictate to his, or her, parents how, 
or where, they shall live. Who is there in this 
world, at this time, that is wise enough to direct 
another's life? 

Among the most honorable titles that vanity 
masquerades under and one that gives it the 
greatest distinction is " Pride." Many persons 
scorn the thought that vanity influences them. 
They believe it is pride that swells their heads 
and hearts when they think of their ancient 
family names, ancestral abodes, heirlooms and 
traditions. The scornful superciliousness with 
which they observe those who have not genera- 
tions of noble (?) ancestry behind them is sup- 
posed to be pride and not snobbish vanity. 

Should the scion of an old family investigate 
the private lives of his ancestors, and living rela- 
tives, and find no dishonor, to men, or women, 



164 FRAGMENTS OF TRUTH 

attached to any of them, then the emotion he 
feels for his family name is justified pride. But, 
even then it may be but an ephemeral honor, 
since one dishonorable act of any one, bearing 
that name, would dishonor it and afterwards it 
would be no better than any other name. 

It has been said that " pride goeth before a 
fall." But the Occultist says, "it is vanity that 
goeth before a fall"; that pride is the outgrowth 
of virtue and that, without virtue, pride could 
not exist. That it is a protector of virtue and 
that it makes its possessor not only avoid evil 
doing but it also makes him avoid all appear- 
ances of evil doing. 

It was the absence of vanity in the Nazarene's 
soul and the presence of pride in His own integ- 
rity, that made Him say: "get thee behind me, 
Satan," when His lower animal mind suggested 
that He fall from His exalted position, as teacher 
and helper of humanity, and become an Emperor 
of the material cities of the world. In former 
lives the subjective mind of the Nazarene had 
transmuted that basic emotion, vanity of per- 
sonality, into the gold of spiritual understand- 
ing and He had no vanity. 

The emotion falsely called National Pride, on 
close examination, proves to be National Vanity 
founded upon the self-reliance and self -apprecia- 
tion of the individuals who compose that nation. 
At the present status of humanity, National 



VANITY 165 

Pride is an effervescent dream since there is not 
one nation upon earth that has reached a point, 
in its evolvement, where all the individuals who 
compose it are honorable with each other and with 
all other peoples. 

It is vanity that makes the head of a nation 
insist upon forcing his personal opinions and 
desires upon his people, because he thinks he 
knows what is best for them. He is a walking 
vanity bag filled with political cosmetics which he 
wishes to use to cover his own political defects 
and the political defects of his colleagues. 

According to the standard of morality held 
to by the Occultist, it must be a New Nation born 
in the coming New Day, that will be able to 
justly claim a National Pride, since each of the 
nations of the past and present has been an ex- 
ample of, as Solomon said, " vanity and vexation 
of spirit.' ' 



CHAPTER NINE 

DEATH AND AFTER 

" Death, in itself is nothing; but we fear 
To be, we know not what, we know not where.'* 

Perhaps the oldest question that lips of man have 
uttered, as he gazed at his beloved dead, was, 
< < After death, what!" 

This must have been the question that first 
differentiated the thinking man from the animal 
man, and from the animal. It is rather a sad 
commentary upon the people of the Occident that 
they, who have been so successful, in all the 
realms of science, art and literature, should still 
be asking this same question in the twentieth 
century. For, death must come to almost all, 
since physical immortality is an iridescent dream, 
and there are few Elijahs. 

The occidental nations feel a horror and a 
dread of death ; due chiefly to two reasons. First, 
because of ignorance concerning its nature — for 
their attention has been directed more particu- 
larly toward the objective world, since their 
sciences lie along objective lines, and their quests 
are for material things. Second, because of the 
surviving influence of mediaeval Church theology. 

166 



DEATH AND AFTER 167 

The priests, from the fourth century until the 
Reformation, were mainly ignorant men. It is 
true they knew more than the men they taught, 
yet, no one can truthfully say that the priesthood, 
as a whole, was enlightened. It used the com- 
mon abhorrence of death, for the purpose of 
throwing into clear perspective what it con- 
sidered the chief events in the history of the 
founder of its religion. 

It was not so much the life of the Nazarene, or 
His teachings, but it was His death and resur- 
rection, which the Church emphasized. Because 
the priesthood thought their Master had demon- 
strated over death, He was supposed to have 
reached the acme of power that could be mani- 
fested in a physical body. They sought, there- 
fore, to glorify Him, as well as to teach, alle- 
gorically, that because of His victory, He could 
save others from physical and spiritual death. 

The emphasis of death also strengthened the 
power of the mediaeval Church. If the founder 
could not only triumph over physical death, but 
could also save humanity from spiritual death, 
then those who posed as His vicegerents upon 
earth, must have the power, either by petition, 
or by direct authority from their Leader, to save 
men from the consequences of their sins. 

It was by working upon the credulous minds of 
the ignorant masses, during mediaeval times, that 
death, which was horrible enough, was made 



168 FRAGMENTS OF TRUTH 

more horrible by the gloomy manner in which it 
was portrayed. 

There always has been, there is and there al- 
ways will be, an enormous mass of evidence to 
answer the question, " After death, what?" 
The trouble has been that men have not given 
the same degree of attention, of thought, of 
study, or of research in that direction as they 
would give to taking a journey to an unknown 
land. Before starting on such a trip they would 
look up the history of the country they were go- 
ing to visit, seek the advice of those who were 
acquainted with it, and attempt to gather all 
possible information concerning it. But when it 
comes to the momentous question of " After 
death, what?" little time, little close attention, 
little systematic thought has been given to the 
subject. 

The Oriental Nations, while they have degen- 
erated along national lines, and are backward in 
the acceptance of modern science and the mechani- 
cal conveniences of modern life, yet they have 
preserved their ancient traditions relative to 
things subjective, and, therefore, have the accu- 
mulated knowledge, gained from the past, as 
well as the testimony of their Sages. 

The Brahmins and the Parsis tell us now, as 
they have said for ages, that, after the physical 
body is abandoned, the ego persists in another 
state of matter— lives in a subjective world— » 



DEATH AND AFTER 169 

and there remains until it is ready, onee more, 
to reincarnate into earth life. 

Christianity is the direct heir of Judaism and 
took many of its teachings from the Nazarene. 
Those teachings were colored by the theology 
and the preconceptions of His Jewish followers 
who transmitted, orally, to their successors the 
teachings as they understood them. But, on the 
question of death, later Christianity seems to 1 
have completely ignored the traditions and the 
doctrines of the Hebrews and the miracles 
ascribed to their prophets. 

At the time of Jesus there were, in Palestine, 
three sects; the Essenes, who were the esoteric 
portion of the Jews, numbering about 5,000. 
They practised occult rites and had knowledge of 
the existence and condition of the ego after it 
excarnated, or left its physical body, until it 
returned again to earth. 

The two larger sects were the Pharisees and 
the Sadducees; the first believing in the persist- 
ence of consciousness after death, the other be- 
lieving in annihilation. And, notwithstanding 
that two, out of three, of the great religious cults 
of Judaism had this knowledge, it is surprising 
that so little has been preserved in the Christian 
theology relative to the ego after the death of 
the body. 

Besides the philosophy of the Essenes and the 
theology of the Pharisees, the Christians had all 



170 FRAGMENTS OF TRUTH 

the history of the Jewish prophets to draw upon 
and that certainly was not silent as to the post- 
mortem states of existence. 

There were the miracles of Elijah. It will be 
remembered that he raised the widow's son from 
death, which he could not have done unless he 
had been conscious of the existence of the ego, 
in its subjective state. Elisha raised the son of 
the Shunammite woman from the dead and re- 
stored him to the weeping mother. Then there 
was the story of Saul and Samuel. It was 
the custom, among certain of the Hebrews, to 
practice necromancy, that is to say, communi- 
cation with the dead. This practice had proven 
rather disastrous to those who had indulged 
in it, and a law had been enacted prohibiting 
it. And yet^ Saul, when lie was doubtful 
about the outcome of the battle he was about 
to engage in, went to a medium and, through 
her, called back the soul of Samuel to ask what 
would be the outcome of the morrow— violating 
the very law he had promulgated. All of which 
shows that there was a knowledge among the 
Hebrews of the persistence of the soul after 
it had detached itself from the physical body; 
and that, under certain conditions, it was pos- 
sible to establish communication between the 
living and the so-called dead. 

The Buddhists have taught for twenty-four 
hundred years, and still teach, the same old,.doc- 



DEATH AND AFTER 171 

trines of the esotericists — the oldest in the 
world — that man enters earth life for a brief 
period of years, and then, passing, has a sub- 
jective existence which lasts for, relatively, the 
same length of time, or longer; after which he 
again returns to earth to take up the lessons he 
had formerly failed to learn. 

The Chinese know that after the passing of the 
ego, from the physical body, it persists for a 
certain length of time; and ancestral worship 
grew up in consequence of this knowledge. Con- 
scious communication is often held among the 
Chinese between the living and the so-called 
dead, to whom they offer food in order that its 
essences may be absorbed into the permanent 
soul body of the departed one. 

The Greeks and Eomans knew of the persist- 
ency of the human soul after it had left the 
physical body, and, therefore, death had no ter- 
rors for them. When the Greek mother and the 
Greek wife said to her beloved son, or husband, 
"Go forth and either return with your shield, 
or upon it," she had no fear in her heart, for 
she knew there was an indestructible something 
within that physical body, that blade, fire or man 
could not injure. 

The Greek and Roman literature contain many 
references to the "Land of Shades," or to where 
the departed go, after the physical body ceases 
to breathe. In the early Christian teachings 



172 FRAGMENTS OF TRUTH 

some scant knowledge along this line was re- 
tained. The doctrine was that there existed a 
hazy, beatific place, called Heaven, where some 
souls went; and there was also a more specific 
place for the damned, and between the two lay 
Purgatory. 

Yet, notwithstanding all this mass of evidence, 
from the past, death still has its terror for many 
souls. But the occidental, modern nations have 
not been without an abundance of evidence of 
the fact that the soul does persist after the disso- 
lution of the physical body. No matter what 
people may have lacked in theological training 
along this line, they know, by repeated experi- 
ences, that when many persons are dying, espe- 
cially in old age, or after a lingering illness, they 
claim to see, around them, other members of their 
family, or friends, who have passed on before. 
It would be a strange and an illogical explana- 
tion of this constantly occurring phenomenon to 
say it was an hallucination that sometimes comes 
with physical dissolution. Unless there is some 
satisfactory, scientific explanation given us, to 
the contrary, we must accept this enormous mass 
of evidence. 

Since the middle of the nineteenth century, a 
little more attention has been given to this serious 
matter by thinking people; and there have been 
communications established in various ways with 
intelligences who were supposed to be departed 



DEATH* AND AFTER 173 

friends. There have been so many cases in 
which these experiments have been stripped of 
conscious, or of unconscious, fraud that no ra- 
tional mind, who has investigated the subject, can 
fail to be convinced of the persistency of the in- 
dividuality after physical death, and that com- 
munication can be established between the living 
and the dead. 

Many men who, at first, scoffed at the so-called 
unscientific methods and deductions of the Spirit- 
ualists, inaugurated what they called Societies 
for Psychical Research, investigated the same 
class of phenomena that the Spiritualists had 
previously done and arrived at the same conclu- 
sions. 

In Prof. F. W. H. Myers' book, " Human 
Personality and Its Survival of Bodily Death," 
(1903) we have a mass of sifted evidence and 
valuable data gathered during his thirty years 
of personal study and experience in this field. 
As Secretary of the Psychical Research Society, 
his opportunity for investigation and observation 
was exceptionally broad and favorable. 

There is also a fair amount of literature, on 
this subject, written since 1874, that would in- 
terest and perhaps enlighten a seeker after truth, 
who would give the necessary time to its perusal. 

Throughout all time, in the Occident as well as 
in the Orient, there is the testimony of many 
occultists, clairvoyants and mystics corroborat- 



174 FRAGMENTS OF TRUTH 

ing the religious teachings of the world and recent 
scientific investigations. All mystics reiterate 
the same truth, namely, that there is no death; 
that so-called death is merely a change of condi- 
tion, a shifting of the consciousness from the 
objective plane to the subjective. For example: 
Examine the writings of Swedenborg, the mystic, 
who has covered this ground quite thoroughly by 
tracing the ego to many of the inner planes of 
being. Again, the most eminent Spiritualist of 
them all, Andrew Jackson Davis, describes, in his 
works, the passing of the human consciousness 
from plane to plane and its persistency, at least 
for a time. 

It should not be claimed, however, that because 
the personality persists for a time after the dis- 
solution of the physical body, that that, in itself, 
is necessarily a proof of immortality; because 
there may be subsequent causes in the post- 
mortem life of the ego, as will be seen later, that 
renders its immortality a matter to be gained, 
rather than to exist per se. 

Birth and death, therefore, are but two doors, 
the one through which the ego enters into objec- 
tive life, the other through which it passes back 
into subjective life from which it came. The 
exit caused the ego no pain. It is merely a nor- 
mal condition of shifting consciousness. On this 
point, at least, Occultism and medical science 
happily agree. It is true that in sickness, in 



DEATH AND AFTER 175 

accident, or in many abnormal conditions there 
is apparent pain. There may be contortions of 
the physical body and other ostensible signs of 
suffering, and yet, we have no evidence that the 
ego, itself, suffers in the transition, any more 
than we have evidence that the snake suffers 
pain when it wriggles for half an hour, or longer, 
after its head is severed. The contortions are 
purely a matter of reflex, muscular action, and 
death, itself, is painless in its passing, except 
for the fear it may engender in the mind of the 
ignorant, exca mating man, 

The experience of death is natural and un- 
avoidable; and, therefore, it is something not to 
be dreaded. It is like sleep, which is the cessa- 
tion of the body from normal, physical action — 
the withdrawal of the ego from the body. Dur- 
ing dreamless sleep, the ego slips out of the 
body and stands beside it — and death is an identi- 
cal process. All clairvoyants, all mystics, all 
students of the Occult agree upon that point. 
The ego slips out of the physical body precisely 
as the locust slips from its covering, the snake 
from its skin, the butterfly from its chrysalis, 
the chick from its shell, all equally without pain. 

In sleep the ego voluntarily, leaves its body in 
order to rest it. While in the body, each thought 
of the ego causes certain physical reflexes; first 
in the brain and afterwards in other parts of the 
body. With each mental and physical action, 



176 FRAGMENTS OF TRUTH 

there are emitted from the mind and body certain 
atoms. This depletion soon shows upon the 
physical, causing more or less exhaustion. When 
the ego temporarily leaves its body, as in sleep, 
the physical no longer suffers such depletion be- 
cause it largely ceases to throw off atoms and 
draws back, into itself, magnetism from its ego. 
In death the ego is forced out of its vehicle be- 
cause the vibrations of the body become so low, 
through some extrinsic cause, that the ego can no 
longer control, or re-enter, it. This vital subject 
of vibration has been dealt with in a separate 
chapter. 

The question logically arises, "What is it that 
escapes? What is this ego that is referred to?" 

According to the Occult view, man is mind — a 
composite entity. It is two consciousnesses, the 
subjective and the objective blended into one sub- 
stance; and thus combined, has its own form. 
The statement that mind is substance is not to be 
understood as meaning that it is of the same 
coarse substance as a table. There are many 
grades of matter, such as earth, water, air, and 
ether, and yet they are all substance, but the 
mind of man is of an etheric substance. It has 
been shown, by repeated experiments, in hypno- 
tism, that one of the consciousnesses or minds of 
man could be made to sleep while the other re- 
mained awake, thus demonstrating that man's 
mind is dual, and that he is a substantial some- 



DEATH AND AFTER 177 

thing. In appearance man's mind is merely an 
etheric counterpart of his body; therefore he 
is as easily recognized when out of his body as 
when in it, having the same peculiarities and 
characteristics. 

There are a great many exoteric and semi- 
esoteric teachings, in the Western World, at the 
present time, relative to a very complex, inner 
man. Some schools of philosophy take the po- 
sition that man is a comppsite entity of four- 
teen different principles, while others follow the 
Buddhistic theory that he is a septennate, or a 
seven-fold entity. The readers of modern litera- 
ture would imagine that each of the alleged as- 
pects is a separate entity and that all are rolled 
into one form. There is no evidence for accept- 
ing any of these views. When these teachings 
were promulgated, about 1875, there was no phi- 
losophy, in the Occident, regarding the nature of 
man, and no knowledge regarding his soul; it 
was not known whether the ego was something 
tangible, or intangible, or whether it had a form 
or a color. When, therefore, it became neces- 
sary to give the Western World something of true 
psychology, that is to say, a knowledge of the 
existence of the soul and its constituent parts and 
powers, it was presented according to the semi- 
esoteric truths of the Orient. 

Those half truths did a tremendous amount of 
good. They helped students to grasp the fact 



178 FRAGMENTS OF TRUTH 

that the real man is an actuality and not an 
intangible something; that he is an entity within 
the physical body. And this old thought — to 
some, "New Thought" — is helpful if not carried 
to metaphysical absurdities, or accepted as the 
final truth. It cannot be said that the physical 
body is a septennate, nor a double septennate, and 
yet, there are the fluidic portions, the muscles, the 
bones, etc., and these could be separated into cer- 
tain divisions and again be sub-divided. Thus 
the aspects of the body could be multiplied but 
should not be called elements, or principles, for 
none of them can exist in a body without the 
others. And this is equally true of the psychic 
man : for the soul of man is not a bundle of con- 
glomerate entities, or principles, consolidated 
into one, but is of one substance, and of one 
form, with dual separable consciousness. Saint 
Paul's division of man is the esoteric fact; Spirit 
(Subjective Mind), Soul (Objective Mind), and 
Body. 

No ego passes permanently out of its physical 
body without being greeted by some of its friends 
on the subjective side, unless it had such a re- 
pellent personality as to have alienated all its 
associates and friends. 

Those who have passed beyond, know of men's 
ignorance and dread of the great change, and do 
all within their power to make the advent into 
that, as yet, generally unknown country, as pleas- 



DEATH AND AFTER 179 

ant as possible — as on returning from a foreign 
shore, one is met at the ship by family and 
friends. 

With an undeveloped ego, or in sudden death, 
the shock of the separation of the metaphysical 
from the physical — of soul from body — acts as a 
repercussion upon the ego in such a way as to 
daze it. It is then like a person, who has lived 
for many years in the country, coming to the 
metropolis. He moves about in a bewildered 
way ; everything is so different from the country, 
he does not know whether he is awake or dream- 
ing. This dazed condition of the excarnated ego 
soon passes away, however/ and it may be safely 
stated, as a general fact, except with undeveloped 
egos, that a man is usually conscious at his own 
funeral. But in slow death or in old age, or where 
there has been a long period of illness, or in the 
case of a highly developed ego, the dissolution is 
gradual and the soul passes consciously from its 
physical body to the subjective plane. 

And then, " After death, what!" 

It has been said that there is a silver cord 
which connects the soul and the body after death. 
This statement is substantially correct but re- 
quires amplifications to make it intelligible. The 
ego, when it seeks to reincarnate, must, through 
its desire for a body, project a part of itself, 
through such desire, into the mother. This pro- 
jected, magnetic portion becomes a vortex into 



180 FRAGMENTS OF TRUTH 

which are drawn the physical particles from the 
mother's blood to gradually build the embryonic 
body. 

The process of dissolution is on the same gen- 
eral plan. When the ego, through death, aban- 
dons its vehicle it leaves a magnetic portion 
of itself within the body which holds the physical 
particles together. The magnetism, thus left, is 
that which was originally projected to form the 
matrix of the body; that portion which all 
through life was the personal center of gravity 
and held the body together as a composite mass. 

And because this magnetism continues, after 
death, to hold the body together, for a time, the 
ego is bound, by the magnetism, to its decompos- 
ing body, and this bond is the "silver cord." 
To the eyes of a clairvoyant, it appears as a 
silvery, blue thread, in the developed man, and 
hence its name. 

Because of this magnetic attachment, an un- 
developed ego is unable to go very far from its 
dead body ; and even a developed one is limited in 
its range. But, as the constant stretching of a 
rubber band destroys its elasticity, so the strug- 
gle and desire of the ego, for freedom, destroys 
its magnetic matrix and in time disintegrates the 
physical body and liberates the soul. 

It is because of the post-mortem limitation of 
locomotion, that Occultists claim that cremation 
is the proper mode of disposing of the physical 



DEATH AND AFTER 181 

body; for, by cremation, the magnetism within 
the body is released within an hour, and the ego 
is able to reabsorb its magnetism. But, if the 
ego has to wait for years to be released, it is de- 
layed on its way to rest in the higher, inner 
planes— providing it is sufficiently developed to 
enter them. For this reason sometimes a strong, 
but impatient ego, during the latter part of the 
dissolution of its body, breaks its magnetic cord 
and gains its liberty, at the price of losing the 
abandoned magnetism, and then a long time and 
great effort are required to recover the equiva- 
lent of its loss. 

If nations, calling themselves Christian, will 
insist upon burying their dead, they assuredly 
should not embalm the bodies and take the care 
they do to preserve them; but, on the contrary, 
should use soft wood, or wicker caskets and thus 
not retard Nature in her kindly work of liberat- 
ing souls. In course of time, sometimes months 
and sometimes years, the tethered ego reabsorbs 
most of its magnetism and then can go where it 
wills, or where its development carries it. 

The liberated ego — if developed — finds itself 
in a position on the subjective side of life, where 
it is conscious of seven planes of existence. Be- 
low, lies the material earth, which may be said 
to be the starting-point. These planes inter- 
penetrate each other and yet are separate. The 
earth and the first subjective plane may best be 



182 FRAGMENTS OF, TRUTH 

illustrated by the crude figure of a sponge in a 
bucket of water. The water touching the surface 
of the sponge — representing the astral world — 
is separate and distinct from the sponge — repre- 
senting the earth — and yet, partially occupies 
the same relative space as the sponge; because, 
while it is true, as a law of physics, that two 
bodies of equal density cannot occupy the same 
place at the same time, yet it is also true that 
physical bodies of different densities can at the 
same time occupy the same relative space. For 
example: take seven different sizes of shot; first 
fill a bottle with the largest, then with smaller 
and still smaller shot until you have the seven 
different grades all occupying that bottle at the 
same time. Each smaller-sized shot fits into the 
interstices between the next larger and all oc- 
cupy relatively the same general space. Or to 
return to the first simile; there is water within 
the sponge and there is air within the water and 
there is ether within the air, and yet they all 
occupy the same general space but are of differ- 
ent density. So it is in the six inner worlds of 
being; they are worlds within worlds, but are 
of different gradations, each composed of dif- 
ferent forms of matter. 

Taking these in regular order the first is the 
earth plane. The second is the purgatorial 
plane, sometimes called, by modern mystics, the 
astral plane. Then there are two hells and 



DEATH AND AFTER 183 

three heavens. A brief sketch of these may- 
prove as interesting as a guide-book. 

The purgatorial world interpenetrates the 
outer crust of our world, as the soul interpene- 
trates the body; and extends outward into space 
about a mile. It is invisible to most people, but 
is apparent to the clairvoyant. In many respects 
it is similar to the earth plane, having its moun- 
tains and its valleys, its uplands and lowlands — 
all as material to the excarnated ego as were the 
physical woodlands and the pasture during its 
late earth life. 

Here, as elsewhere, the law of gravity prevails, 
and consequently the egos are drawn to the dif- 
ferent strata of that plane, according to their 
vibrations — as persons on earth live at different 
altitudes. On each stratum there is the oppor- 
tunity for selection of abodes and many egos are 
attracted to those portions of the astral plane 
which interpenetrate the material cities of the 
earth and, even in such cities, the egos are again, 
by their desires, drawn to thos.e sections which 
most attract them. 

All egos, in purgatory, are not equally unde- 
veloped; but, among the least developed, are 
those who are but semi-conscious on that plane. 
They appear but half awake and drift together 
in large crowds. By psychic currents, with no 
volition, they are swept from one part of that 
plane to another, as leaves are driven by the 



184 FRAGMENTS OF TRUTH 

wind. Interspersed among the egos are minds 
of animals, each seeking their natural lairs. The 
more developed egos on that plane are conscious 
of the physical plane as well as of their own, as 
a man on a cliff can see all that occurs around, 
as well as below him. 

A man's nature is not changed by death, con- 
sequently, thinking egos, in purgatory, seek, as 
nearly as possible, to carry out, on the astral 
plane, the vocations, or avocations, of their late 
earth lives. The business man still goes to his 
office, or store, each day and tries to influence, 
mentally, those who are conducting his business. 
The broker and the banker are generally at their 
recent offices long before their former employees 
appear. The manual laborer can always, for a 
time, be found around his former place of em- 
ployment gazing at those who toil and sweat, and 
frequently imagines himself in heaven — until 
earthly desires, unsatisfied, break his content- 
ment. The gluttons are found round kitchens, 
where they may, at least, inhale the aroma of 
cooking food. The wine bibber and the drunkard 
are attracted to saloons and public houses. The 
late patrons of the cabaret frequent their fa- 
vorite places and still ignorantly believe, that 
they are drinking deeply of the waters of life. 
Those who lived for " bread and the circus " 
alone, crowd the theatres and places of amuse- 
ment. The music lover is drawn to recitals and 



DEATH AND AFTER 185 

concerts, or wherever earthly music is played, or 
sung. Habitual actions are more characteristic 
of that plane than are original ones, consequently 
soul progression is the exception rather than the 
rule. Many egos, however, by reason of the 
larger field of observation thus afforded, see 
their former follies and mistakes and resolve in 
their next earth life to avoid their repetition. 
But the vast majority of the denizens of that 
plane, after tiring of vicarious enjoyment, seek 
once more to incarnate on earth in order to 
gratify their senses — hence history, from age to 
age, records human-animal nature substantially 
the same. 

This first inner world is also where the In- 
dian's " Happy Hunting Ground' ' is located. 
When he is liberated from his physical body, he 
naturally seeks his old habitat and goes to the 
forest where he finds the mental forms of ani- 
mals, as real to him on that plane as the 
physical body was to him on this plane. This 
astral plane is the Eoman and the Grecian "Land 
of Shades," where their departed went immedi- 
ately upon their demise. Because the physical 
and purgatorial planes are so closely associated 
together, strong entities, dwelling upon the latter, 
are enabled to produce certain psychical phe- 
nomena on this plane. The majority of mankind 
never go beyond this animal, or purgatorial, 
plane, because their desires are largely objective. 



/ 



186 FRAGMENTS OF TRUTH 

The law of gravity holds the ego to that plane 
of being corresponding to its own rate of vibra- 
tion. The ego is something; and, being some- 
thing, it has form and color, or a rate of vibra- 
tion of its own. The lower the rate of vibration, 
the denser is the ego; the denser the ego, the 
stronger is the pull of gravity upon it. There is 
not one law for the plane of physics and an- 
other for metaphysics, but the same laws of na- 
ture operate on all planes. Therefore, if a man 
is animal in his nature, objective in his habit of 
thought and expression, thinks of material mat- 
ters only, if his thoughts are degraded, or de- 
based, he must necessarily lower his own rate of 
vibration until he is confined to the world of his 
unconscious selection — until he is drawn once 
more by his desires into physical life. 

If a person is a degenerate, if he is devolving 
instead of evolving, if his specific gravity is 
so low that when he passes from the physical he 
cannot function upon the inner, first subjective 
plane, then he is pulled, by the law of gravity, 
into the nether worlds. The first hell is that 
subjective plane which interpenetrates the physi- 
cal world at a depth of about a mile and then 
descends inward. It fills some of the enormous 
caverns within the earth and the old legends of 
the Scandinavians, in regard to it, are fairly 
correct descriptions of that realm. It is dark 
and miserable because it is permeated by the de- 



DEATH AND AFTEK 187 

s tractive thoughts of .men and there is nothing 
to enliven it. 

It was not over the portals of this realm, bnt 
of the succeeding one, that Dante saw the words, 
"Abandon hope all ye who enter here." Many 
egos who descend to the first hell see, through 
suffering, the folly of their former lives and 
strongly desire an opportunity to redeem them- 
selves. Even there such an aspiration, if con- 
tinued, has its effect in raising the vibrations of 
the misguided and repentant soul; and if it 
firmly resolves to put aside its old habits of evil 
thought and determines to rise to higher and 
better things, it can attract the attention of some 
"saviour," or advanced soul, who will descend 
into hell and help the aspiring ego to struggle 
upward to the purgatorial plane, where it can 
await an opportunity to reincarnate for the pur- 
pose of carrying out its resolutions. 

But, if an ego does not so aspire — and the 
majority of them do not— if it continues morose, 
rebellious, vindictive and unrepentant, its 
thoughts continue to lower its vibrations more 
and more until it sinks into still deeper depths, 
into the second hell, where destruction destroys 
itself — for destructive thoughts disintegrate and 
finally annihilate forms. 

But it should never be forgotten that there is 
no angry God who punishes, there is no vindic- 
tive Being who says: "You have broken my 



188 FRAGMENTS OF TRUTH 

laws and therefore you must suffer." But the 
laws of Nature are automatic in their action; 
and each person places himself within their op- 
eration by his thoughts and acts. If a man 
violates the laws of hygiene, or of diet, he is not 
punished by a God, but automatically suffers by 
his own acts, and so it is in the realm of morals 
— for all ethical precepts are based on the laws 
of Nature. 

Men are like the fish in the sea, or aquarium: 
some fish are of denser rates of vibration and 
therefore live deeper in the water; while others 
of a higher rate of vibration swim near the sur- 
face. At enormous ocean depths are found forms 
that die as soon as they are brought into the 
upper waters. 

The law of life is this : man is the creator of 
his own destiny here and hereafter. A state- 
ment of this kind is easy to grasp intellectually 
but is hard to realize. All education in the Occi- 
dent has been for generations to the contrary; 
and now it is generally accepted that the "acci- 
dent of birth," or the "caprice" of Deity — not 
man's own thoughts and acts in a former life — 
places him in his natal environment. It is also 
a race belief that environment and education de- 
termine man's earthly career, though every- 
where, particularly in America, there are abun- 
dant exceptions to this seeming rule. 

It is true that the life of the drifter, the nega- 



DEATH AND AFTER 189 

tive individual and the thoughtless person, is 
largely shaped by environment; but that is be- 
cause they are thoughtless, because they have 
not arrived at the creative point of mental de- 
velopment. In the cases of the many exceptions 
referred to — those who transcend environment — 
there is abundant evidence that man, the thinker, 
is man the creator, and that he shapes his life 
according to his will. Thus, both the rule and 
the exceptions prove the contention of the Oc- 
cultists. 

Nor is the after-death condition the result of 
chance, or of predestination, or of the accept- 
ance of a particular creed ; of masses or of vicari- 
ous atonement: but it is the automatic result 
of personal vibration produced by habitual, self- 
engendered thought. This is as incomprehensible 
to the childish mind, saturated with theology, as 
was the problem to the little girl of how Jesus 
could be a Jew, when His Father — God— was a 
Presbyterian, like herself. 

There are three Heavens. Above the purga- 
torial realm there is a finer form of matter; and 
as the ego is liberated from its physical body, if 
its thoughts have been pure, if its aspirations 
great, if its life was mental rather than purely 
physical, then, by the law of specific gravity, it 
rises to the first of the higher, inner planes called 
the first Heaven. That place, to it, is physical, 
which is to say, it is as material to the ego upon 



190 FRAGMENTS OF TRUTH 

that plane as this earth was to it, while in the 
physical body. There it rests, amuses itself and 
meets its friends and associates. It is a beau- 
tiful abode, the "Summer Land" of the Spirit- 
ualists, if you choose; and there the ego can 
meditate upon the past and plan for the future; 
or, if so disposed, may continue its mental work 
commenced upon earth. 

If the ego has aspired still higher, if it has 
advanced to a greater state of knowledge, if it 
has made its vibrations intensely rapid, then it 
is drawn to the second Heaven, transcendant in 
glory, where all is harmony and the vibrations 
of the place itself are musical. It is a place of 
rest and not of effort, where the choice souls, who 
are the higher products of evolution, rest until 
they are willing to incarnate once more upon earth 
for the purpose of perfecting themselves, or of 
helping humanity; There also are those who 
have exhausted all the possibilities of earthly ex- 
periences and now await the opportunity to pass 
on to the next, or fifth, planet of our evolutionary 
chain. 

Beyond the second Heaven is the one which is 
spoken of, in all the Scriptures of the world, as 
the highest Heaven, the abode of the Celestials. 
There it is that the triumphant ego rests forever 
and forever. It is the Nirvana of the East, it is 
the old orthodox Heaven of the West. But, once 
an ego enters that realm, which it has won by 



DEATH AND AFTER 191 

reason of its efforts, it never returns to earth. 
There its consciousness gradually fades away, 
and it becomes one with the Absolute. "The dew- 
drop slips into the shining sea." Individuality 
and immortality are consciously surrendered. 

Reward, like punishment, is self-earned, and 
when once the ego has developed to the point of 
intelligent selection — foreseeing accurately the 
full extent of its decision, then it must choose 
whether to rest for a time in the second Heaven, 
or to enter the abode of the Blest— the highest 
Heaven — and have the door of evolution close 
upon it forever. 

There are some egos who become weary with 
the struggle of evolution and prefer a few cen- 
turies of ecstatic bliss to eons of effort; and 
these, yielding to the high vibrations of the ut- 
most Heaven, finally respond to and become a 
part of the Divine Harmony until they, "like 
harp strings are broken asunder by music they 
throb to express." But those who desire to 
progress, those who feel within themselves the 
power to grow from man to Saint, from Saint 
to Angel, from Angel to Archangel, to Cherubim 
and Seraphim7to Elohim and finally to Sun Gods, 
those are They who take up the Cross of Evolu- 
tion upon other planets, forever mounting higher 
as They grow in strength and wisdom, until 
Omnipotence and Omniscience is reached, and 
They become a part of the Celestial Hierarchy. 



CHAPTER TEN 

RECIPROCITY 

When the Nazarene said; "With what measure ye 
mete it shall be measured to you again/' He was 
giving, to His disciples, a lesson in the operation 
of the Law of Reciprocity; which is but one of 
the many aspects of Cause and Effect. And, 
while it is true that this great Law has been in 
operation since time began, its power and execu- 
tion have been known to but a comparatively few 
individuals on this earth. 

All the great Avatars have taught, to their im- 
mediate pupils, or followers, something about the 
operation of this Law; and its various aspects 
have been called by various names at different 
times. Some of these aspects have been dimly 
perceived and partially understood, by certain in- 
dividuals who were mentally and spiritually de- 
veloped in advance of their fellows; but that it 
has never been fully accepted and applied to the 
lives of men and women, in everyday life, is shown 
by the sad experiences and the suffering of man- 
kind today. 

Looking backward upon the human race as far 
as Occult history shows, it is seen that, since man 
was man, Cause and Effect have been operating, 

192 



RECIPROCITY 193 

with him and with all other created things; and 
yet, for thousands of years man knew no more 
about that great Law, than he knew about the 
electrical currents that surrounded him, and which 
produced the wonderful phenomena at which he 
marvelled, and of which he was afraid. And, when 
ages had passed and men began to understand 
something about some of the aspects of this Law, 
their first thoughts were to protect themselves 
against its operation by finding a way to escape 
from it. And the various and varied excuses men 
have made for themselves, and the childish de- 
ceptions they have practised to enable them to do 
as they desired and escape from the consequences 
of their doings, would be pathetic if they were not 
so funny. 

The Scripture says : ' ' And God created man out 
of the dust of the ground and in His own image ; 
in the image of God created He him; male and 
female created He them." 

The Occultist would add: "When the Gods 
created the subjective minds of men out of the 
Cosmic Currents — which were as negative to Them 
as is the dust of the ground to man — and when 
the Gods had individualized men into shapes some- 
thing like their own, the only resemblance men 
bore to their Creators were their figures, since all 
were ovoids, and there the likenesses ended. 

The creation of the Sons of God, or subjective 
minds of men, was a volitional act of the Gods, 



194 FRAGMENTS OP TRUTH 

as is now the production of the human bodies of 
children a volitional act of men ; and the Sons of 
God then, knew no more about their origin, or of 
their relationship to the Universe, than the new- 
born infant of today knows about its parents, 
or of its environment. 

In its beginning, a Son of God was what it was 
from no volition of its own. It was created be- 
cause the Universal Consciousness desired to ex- 
press Itself in forms. But now, after all the ages 
have passed, a Son of God is what he is, and where 
he is, because of his experiences in previous phys- 
ical forms of expression; what he will do and 
be, depends entirely upon his desires and his 
acts. 

"When the Sons of God were first created they 
were imbued with but one desire and that was to 
exist. To exist and to continue to exist, was their 
first and original incentive — and this was God- 
given. The desire to exist was and is, to a Son 
of God what the mainspring is to a timepiece. It 
keeps him going. 

The Scripture says : " And the Lord God formed 
man of the dust of the ground and breathed into 
his nostrils the breath of life and man became a 
living soul." 

The Occultist says : When the Gods created the 
subjective minds of men the process of creation 
was different from that of the creation of the 
animal minds and bodies — a description pf which 



RECIPROCITY 195 

Has been given in another Chapter ; that the Gods 
moulded their Sons out of the manifesting par- 
ticles of the Universal Consciousness and each 
Creative God used, of His own magnetic force, a 
sufficient amount to hold those manifesting 
particles together in the forms that He had 
created. 

In the Scriptures the magnetic force, implanted 
within those ovoid forms, was referred to as the 
" breath of life," and by some writers, has been 
described as "the waters of life." But to the 
Occultist, it is known as a magnetic, God-given 
force to subjective man or mind, on the morning 
of his creation. And so it was that men became 
the Sons of the God who gave of His own life force 
to each Son that He created. 

To exist, or to be, was and is man's paramount 
desire, since all his other desires are subservient 
to it, and have been acquired since he came upon 
this earth to live. The second desire man ac- 
quired, after he was given, for his abiding place, 
the freedom of this world, was to possess material 
things. He thought he saw an advantage to be 
gained, by acquiring individual possessions; and, 
having forgotten any knowledge he may have had 
of mental, or of spiritual qualities, his next strong- 
est desire was to gain material wealth. 

Through the gratification of his desire to ac- 
quire, without reciprocating, a great selfishness 
was born in man and soon he degenerated, from an 



196 FEAGMENTS OF TRUTH 

innocent, negative, trusting individual into a con- 
scienceless robber of other men ; and then the Law 
of Cause and Effect began to operate more force- 
fully with him. 

To his surprise, he found that when he had 
robbed and beaten other men, less powerful than 
himself, some one took from him the things he 
had acquired; and that others did to him as he 
had done to others. And, after thousands of years 
had passed, and man had become a self-supporting 
individual, he came to understand that there was 
also an invisible power that could rob and destroy 
him. When, in the darkness of the night, he felt 
the earth trembling and quaking beneath him, or 
when he found himself powerless to save his pos- 
sessions from destruction by floods, or cyclones, at 
first he was bewildered and confused and then, a 
great fear was born to him. 

That there was an invisible power greater than 
himself man was forced to realize and to protect 
himself against that power, and continue with his 
transgressions, became his third desire. 

Because primitive men were more evil than 
good, to destroy gave them more pleasure than to 
construct ; and when the Law of Cause and Effect 
began operating forcefully, with them, its destruc- 
tive aspect predominated in its operations until, 
like hunted animals, men fled before, and tried 
to hide from, its tremendous power. And when 
men found that the same terrific, invisible force 



RECIPROCITY 197 

followed and punished them, in spite of all their 
efforts to escape, they began making plans to 
either cheat, or propitiate it. 

They knew how to cheat each other, and they 
also knew that when they could not cheat they 
could sometimes propitiate, by dividing their ill- 
gotten gains with another; and so they reasoned 
that whatever destroyed man and his possessions 
was his enemy and must be fought, or bargained 
with; and, since it was impossible to fight an in- 
visible power, it must be propitiated. And thus 
it was, with the hope of making his escape from 
suffering the consequences of his acts, that prim- 
itive man conceived the plan of making sacrifices 
to God. 

It was not because they loved the destructive 
force, which they called God, that made men hold 
their sacrificial carnivals ; and it was not because 
of their love for that invisible power that made 
them sing flattering praises and shout deceitful 
hosannas and hallelujahs to God; but it was the 
fear of taking the consequences of their acts that 
actuated them in all their so-called religious cere- 
monies. 

It was black fear, and not perfect love, that first 
made men build tabernacles and temples and hire 
priests to help with the mockeries and lies that for 
centuries were called religious worship. And it is 
the same spirit of fear and unhonesty bequeathed 
to their posterity that make men of the present day 



198 FRAGMENTS OF TRUTH 

continue with the pomp and display and all tHe 
artificial ceremonies of the Churches. 

What may have sometime been unhonest in the 
ancestral mode of worship, has now become ac- 
tually dishonest at the present day ; and it is upon 
this rock of dishonesty that the ships of Church 
and State are foundering. Individually, most men 
began to learn their first lessons in religious dis- 
honesty when they knelt at their mothers' knee 
and, folding their baby hands and bowing their 
little heads, were taught to say: "0 God, please 
save me from the sins I have committed today, 
and this I ask for Jesus' sake." 

Fully and honestly interpreted, that request, or 
prayer, meant in the baby's mind and also to the 
mother who had taught it to the child : ' ' God, 
please remove all the unpleasant consequences of 
my bad behavior today, and let me escape from 
the punishment that I deserve; and please let 
Jesus, my older brother, bear the disgrace and 
shame — if there are any — which I have earned and 
which really belong to me. And this I ask because 
I am too selfish to take the consequences of my 
own bad behavior." 

Or, if the child said the little prayer so familiar 
to every one: "Now I lay me down to sleep; 
I pray the Lord my soul to keep ; If I should die 
before I wake, I pray the Lord my soul to take." 
In its heart the child meant when it said that 
mantram: "Now I am going to sleep and shall be 



RECIPROCITY 199 

unable to take care of myself. If I should not 
waken again in this world I wish to escape the 
place prepared for bad children and I want to go 
to Heaven where, regardless of my sins, I can stay 
forever and forever with God and His holy 
Angels. ' ' 

And somehow the child and its mother believed 
that its dishonesty would not be discovered by 
Deity ; and that it might not get what it deserved, 
and the prayer would be granted. 

And so it was that children began each in- 
carnation with an unhonest attempt to get what, 
by actual right, was not theirs ; and to try to de- 
ceive God, was one of the first lessons they 
learned. 

Think of how much needless suffering mankind 
has had to endure because of the fallacies that 
have been, and are being, taught by the Churches. 
What different lives men and women would have 
lived had they been told the truth by their priests. 
How much further on, in their evolvement, men 
would now be if they had not been lulled into a 
false security by their so-called religious leaders. 
And is it anything to wonder at, for those individ- 
uals who have begun to think independently 
for themselves, that those great edifices called 
Churches and Cathedrals, are being destroyed — 
with their baptismal fonts and their glittering, 
jewel bedecked altars, their wonderful paintings 
of imaginary Saints and Madonnas? 






200 FRAGMENTS OF TRUTH 

Is it not true that they were all built upon false 
foundations and that every cornerstone was laid 
in deception? And is it not a fact that the priests, 
who promise a protection they know they have not 
the power to give, are deceiving the people who 
contribute to their support and to the building of 
those huge monuments of deception? 

It has been almost two thousand years since the 
first religious society was organized in the great 
evolutionary cycle that is now coming to a close. 
It has been more than fifteen hundred years since 
the Nicene Council assorted and arranged, accord- 
ing to the liking of the few bigoted, dishonest men 
that composed that Council, the so-called religious 
records of that time. Because the publication of 
some of those records would have made it impos- 
sible for the Pope, the Bishops and the priests to 
conceal the truths contained in them, that Council 
of dishonest men destroyed what they did not wish 
the people to know ; and they also eliminated from 
many of the manuscripts, which they did compile, 
such excerpts as did not agree with their plans 
for the "New Church of Christianity. ' ' 

And they not only eliminated but they inter- 
polated many things which were not in the original 
text. And thus they gave to the world, for its 
religious guide, a book with falsified records and 
ecclesiastical errors. And so it was that for 
fifteen hundred years Churchianity, instead of 
Christianity, has been fed to the world and men 



RECIPROCITY 201 

have been taught to believe that it was through 
the auspices of a Church, or of a priest, they could 
escape the consequences of their acts. 

But now the earth is coming into another and 
a more rarefied atmosphere in the heavens. And 
there will be as great a difference between the old 
and the new astral influences surrounding the 
earth as there is between a day overshadowed by a 
leaden sky and one brightened by glorious sun- 
light. 

Under this higher, more rarefied astral influence 
all old forms of religious worship and dishonest 
affairs of State, which have deceived and op- 
pressed mankind, will be swept away until, as the 
Nazarene said to His disciples, "Verily I say unto 
you, there shall not be left one stone upon another 
that shall not be thrown down." 

And when His disciples asked Him to explain 
His assertions, He said: "Take heed that no man 
deceive you. For many shall come in my name and 
shall deceive many ; and ye shall hear of wars and 
of rumors of wars; but see that ye are not 
troubled for all these things must come to pass, 
but the end is not yet. For nation shall rise 
against nation and kingdom against kingdom and 
there shall be famines and pestilences and earth- 
quakes in divers places. All these are but the 
beginning of sorrows. 

"And there shall be many offended and shall 
betray one another, and many false prophets shall 



202 FRAGMENTS OF TRUTH 

arise and deceive many. And because iniquity- 
shall abound, the love of many shall wax cold. 
But, he that endureth to the end, the same shall be 
saved." 

And here again did the Nazarene teach His dis- 
ciples how effect would follow the causes that 
would be set into motion during this cycle, which 
was then only in its beginning. And shall men and 
women of today close their eyes and go stupidly 
blundering on in the footsteps of their forebears, 
hoping and believing, as they did, that they will 
escape the consequences of their acts? 

Or, will they come to a realization of the fact 
that in the coming New Day no man can get what 
he has not earned, and that he cannot earn what 
he will not get 1 

In man's desire to possess the things that were 
not his he has brought himself into the present 
chaotic condition from which he must extricate 
himself. 

The next great struggle for which mankind must 
prepare, will be for an adjustment of business rela- 
tions between the serving class and the employers. 
National wars will soon be ended, for the re- 
mainder of the time men will live upon this planet ; 
and all bitterness between men must be eliminated 
before future spiritual progress can be made. 

Reciprocity must be the law by which all wrongs 
and misunderstandings will be adjusted and the 
so-called upper classes who have not shown a spirit 



RECIPROCITY 203 

of reciprocity, toward those who served them, 
must learn the lesson that they can no longer get 
something for nothing but must pay, in full, the 
value of what they receive. 

And the laborer must learn that he must give 
full value in service for the remuneration he asks. 
For the time is here, now, when men have arrived 
at a point in their evolvement where justice must 
be done and all old wrongs must be righted before 
the earth, with its load of struggling, suffering 
humanity, can pass out of this old cycle and enter 
the new one. There will be a house-cleaning time 
for old Mother Earth, and she is going to leave 
behind her, in space, all the old mental and phys- 
ical dust and debris that have been accumulating 
upon her during the past ages. 

In the New Day, justice, truth and honesty will 
be the ruling principles which will govern men and 
women. Greed and lust for possessions, or for 
aggrandizement, will be unknown. 

This Arcadian condition of society will continue 
upon this earth for many years, but only those 
whose lives are governed by the Law of Reciproc- 
ity will live to enjoy the new conditions. In the 
new era commercial paper will not be circulated 
among people, in the place of money. No one will 
live upon future prospects that may never be 
realized. 

In those days there will be no transactions of 
high finance; and the true standing of each in- 



204 FRAGMENTS OF TRUTH 

dividual will be known as what lie has earned and 
actually possesses. Gold and silver will be the 
medium of trade, and, should there be banknotes 
left they will be recognized as relics of a dishonest, 
degenerate age. 

The faro wheels, the dice boxes and all the in- 
struments now used in games of chance will then 
be looked upon with wonderment, forgotten by 
those who suffered from their uses in this un- 
developed age. In that wonderful New Day the 
printing presses will print the truth and there will 
be no subsidized press, or privileged class, to ex- 
ploit an unprivileged class. Speculation will not 
then be known and should an individual misrepre- 
sent the value of a thing he sells he will become 
an outcast from society. 

Governments will own the banks, and all the 
public utilities, and will administer public affairs 
without prejudice, or preferment ; and reciprocity 
among all the people will be the accepted law 
governing all functions and transactions. 



CHAPTEE ELEVEN 

THE SPIRITUAL. RENAISSANCE OF THE NINETEENTH 
CENTURY 

There were less than two hundred years left to 
the Piscine Age when the nineteenth century 
commenced. And, according to historical prec- 
edents, in other cycles, the religion of the world 
was decadent at such a time. The Hindoo gods 
were dead. Allah and Mohammed were so de- 
crepit that even a "holy war" could not be con- 
jured in their names. Jehovah had lost, through 
heterodoxy and atheism, most of His followers and 
was tolerated by the faithful, only, when He did 
not interfere with business. Christianity was 
merely formal and had disintegrated into almost 
as many sects as there were days in the year. Its 
Trinity of Gods were moribund, and were scarcely 
ever mentioned in polite society, politics, or on 
the stage. The Holy Ghost had almost faded into 
the circumambient atmosphere from whence It 
came. The Father had not been deprived of His 
"Great White Throne' ' in space, but was not per- 
mitted, in any way, to interfere with the affairs of 
the World, or with the plans of His children. 

The Son had a formal following who, for a few 
hours each week, paid, with flattery, the obligation 

205 



206 FRAGMENTS OF TRUTH 

they were supposed to owe Him by reason of His 
alleged sacrifice. All the foregoing conditions ap- 
plied to the general mass of men; but it is true 
that each of the religions had a few followers who 
were trying to grasp the spiritual significance of 
their respective faiths and to live the life. It is 
also true that each of the religious beliefs had some 
fanatical adherents of their theology and mythol- 
ogy, who were willing to die for their faith, but not 
to live it. 

During the closing days of each Zodiacal Cycle, 
or at the commencement of a new one, some great 
religious Teacher comes to the world to awaken 
spirituality; and in each Century of the Cycle the 
movement is continued by lesser Occultists. At 
the close of one Solar Cycle, or in the beginning 
of another, some great Messiah, Saviour, or 
Avatar, descends to Earth and incarnates to give 
a religious impetus to the New Age. And, at this 
juncture of history, it happens that a Solar and 
a Zodiacal cycle are jointly closing, as was fore- 
told by the Nazarene Occultist, at the beginning of 
this Piscine Period, when, at the importunity of 
His disciples, he described "the consummation of 
the Age." 

Because of the materialism of the nineteenth 
century, a superhuman effort had to be made to 
awaken any spirituality. The Occultists were, of 
themselves, unable to cope with the situation, and 
a Master of Occultism, therefore, had to initiate 



SPIRITUAL RENAISSANCE 207 

the work; and once more the world was blessed 
with the physical presence of a God, who incar- 
nated in the nineteenth century instead of at the 
beginning of the Aquarian Age. 

It is not altogether complimentary to the in- 
tuition of many students of religion, that they 
were unable to recognize that Avatar, nor the 
scope of His work, and that they are still looking 
forward for a Messiah to come in the next century. 
History strangely repeats itself. Two thousand 
years ago the human race was looking for a 
Messiah-King and failed to recognize the Messiah- 
Teacher. The few of this age, who are interested 
in the subject, are looking for a Messiah-Teacher, 
and fail to realize the Messianic Message and 
Movement. 

The Aquarian Teacher, who hastened His com- 
ing to the nineteenth century, did not intend, 
through His personality and powers, to impress 
the masses and to be worshipped by them. His 
purpose was not to start a new religion — since the 
world was already afflicted by too many; but his 
object was to destroy all old religious forms in 
order that the spirit of each, " which giveth light," 
might shine forth once again as a unified eso- 
tericism. 

By reason of His effort, all old religious forms 
are disintegrating and, in a short time, will have 
passed away. For the first thousand years of the 
Aquarian Age there will be no temples and no 



208 FRAGMENTS OF TRUTH 

priests; but each man will find his own way to 
God, through self -discipline and by the study of 
ancient but perennial truths. After that time, pos- 
sibly, history may repeat itself and the greed and 
ambition of a few, combined with the intellectual 
laziness and indifference of the many, may again 
create a priesthood and a new mythology. 

The Aquarian Teacher worked through various 
channels, and planted the seed in many soils. 
Some of His activities may be discussed but others 
must remain undisclosed, until revealed by the 
blossom and the fruit, in the fulness of time. His 
aids were the same, in the main, as were used in 
all previous periods — students of Occultism. Some 
were conscious aids, while others were only 
partially conscious ones ; and still others were un- 
conscious assistants. His work commenced about 
the middle of the nineteenth century and He laid 
down His body Sunday June 24, 1900. By this 
it is not meant that He ceased, at that time, to 
work for humanity, because His efforts continued, 
on the inner planes of being, for a number of 
years thereafter, and will be continued, with the 
more progressive of the race, for some time to 
come. 

Nothing that has been said in reference to this 
great Soul must be taken as implying, in any way, 
that the Nazarene Teacher will not fulfil His 
promise and return at the close of this Cycle. 
Having given His unqualified promise, He will 



SPIRITUAL RENAISSANCE 209 

necessarily keep it. But, while He will come, in 
the last days of this fast closing Age, in individual 
power and great glory, it does not mean that He 
will come in the manner selected by many of His 
ardent but mistaken followers. Nor will He come 
to judge the living and the dead; that being the 
respective duties of two of the Planetary Spirits — 
the Gods of Compensation. But the Nazarene will 
appear to those who have understood His teach- 
ings and have kept the faith. 

In the middle of the nineteenth century atheism 
and agnosticism were characteristics of the edu- 
cated class ; and scepticism, which could not recon- 
cile the precepts and the practices of their supe- 
riors, was characteristic of the serving class. 
Spiritism was commencing its recrudescence with 
the psychic manifestations of the Fox sisters. It 
was apparent to all Occultists, who had conferred 
with the Great Teacher, that enormous possibil- 
ities lay within the new phenomena; and some 
Occultists volunteered to stand behind that move- 
ment and to perform some of the astounding mani- 
festations which later attracted the curiosity of 
the world. 

It was uphill work for the volunteers, and not 
at all pleasant, because of the character of many 
of the mediums who had to be utilized. But, in all 
previous history, phenomena had first awakened 
the curiosity of some men and later had engaged 
their interest or intelligence. It was not a time 



210 FRAGMENTS OF TRUTH 

to consider the character of the means to be em- 
ployed, so much as to use any and all available 
means, since the spiritual existence of humanity 
was at stake. 

At first, the materialists denied the existence of 
the phenomena, but when they had grown to such 
momentous proportions as to quell denial, then 
the materialists contended that the phenomena 
were produced by fraud — and, for a time, the world 
accepted this explanation. Churchianity both ridi- 
culed and anathematized the movement, because it 
threatened the existence of the Church, for, if it 
could be established that, after death, good and 
bad men existed, in astral forms within the photo- 
sphere of the world, then what became of Heaven 
and Hell and the doctrine of the Atonement! 

Without these basic, theological doctrines the 
Church could not exist. But, love was stronger 
than dogma and many brave men and women per- 
sisted in investigating Spiritism, and the number 
of investigators increased until, finally, Spiritual- 
istic Societies were established throughout the 
civilized world. Later some scientists, who were 
not imbued with crass materialism of the dominant 
German school, undertook to investigate Spiritism. 

During the second decade of the nineteenth 
century, science began to attack the dogmas of 
the Church and slowly doubt commenced to cor- 
rode creeds. The investigation of psychism, by 
scientists, gave a standing to the phenomena which 



SPIRITUAL RENAISSANCE 211 

they formerly lacked and many members of the 
Church were converted into thinkers. So large 
and respectable, in the eyes of the world, did 
Spiritism become, that societies, for psychical re- 
search, were established among all nations, not 
entirely dominated by the Church. The Occultists 
continued their work along these lines until the 
movement gained such impetus as to disintegrate 
dogma in the minds of millions of men. 

There were other Occultists, who had specialized 
in philosophy rather than magic, and, under the 
Great Teacher, became active in other directions. 
Some of these sought to reawaken an interest in 
philosophy and psychology, two subjects of which 
the world was densely ignorant. Philosophy had 
become the unpractical realm in which a few 
dreamers dwelt, much to the amusement, or con- 
tempt, of their contemporaries. Psychology was 
barely kept alive, in small classes in the colleges, 
and there it was studied rather as the abnormal 
functioning of mind than of mind itself, with its 
powers and potentialities. Philosophy and psy- 
chology were both considered, by the ignorant 
world — even of letters — as " impracticable, ' ' and 
a stamp of that kind was conclusive in an age of 
materialism. But, among the more progressive 
philosophic students of the century, was one Dr. 
Quimby who was conducting classes in Berkeleyan 
philosophy ; and among his pupils were a number 
of strong egos. This was a center that was quickly 



212 FEAGMENTS OF TRUTH 

utilized, by the evolutionary powers, through 
which to stimulate the study of applied phi- 
losophy, especially in its relation to practical life. 
Truth is always colored by the medium through 
which it manifests. Being a physician, and a 
child of the age in which he lived, Dr. Quimby 
naturally sought to make his philosophy practical, 
particularly along the line of his profession. 

The basis of Berkeley's philosophy is that no 
object can be known except under the form which 
sense perception gives it. This of course Berkeley 
derived, as a conclusion, from Locke who attacked 
a materialism which sought to "make a self- 
existent, stupid, unthinking, substance the root 
and origin of all being.' ' Traced back step by 
step, through a distinct line of philosophers, it 
finally reaches its source in a perverted, or one- 
sided, view of the idealism of Socrates. 

Quimby 's contribution to the world was the ap- 
plication of Berkeley's philosophy to the curing of 
disease. If no object can be known except under 
the form which sense perception gives it, then, 
urged Quimby, by inhibiting sense perception of 
disease it is destroyed. Many of Quimby 's pupils 
enthusiastically accepted this half truth, as truth, 
and through mental suggestion put it into prac- 
tical application. 

Neither Quimby nor his disciples seemed to have 
grasped the philosophic truth which the Occultists 
were trying to impress upon them, that know- 



SPIRITUAL RENAISSANCE 213 

ledge is the result of the interaction of two factors, 
subject and object — though these may be, in them- 
selves, two aspects of primordial essence. And 
that if there is subject and object then inhibition 
of sense perception of disease only destroys a 
"knowledge of," or a " belief in," disease and not 
the disease itself — as has been demonstrated in 
many thousands of cases among the religionists 
of Quimby 's applied philosophy. 

One of Quimby 's pupils started the Christian 
Science movement and perverted the philosophic 
statement of Berkeley, and the semi-philosophic, 
but illogical conclusion of Quimby, to the falla- 
cious dogma that "there is no matter" — no phi- 
losophic "object." 

This unphilosophic principle was duly heralded 
as the "discovery," by the founder of the move- 
ment, of a new truth, which, to a student of the 
idealism and of the nihilism found in many of the 
sacred books of the East, was as amusing as the 
discovery by a schoolboy of the multiplication 
table. 

Other students of Dr. Quimby founded the New 
Thought movement which adhered more closely 
to the Berkeleyan philosophy. Both movements 
specialized in mental healing and gained, and con- 
tinue to gain, about the same number of adherents, 
for both utilize the time-honored principle of at- 
tracting and convincing the mass through phe- 
nomena. 



214 FRAGMENTS OF TRUTH 

Both movements drew largely from the Church 
and made a distinct step upward for those who 
joined the new schools of thought. When New 
Thought was well under way, Prentice Mulford 
was fortunate enough to meet with, and study 
under, a French Occultist. Mulford embodied the 
Occult Philosophy, as he understood it, in six 
volumes entitled " Your Forces and How to Use 
Them." These books made a profound impres- 
sion upon the students of New Thought, broaden- 
ing their views and showing them that their New 
Thought was but a part of the oldest philosophy 
extant — Occultism. 

Many students of Christian Science became dis- 
satisfied with the limitations of their Church, and 
left it to start other mental , movements along 
broader lines. All these progressive thought 
schools and churches contributed their share 
toward awakening in man a consciousness of his 
divine nature and toward teaching him his actual 
and potential, mental and spiritual powers. These 
schools caused a reaction on Churchianity and 
awakened, in it, a knowledge that men were fast 
outgrowing the worn-out dogmas founded upon, or 
embodied, in the Nicene Creed. 

When the three described movements were well 
under way, or about the last quarter of the nine- 
teenth century, a fourth effort was made by other 
Occultists, under the Great Teacher, to enlighten 
humanity by destroying the crude creeds of all the 



SPIRITUAL RENAISSANCE 215 

old religions — commencing with the dominant one 
of the Occident. The exoteric head of this fourth 
movement was Madam H. P. Blavatsky, and the 
esoteric powers were the Occultists assigned to 
work both behind and in that society. The first 
worker behind the scenes was that brilliant Oc- 
cidental Occultist, whose portrait was poorly 
painted by a member of the Society, and was after- 
ward photographed for the benefit of some of the 
esoteric members. This worker was known by a 
number of names, but was, in point of fact, the ego 
formerly known as Cagliostro. To him had been 
entrusted the preliminary, esoteric education of 
Madam Blavatsky and the outlining of the Society 
she was to establish. Later, two Oriental Occul- 
tists known as "M." and "K.H." took charge of 
directing the work through the Madam; and 
finally, in the last days of her life, a new teacher 
wa,s assigned her — an Occultist called "H.P.B." 
or "B," to distinguish him from his medium, 
the) Madam. He was, in point of fact, Jacob 
Boehme — in a former incarnation. 

The object of these diversified teachers was to 
attract to the movement associates and followers 
of former lives and persons of various races and 
castes, and of many mental differences. For the 
primal purpose of that organization was to estab- 
lish a Universal Brotherhood, in the only way it 
could be done, namely, by studying Aryan and 
other Eastern literatures, religions and sciences ; 



216 FRAGMENTS OF TRUTH 

and by showing that, at heart, all religions and 
most sciences are one in essence — Esotericism, or 
Occultism. 

Another announced object of the Theosophical 
Society, which the new movement was called, was 
to investigate unexplained Laws of Nature and 
the psychical powers latent in man. According to 
time-honored tradition, this object was accen- 
tuated in the beginning of the Society and the 
production of psychic phenomena outclassed, in 
every way, that produced in the other movements. 
Naturally, this attracted many people, first, 
through curiosity, and later, by reason of mental 
conviction. This Society never acquired the large 
membership of many of the other organizations, 
but, nevertheless, did as great a work. Through 
its activities, some knowledge of a religious phi- 
losophy was inculcated into the Occident, which, 
prior to that time, was devoid of any. This phi- 
losophy of esotericism had to be given out spar- 
ingly, at first, and the early literature of the 
Society was as much destructive to the preten- 
sions of the old religions and sciences, as it was 
constructive in unfolding a knowledge of the old 
philosophy. Later, an esoteric, or inner group, 
was formed within the Society, in which some of 
the teachings were given in a more exact manner 
than was taught the public. 

After Madam Blavatsky's death the Mother 
Society first divided into two rival organizations 



SPIRITUAL RENAISSANCE 217 

and later, from these, arose many others — as 
Madam Blavatsky foretold would be the case. The 
Mother Organization had to do the pioneer work, 
the later societies and schools exhibited different 
progressive phases of that work. The fact that 
the Mother Society, and its children, jealously 
spend more time in criticizing each other than in 
attempting to form a nucleus of Universal 
Brotherhood, should be attributed to human 
frailty and not to a lack of merit in the purpose of 
each organization. 

As the human ego lives, occupying many suc- 
cessive bodies, so does truth manifest in many 
vehicles. It is evident, to any one who will care- 
fully analyze the organizations mentioned, that no 
single movement does more than express a phase 
of Occultism. For example: 

Spiritism reveals the psychical power latent in 
man. Christian Science and New Thought the 
mental powers, while Theosophy presents an 
aspect of the ancient philosophy. Each movement 
has appealed, as it was intended it should, to that 
class of minds interested in the respective sub- 
jects. No one movement could have, at the time, 
attracted the students of the other movements be- 
cause of the dissimilarity in mental character- 
istics. 

There are basically two classes of minds in the 
world. The contemplative, or rational, and the ac- 
tive or intuitional. In their undeveloped states, 



218 FRAGMENTS OF TRUTH 

each is tenacious of its original tendencies, "but, as 
they evolve, each complements its deficiency by 
acquiring something of the nature of its opposite. 
It was natural, therefore, that Theosophy, or the 
philosophic movement, should attract the contem- 
plative man while Christian Science appealed to 
the practical mind by a display of the force aspects 
of the ego; and that New Thought should be a 
step toward harmonizing the two elements. And 
in contradistinction to these mental movements 
stands the psychic. 

It was also natural, at the present stage of 
evolution, that gratitude and loyalty to a teacher 
for bringing a student out of dogma into light 
should have made fanatics of many undeveloped 
members of each group ; and that, in consequence, 
1 l all truth ' ' should be claimed by the members of 
each organization. But, as the organizers of each 
movement passed away, a greater tolerance grew 
up and the interaction will, in time, not only 
broaden and enlighten the respective followers of 
each aspect of truth, but unitedly will influence 
the outside world. 

The thinking world has, already, been greatly 
helped by the teachings of each group; and it is 
not in membership but in influence that the im- 
portance of a movement should be measured. 
Millions of egos have, through private study, been 
helped by the literature, which has been issued, 
during the last half century, by the various 



SPIRITUAL RENAISSANCE 219 

aspects of progressive thought. The mental re- 
action is seen even in the churches which have 
been compelled to abandon or suppress some of 
their dogmas. 

The object of the Great Teacher, in stimulating 
each of the foregoing movements, was the same ; to 
bring about a spiritual renaissance, and not to 
perpetuate new churches, or cults. With the con- 
clusion of the present cycle, these organizations, 
like those of all religions, will pass away; but the 
truths presented by them will, unitedly, enlighten 
unborn generations. 

It is thought, not forms, that persists. For this 
reason, perhaps, the greatest work done under the 
Teacher was seemingly unorganized. Many Oc- 
cultists were delegated to collect, translate and 
publish, the works of ancient and mediaeval eso- 
tericists. There was no old Occidental Occultist, 
whose teachings could aid in the renaissance, who 
was overlooked, and all the sacred books of the 
East became the property of the world. 

Other modern esotericists were requested to 
supplement all that had been done with such com- 
plementary writings as would harmonize and com- 
plete the whole. Thus has some of the work of 
the New Master been publicly done, so as to ad- 
minister to the needs of present humanity and to 
prepare the spiritual food for the quickly ap- 
proaching Aquarian Age. 



CHAPTEE TWELVE 

THE ESOTERIC CHRIST 

Less than sixty years ago, Abraham Lincoln was 
one of the most bitterly assailed men in the United 
States. The papers were teeming with abuse of 
him, although he was trying to serve the people 
according to his light. And then occurred his 
tragic death, and, with it, came a revulsion in the 
feelings of the people of the country towards him ; 
for a martyr is frequently the hero of a future 
myth. And, with the revulsion of public senti- 
ment, those who had despised Mr. Lincoln began 
to study his character more carefully and to weigh, 
more nicely, his services to the republic; and, as 
they understood him better, they began to ap- 
preciate him. 

As time went on the faults of the man were 
forgotten and his virtues alone were remembered ; 
still later, he was praised and glorified until at 
present, he has almost reached, in the minds of 
many, the position of a demi-god. Eecently a 
Grand Army of the Eepublic man, when asked 
what his religion was, replied, "My religion is 
Abraham Lincoln.' ' 

This character, because so recently alive, is used 
to illustrate the mythopeic tendency of the human 

220 



THE ESOTERIC CHRIST 221 

mind which is exemplified throughout history. 
And if this myth-making tendency manifests so 
strongly, about a recent political character, in a 
sceptic age of reporters and the public press, what 
may be expected in the case of religious leaders 
in a remote, credulous age where there were no 
reporters or press? 

Not only is the human mind mythopeic but it is 
very limited in its scope of myth-making, repeat- 
ing the same stories age after age, merely apply- 
ing them to different characters, as the same 
names are repeatedly given to different cities and 
streets, or the same legends told about different 
localities. 

Some time ago a book was published in which 
was collected, substantially, the same historical 
myths which had been applied, in turn, to all of 
the leading religious teachers of the past — the 
book was entitled "The Ten Crucified Saviours 
of the World.' > 

As some workmen destroy an old, useless build- 
ing to erect a better one on its site, so do some 
iconoclasts destroy beliefs, only to regenerate them 
on a higher plane, modelling their acts after those 
of the Hindoo God Siva. 

The mythical Jesus Christ has served His pur- 
pose and has now ceased to be a potent factor in 
the lives of even those who formally worship Him. 
Why, then, continue the myth any longer ! 

May not the mystical Jesus, when understood, 



222 FRAGMENTS OF TRUTH 

become a power in the evolution of the mass as He 
has been in the lives of many Occultists in the 
past and in the present? 

It is with that hope that this Chapter of Occult 
history is written. The Church records say that 
a little less than two thousand years ago, in 
Bethlehem was born a Saviour of the world. 
Prior to His birth, angels appeared to His 
mother Mary, telling her that she would bring 
forth a Saviour — just as they had appeared a 
short time before to Elizabeth, revealing to her 
that she would bear a sacred ego ; and as they had 
appeared to the mother of Buddha, saying that 
her issue would redeem the world; and to the 
mother of Krishna, to whom the same message was 
given. 

These Celestial Visitors, to Mary, are compat- 
ible with the Occult records, for, when a great 
Soul is to be born it is customary to warn the 
mother to use all precautions, mental and physical, 
to give as perfect a vehicle to the incarnating ego 
as is possible. 

But the further message, as narrated by the 
usually published texts of the gospels, according 
to Matthew and Luke, that a virgin should bear 
a son, is not corroborated by the other two gospels 
and is distinctly contradicted by the oldest text, 
now extant, of Matthew (Mt. Sinai Text, A.D. 
350-400), which in verse xxi says that the angel 
told Joseph that Mary should "bear thee a son," 



THE ESOTERIC CHRIST 223 

and in verse xxv, "He (Joseph) married his wife 
and she bore him a son and he called his name 
Jesus." 

It was at this point that the unskilful myth- 
makers commenced their work, in order to make 
Jesus a unique character in history. The Occult 
records state that Joseph married Mary and she 
bore him a son and they named him Joshua, which 
in Hebrew means a Saviour. 

The name Jesus Christ is the translation of the 
Greek text, Issus Christus (formerly Christos), 
meaning the anointed Saviour, or prophet, or in 
mystical language, the Initiate. Throughout this 
Chapter, His popular name will be used to avoid 
confusion. 

It should be remembered, in this connection, 
that the Occult records were prepared by the Magi 
who attended His birth, while the imperfect 
records of the Church were not compiled until over 
three centuries after His alleged death. 

It should be further remembered that the gos- 
pels were not written by the disciples of Jesus but 
were prepared centuries later by remote disciples 
of disciples who gave the traditional versions, 
" according to," the respective teachings of the 
four so-called evangelists, as the unknown writers 
had received them from their predecessors. 

Think of the necessary inaccuracies which would 
have crept into a history that had been handed 
down, by word of mouth, for twelve generations, 



224 FRAGMENTS OF TRUTH 

and covering over three centuries. Think of one's 
experience in having one's story repeated, by a 
few friends, and coming back almost unrecogniz- 
able after a few days, or weeks, and then judge 
what it would have been if repeated for centuries. 

It is no wonder that there has never been an 
agreement in the Church as to the cardinal facts 
in the life, the words, or the teachings of Jesus. 
Dissensions arose in the first century and con- 
tinue to multiply to the present day. These dis- 
agreements have led to many intentional falsifica- 
tions of text, and of history, in the past, by par- 
tisan priests, as has been shown elsewhere. 

The Church has even failed to agree upon the 
date of the birth of the Saviour. The dates given 
by the earliest writers are January 6th, March 
25th, March 28th, April 19th or 20th, May 20th 
and November 17th. The date now celebrated, 
December 25th, informed Churchmen unite in say- 
ing, is incorrect. 

The first feast of the Church was that of the 
Epiphany, and in the beginning, about A.D. 190, 
was movable; but, finally, January 6th was 
settled upon as the time for its celebration. The 
baptism, and not the birth or the crucifixion, of 
Jesus was regarded by the early Church Fathers 
as the great event in His life. For baptism was 
the mystical acceptance of the probationer into the 
fold of the select — a more or less public recog- 
nition of the candidate's ordination. It was at 



THE ESOTERIC CHRIST 225 

the baptism, that the Spirit of God descended like 
a dove and made the candidate over into a purified 
messenger, or oracle (Chrestes), of God. It was 
then that Jesus became the Chrestes, or Christ, in 
the judgment of His early followers. 

When the later members of the Church desired a 
second feast day, to celebrate the birth of the 
Saviour, they first settled upon January 6th, mak- 
ing the Epiphany cover both events. Not yet had 
the myth-makers built up the theological doctrine 
of the crucifixion and the redemption. 

But the early Christians found that their feast 
day, of January 6th, followed too closely the uni- 
versal feast day of December 25th, in Northern 
latitudes. The 25th day of December had been 
celebrated by all nations and peoples during the 
Arine Age. The Pagan feast was astronomical, 
and was addressed to the Gods to send the sun 
again to the world to give it light and life; and 
the early Christians, seeing, as they thought, a 
parallel between the feasts of the Sun of God and 
the Son of God, moved their Christmas of January 
6th back, in the calendar, to December 25th, and 
celebrated it at the same date as the Pagans, and 
a little later, A.D. 534, that day was judicially 
declared the birthday. 

The Occult records show that Jesus was born 
September 21st B.C. 4 — Julian Calendar; the ap- 
parent discrepancy is due to the changes made by 
that calendar in reckoning time. 



226 FRAGMENTS OF TRUTH 

As less enlightened people were drawn into the 
Christian movement, the personality of the 
Saviour began to loom large while His teachings 
became confused. The myth-makers were at work 
and the son of man was rapidly being absorbed 
in the mythical, not mystical, Son of God. 

The parents of Jesus, His brothers and sisters 
and early followers, had not claimed any specific 
deification for Him, but the myth-makers saw to 
it that, by the end of the second century, He was 
pre-eminently the Son of God; and by A.D. 325, 
the Church was divided into two factions: one 
claiming the myth that He was the only begotten 
Son of God, and the other contending that He was 
a created intelligence and a Son of God like all 
good Christians — and was pre-eminent only by 
reason of His development. 

The Occult records disclose that Jesus was the 
product of this planetary system. That, like the 
rest of humanity, He had incarnated many times ; 
but, unlike the majority of mankind, He had 
profited by His experiences — had taken life seri- 
ously, had understood the purpose of His crea- 
tion and incarnations and, therefore, had out- 
stripped His more slowly developing brothers. 

His wonderful progress as an evolving soul did 
not lessen His love for His fellowmen, but, in- 
stead, filled Him with pity for their blindness and 
mistakes. Therefore, in several previous lives, He 
had attempted to do what He could for the people 



THE ESOTERIC CHRIST 227 

of His respective Ages, and, particularly, in the 
incarnation preceding the one as " Jesus,' ' when 
He was known to sacred history as the prophet 
Elisha, which meant, in Hebrew, it is interesting 
to note, "God as a Saviour." 

As Elisha, He did not accomplish all that He 
desired or attempted, and determined to again in- 
carnate as a Jew in order to complete His work. 
He well knew the Messianic traditions and saw 
that, by taking a body from the House of David, 
at that particular juncture of history, He' could 
fulfil many of those traditions. The Arine Cycle 
was closing and a new Teacher had to incarnate 
to revive the ancient truths, and so, He was willing 
to make an oblation of Himself, for the redemp- 
tion — through truth — of the Jewish world. His 
life, and not His death, was His gift to man ; and 
that life was an aid and an inspiration to His 
original, and to all subsequent disciples, and to 
all mystics. 

The Biblical and the Occult records agree as to 
the family in which He incarnated, and that the 
Magi came from the East to attend His birth and 
that they brought with them presents sorely 
needed by the family — for Jesus was born in abject 
poverty. 

The "Wise Men," were members of the same 
Occult Brotherhood to which Jesus had belonged, 
in His previous incarnation, and they sought to 
care for, and protect, Him in His babyhood and 



228 FRAGMENTS OF TRUTH 

later to aid Him in His development, and in His 
work. It was they who aided in the flight to Egypt 
and who assisted in His safe return. 

The public records of His childhood are lacking, 
but the Occult records show that Jesus at an 
early age commenced His studies with the Essenes 
— the esoteric sect of the Hebrews to which His 
parents belonged. His progress was marvellous 
and at the age of twelve He was found debating 
philosophical truths with Rabbis and getting the 
best of the arguments. He was then ready for 
the profounder truths, and, with the consent of 
His parents, was taken by the Magi, at the age 
of fourteen, to a Lodge of Occultists in the Far 
East and there instructed in esoteric Philosophy 
and Sciences and prepared for His mission. 

In His twenty-eighth year He returned home 
and received His public baptism, under John, for, 
without this ceremony, He would have received 
scant attention from the Jews. 

John knew that Jesus was an Initiate and hesi- 
tated to confer the lesser baptism upon Him; but, 
upon the insistence of Jesus, consented. It must 
not be understood that Jesus was a full Initiate 
at that time, for He had only taken the lesser 
degrees of Occultism and had much to overcome, 
in His personal character, before He would be 
prepared to receive the Greater Mysteries. He 
was called both the Son of God and the Son of 
Man, showing His dual nature. He had within 



THE ESOTERIC CHRIST 229 

Himself all the possibilities of Godhood, and the 
actualities of animalhood that all men possess. In 
other words, He was a strong subjective mind, 
possessing a powerful objective mind. 

His was a strong emotional nature, which, in 
His earlier life, He failed to control. Even in His 
public career He was seen at one time weeping 
over Jerusalem, and at another, pouring invec- 
tives against it. Anger swept away His reason 
when He hurled vituperations time and time again 
upon customs, sects and persons. Nor did He 
confine Himself to words, for the Church records 
show Him assaulting those who bartered and sold 
in the Temple. He so lost His temper, that it 
mastered reason, when He found the fig-tree 
barren; and so far forgot His obligations as to 
use His occult powers to destroy the tree for not 
bearing fruit out of season. 

His objective mind was, as every objective mind 
is, difficult to control, tempestuous, animal and 
irritable; and yet, by persistent effort, by con- 
stant humiliation of the flesh, through fasting, by 
prayer, and by concentration of will, He slowly 
dominated, one by one, His lower emotions and 
thus acquired self-control — the control of the emo- 
tional nature by the intellect and will. This is 
not written in disparagement of Jesus, but in 
adoration of His triumph over self and of His 
attainment of Godhood. 

The Occult records further show that when 



230 FRAGMENTS OF TRUTH 

Jesus thought He had conquered His baser nature, 
He was then required to submit to the supreme 
test of self-discipline. No man knows himself 
until he is tried and has proven himself immune 
to temptation. 

There are many smug people who pitilessly con- 
demn a mistake of another, who, if they were 
tempted, would likewise err. They are the nega- 
tively good, or such persons whose souls have 
never been put under pressure. The positively 
good are those who, having first failed under 
temptation, rebuild their characters later, into 
spiritual adamant, as all advanced souls have 
done. 

A man may be moral, poised, a conqueror of the 
brute within himself, and have acquired many of 
the finer attributes of soul, and still be imperfect. 
Once he commences to feel, within himself, the 
creative force of God; once he tastes the 
ecstasy of power, of dominion, of mental creation, 
and, having eaten of the Tree of Knowledge and 
become as a God, then comes his final temptation, 
the allurement to use his forces selfishly. 

He knows he has developed his power, through 
his own exercise of will ; that, through self-effort, 
he has brought himself from the lower planes of 
manhood and has placed himself among the Gods. 
From within, or from without, comes the subtle 
suggestion, '• now that you have, through the slow 
course of ages, brought yourself to your present 



THE ESOTERIC CHRIST 231 

position, why not enjoy the fruit of your labors — 
why not dominate the world ?" 

And so Jesus was taken, "by the Devil,' ' into a 
high mountain and alone fought the final battle 
with himself and the powers of evil — there He 
suffered the final temptation of a developed Soul 
and conquered. 

The Biblical and Occult records both show that 
Jesus was tempted. It was not merely an invita- 
tion, but a temptation. A perfected God could 
not have been tempted; such a Soul, with Its 
triumphs, could have meant nothing to struggling 
humanity, because there could have been no point 
of contact between It and mankind. It would 
have been a useless experiment for the "Only Be- 
gotten Son of God," to have automatically gone 
through certain human experiences, unless it was 
to teach God what man knew, and there is where 
the myth-makers muddle their own misconcep- 
tions. 

But if, as the Occultists claim, Jesus was a com- 
posite of God and man, as all men are, and had 
to pass through all the typical experiences, that 
come in the destiny of man, then His life becomes 
illuminative ; His suffering is man's suffering ; His 
triumphs are man's triumphs, for, what man has 
done, man can do; then He is an inspiration to 
each struggling soul, an elder Brother of the race ; 
then His teachings become vibrant with life and 
power, because based upon His personal know- 



232 FRAGMENTS OF TRUTH 

ledge and experience; and then in actuality, 
does He become "the way, the truth and the 
life." 

After Jesus had proven to Himself and to the 
Brotherhood, from whence He came, that He was 
adamant to temptation, then was He qualified to 
go into the world and redeem it by His teachings 
and His life ; and He took up His work at the age 
of twenty-eight. The Occult records show that 
He taught, as all His predecessors had done, in 
parables, to the people, and esoterically to the 
elect. The ethical truths taught were also the 
same as those given by all the prior prophets. 

The so-called Biblical records are imperfect 
translations committed to writing three centuries 
after Jesus' mission; and, therefore, contain but 
a general outline of His life and teachings, with 
many interpolations by the priesthood, to help out 
theological controversies, or to build myths. 

Perhaps the most unfortunate myth of all, was 
that of the "vicarious atonement,'' which origi- 
nated in the Church about A.D. 150, and which 
practically nullified the entire life and teachings of 
Jesus. This myth was not finally accepted by the 
body of the Church until after the Council of 
Nice (A.D. 325) and was never accepted by the 
mystics within the Church. The vicarious atone- 
ment is so illogical that no adult would tolerate the 
myth, if the story had not been absorbed with the 
mother's milk, and thus had become in thought a 



THE ESOTERIC CHRIST 233 

part of the normal life, like the family's social, 
financial, or political status. 

This myth was the reincarnation of a prior Jew- 
ish myth of a like kind, fathered by other similar 
myths, and born in the night of time. They are 
all due to the human trait of cowardice, or to the 
desire to escape from the consequences of bne's 
own acts. The myths may have originated with 
the first man and the first woman, as narrated in 
Genesis, he seeking to make her responsible for 
his acts while she placed the responsibility upon 
the serpent. There is scarcely any country, at 
any period, that did not adopt vicarious atone- 
ment, in one, or more, forms, as a part of its 
philosophy; for it was the only thing that ap- 
pealed to mankind in the childhood of the race, 
and priesthood always found it profitable to 
pander to this weakness. 

Among the Jews, on the day of the atonement, 
two goats were selected by the priests ; one was 
killed, as a sacrifice, to appease Jehovah, while the 
other, called Azazel, had the sins of the people 
placed upon it and was driven into the wilder- 
ness. It was a convenient and a popular way 
to dispose of the iniquities of the people and far 
more human than the Athenian festival, Thargelia, 
where a man and a woman were both sacrificed 
for the same purpose. All through the Old Testa- 
ment is the thought of vicarious atonement in 
some form. 



234 FRAGMENTS OF TRUTH 

Paul, with his genius for misinterpretation, 
seemed to have tentatively applied this doctrine 
to Jesus. It was a small matter to change the 
scapegoat of the Jews into "the Lamb of God 
which taketh away the sins of the world," and was 
sure to meet with popular acceptance. Other 
Christian writers had written of the At-One- 
ment to be had through the teachings of Jesus, 
but, to Paul, it was the atonement — both thoughts 
derived from Greek words in the Scripture carry- 
ing ve*y different meanings. 

If Churchianity's conception of Jesus be correct, 
how useless and absurd it was for "the only be- 
gotten Son of God," to sacrifice Himself, to Him- 
self, in order to let men do as they pleased and 
escape the consequences. 

Could His death, under these circumstances, be 
a sacrifice? 

What lessons could His life teach either God or 
man under those conditions? What was the ob- 
ject of existence of man and of God? What was 
the compensation for man's living— the pleasure 
of selfishly sinning? What became of Divine Jus- 
tice which is synonymous with Divine Love ? 

The vaunted civilization of the nineteenth cen- 
tury, with all its inequalities, iniquities, ignorance, 
thoughtlessness, cruelties and crudities, will, some 
day, in the not far distant future, be cited as the 
logical fruit of the dogma of vicarious atonement. 
This time-honored device of priesthood did not 



THE ESOTERIC CHRIST 235 

require any specific act upon which to base the 
dogma, as history reveals; but, a combination of 
circumstances in the life of the Nazarene, gave a 
peculiarly apt opportunity to engraft it on to 
Churchianity. 

According to the legend of the Church, which 
was believed by the masses, Jesus was supposed 
to have been crucified under Pilate; and that al- 
leged event was cited by the Church as the obla- 
tion of Jesus to redeem the world from its past, 
present and future sins. 

According to Occult history, the teachings of 
Jesus were revolutionary and not only angered 
the conservative Jews, whose religion He attacked, 
but were subversive of the rule of Eome. The 
secular and sacerdotal powers, therefore, agreed 
that such a disturbing element should be removed 
and charges were brought against Jesus. He did 
not wish to give up His life more than any other 
reformer, as was repeatedly shown by His acts — 
as when He fled to Galilee to save His life, or 
when He made His escape from being stoned, while 
in the temple, or again when He eluded the Jews, 
after the parable of the shepherd, or when He 
went to Ephraim to escape death. But He was 
finally betrayed by Judas and was brought to trial 
and condemned to be crucified. 

Jesus willingly would have suffered the igno- 
minious death of a criminal's crucifixion if a 
good purpose could have been accomplished by it, 



236 FRAGMENTS OF TRUTH 

but as it was, it was an effort to uselessly sacrifice 
a life very important to the world — a man with a 
message. His work was not completed and so, 
while -awaiting the death penalty, He consulted 
with the Magi, or Occultists, from the Far East, 
who ever remained near Him from the moment of 
His birth, how to escape from His enemies. 

The Occult records say that it was arranged 
among the Magi and Jesus that if no other means 
of escape should arise, at an agreed signal, both 
Jesus and the Magi should use their combined 
occult powers to produce a condition which would 
open an avenue of safety for the Nazarene. 

The fatal day finally arrived, for no mitigation 
of the sentence had been secured. The disciples 
of the Nazarene were without influence, as were 
most of His followers, besides, they were ren- 
dered morje impotent by reason of their horror 
and despair at the thought of their Teacher being 
crucified. 

Jesus, with the other condemned prisoners, was 
conducted toward Golgotha, each bearing his own 
cross. During the mournful journey a large num- 
ber of people collected, most of them Jews, who 
had brought about His condemnation and who 
wished to witness the execution. There were also 
some of His disciples and followers who desired 
to thus pay their last homage to Him. 

Just before reaching the place of execution 
Jesus stumbled and fell, as though the weight of 



THE ESOTERIC CHRIST 237 

the cross was too great, and this was the signal 
for the Magi to use their power. Unitedly they 
used Occult forces upon the multitude and a great 
fear fell upon the people. Then the Magi caused 
a cloud of darkness to descend upon the panic- 
stricken mob. The cloud was so dense that, in it, 
no one was recognizable. Then, using another 
Occult force, an earthquake was produced and, in 
terror, the mob fled blindly. Many fainted and 
were trodden upon by others who were fleeing, all 
believing Jehovah had caused the phenomena be- 
cause a prophet had been condemned to death. 
Thunder reverberated, lightning played in the 
clouds and a terrific wind arose, all of which added 
to the confusion and the horror. 

When the disturbance of nature subsided, and 
the guard once more assembled, there were but 
two prisoners, for the Nazarene had disappeared. 
Then a third victim was taken from among the 
few who had been too paralyzed with fright to 
escape, and this man like the other two prisoners 
was a thief. The soldiers, after mutilating the 
faces and bodies of the three criminals until they 
were unrecognizable, crucified them. 

Jesus took refuge in a cave a short distance 
from the scene of the disturbance. His disciples 
did not know what had become of Him and be- 
lieved He had been one of the three who had been 
crucified. 

The narrative of the gospels of the phenomena 



238 FRAGMENTS OF TRUTH 

on the cross, the appearance of the angels, and 
the resurrection of the Nazarene, has no basis in 
fact but was a myth that grew up during the 
three centuries, or more, before the story was 
committed to writing. 

Jesus remained in the cave, where He had hid- 
den Himself, until the night of the second day 
when He ventured forth and appeared to His dis- 
ciples, who had gathered to mourn His loss. 

They were terrified on seeing Him, believing 
Him an apparition, and it was not until each had 
touched His hands and body and kissed His face 
that they were convinced of His physical presence. 

Then He explained to them the facts, under the 
injunction that they should tell no one the true 
conditions, except His own family. He was still 
in great danger of losing His life and returned 
to the cave where He was visited, by the elect, who 
did all in their power to make Him comfortable 
during His enforced sojourn there. 

It was during His stay in the cave that He out- 
lined the future work for each of His disciples; 
for it was agreed upon, by all, that His public 
usefulness was ended and that He could best aid 
the movement from behind the scenes. He bid a 
sad farewell to His friends and disciples and re- 
turned to the monastery, in the East, with the 
Magi. 

From the monastery, Jesus aided in the work 
of the new movement until after the Council of 



THE ESOTERIC CHRIST 239 

Nice. From that time He merely appeared to, 
and aided, the deserving few — for the Church had 
ceased then to be His vehicle. Through His 
knowledge of Alchemy He continued to live and 
to use that physical body for one thousand years, 
remaining at the monastery. Then His body be- 
came so etherealized that He ascended to the sub- 
jective realm — Heaven — to remain there until the 
closing days of this cycle, now so near at hand, 
when He will redeem His promise and return to 
the elect, His real followers. 

That He knew He would have both ostensible 
and real followers at the end of the Piscine Age 
is shown by His words : 

"By their fruits shall ye know them. Not 
every one that saith unto me, Lord, Lord, shall 
enter into the Kingdom of Heaven; but he that 
doeth the will of my Father which is in Heaven. 

"Many will say to me in that day, Lord, Lord, 
have we not prophesied in thy name? and in thy 
name have cast out devils 1 and in thy name have 
done many wonderful works f 

"And then will I profess unto them, I never 
knew you; depart from me, ye that work 
iniquity. ' ' 

So far the mythical Jesus has been contrasted 
with Jesus, the Mystic, but the life of every re- 
ligious reformer must necessarily be a typical one ; 
symbolizing the evolutionary life of man. For 
this reason there is a similarity in the history, and 



240 FRAGMENTS OF TRUTH 

tradition, of all the world's saviours. The life that 
each of them symbolized is that of the Esoteric 
Christ. The Esoteric Christ is the Subjective 
Mind of each man — the Son of God — " very God 
of very God, begotten not made, being of one 
substance with the Father " — the first begotten 
— the primal emanation. 

Each Subjective Mind came from Heaven where 
it was one with God and incarnated as man, in 
man — the Objective Mind. 

The Objective Mind of man is a product of this 
planetary evolution — of the earth, earthy. 
Through the slow stages of many animal incar- 
nations on earth it gradually evolved a better 
brain and body until it stood upon two feet ; then, 
by its own efforts, it could not rise higher in the 
scale of being, and looked to God for a Saviour 
who would redeem it — for, " nature unaided 
fails." 

And God sent a Saviour — a Christus — a Subjec- 
tive Mind to each Objective Mind to raise it up. 
"Know ye not that ye are Sons of God and heirs 
to eternal life?" 

After its incarnation, each Son of God — Subjec- 
tive Mind — is tempted to forget, or forego, its mis- 
sion. It is tempted, by its material vehicle — Ob- 
jective Mind, Satan — to use its force and know- 
ledge to gain "all the Kingdoms of the world 
and the glory of them. ' ' 

But if it is true to its trust, then, by its teach- 



THE ESOTERIC CHRIST 241 

ings, its example, and its patient persistent ef- 
fort, life after life, it spiritualizes the lower, or 
Objective Mind. 

The oldest symbol of humanity is the cross, 
meaning the descent of spirit into matter. It is 
the ' ' crucifixion ' ' of the divine in the material 
for the redemption of the material. 

When the conquest of the self is made — the con- 
quest of the Objective by the Subjective Mind — 
then is the crucifixion over; then is the Son of 
man redeemed and the unified Ego can thenceforth 
manifest the potencies of divinity and is ready to 
"ascend into Heaven' ' — the subjective realm — 
from whence it came. 



CHAPTER THIRTEEN 

INFINITE INTELLIGENCE — GOD 

When this great Period of evolution began, there 
were but two Principles in the Universe. One, 
the Infinite Intelligence, desiring expression, and 
the other, the Infinite, otit of which Infinite In- 
telligence had come. 

Within Infinite Intelligence there were two 
primal, active forces and, both of these were com- 
posed of infinitesimal particles of vibrating force, 
which may now be called atoms. One of these 
forces was constructive and the other was de- 
structive. The atoms composing the constructive 
force rotated from left to right, but the atoms that 
composed the destructive force rotated from right 
to left. 

The force that was to be constructive, during 
this period of evolution, was composed of such 
atoms as had evolved through experiences gained 
in many other evolutionary periods; while the 
destructive force was composed of atoms that had 
not had so many experiences, in other periods, 
were of a lower rate of vibration, and, therefore, 
were of an inferior order. But all the atoms 
which composed the two forces had been ex- 
pressed in forms, before this period, and were now 

242 



INFINITE INTELLIGENCE 243 

again seeking more experiences for further ex- 
pression. 

These two primal forces could be compared with 
two great streams of water passing, in opposite 
directions, through a vast cloud of unresisting, 
motionless vapor, and this vapor may be called 
the unmanifested, Infinite Principle. 

The unmanifested, Infinite Principle is bound- 
less. It never has been expressed in forms, but, 
in the eons to come, it will be expressed, as the 
primal, destructive force needs reinforcement. 

There never was a form made that was posi- 
tively and entirely on the constructive side of 
Nature until the atoms, of which it was composed, 
had previously passed through inharmonious con- 
ditions and had been changed from the destruc- 
tive to the constructive side. And so it is 
that the constructive force is constantly absorbing 
from the destructive force, or current, such atoms, 
or particles, as are ready, by reason of their past, 
unpleasant experiences, as destructionists, to 
change their inharmonious vibrations and begin 
service in the constructive force. And the de- 
structive force, to prevent its diminution, is re- 
inforced by absorbing into itself, from the vast 
cloud of non-resisting negative vapor, a sufficient 
amount of that vapor to enable it to continue its 
work in the evolutionary scheme. 

The natures of the two great primal forces are 
diametrically opposed. The nature of the con- 



244 FRAGMENTS OF TRUTH 

structive force is to attract atoms into forms. The 
nature of the destructive force is to disintegrate 
forms. The first force is positively evolutionary, 
the second force is negatively devolutionary ; and 
each operates, according to its nature, and suc- 
ceeds in its efforts, according to its strength, or 
power. 

And thus Infinite Intelligence is composed of 
two natures, the higher and the lower, the con- 
structive and the destructive, and both are neces- 
sary, in the great evolutionary scheme, since there 
could be no equilibrium in the Universe without 
the operation of each. 

The desire to attract, or to accumulate, is con- 
ducive of harmony in Infinite Intelligence, or 
Mind ; and the desire to disintegrate is productive 
of disharmony. Harmony is happiness and is sup- 
posed to be good, while disharmony is unhappi- 
ness and is believed to be evil, yet both conditions 
are expressed by Infinite Mind and are parts of 
Its nature. 

This brings the conclusion that Infinite Mind, or 
Intelligence, is both good and evil and that It 
began this evolutionary Period with both aspects 
of Its nature in readiness to operate, as occasion 
required. 

There is no waste among atoms composing In- 
finite Intelligence, or Mind, since nothing can 
escape from the Universe. This is because noth- 
ing can get beyond Its attracting force, which 



INFINITE INTELLIGENCE 245 

operates everywhere. Forms may be destroyed, 
and atoms may be dispersed, to remote places, but 
no part of Infinite Mind can be lost. 

There is no way by which Infinite Mind can 
gain experience except through expression of It- 
self in forms; and so the creation of forms was 
the first step of progress in the evolutionary 
scheme of Infinite Intelligence, or Mind. 

Before a form can be destroyed it must first be 
created; and so it seems that, during this period 
of evolution, the constructive, or creative force, of 
Infinite Mind began to operate first, and, putting 
into execution Its attracting, or constructive 
powers, It began to attract some of Its atoms to- 
gether for the purpose of expressing Its thoughts 
in material forms. 

In its beginning, a form is an expression of a 
thought and it may be an old thought in a new 
garb; and so, when Infinite Mind began thinking 
suns and worlds, in the beginning of this period of 
evolution, they had to come into existence, as 
forms, and take their respective places in the 
Universe. 

That those creations were old thoughts in new 
forms must be realized, since they could not have 
sprung into existence, in such numbers and in 
such perfection, unless the thoughts which created 
them had been clothed before in similar garbs. 

Infinite Mind had created cosmic forms in pre- 
vious evolutionary periods and was again repeat- 



246 FRAGMENTS pF TRUTH 

ing Its creations on a larger scale, and with more 
perfect expressions, due to Its knowledge gained 
from past experiences. 

And when each orb had been established, in its 
proper place, in Infinite Intelligence, and, when 
the machinery of cosmos was moving regularly, 
and without friction, then Infinite Mind desired 
further expressions of thought. It desired that 
there should be living, moving, breathing expres- 
sions of Itself. 

It had clothed the hills of Its worlds with ver- 
dure ; and It had decorated the plains and valleys 
with trees and flowers and grasses. Springs of 
cool, delicious water gushed, or trickled, from the 
mountainsides, or sprang from beneath the rocks 
on the plains, or in the valleys. Some of the trees 
and shrubs bore fruit, in their seasons, and the 
Earth brought forth roots and herbs that were 
good for food and medicines. There were fish 
swimming in the seas, and lakes, and rivers, and 
all these were the material expressions of some of 
the thoughts of Infinite Mind that had been eons 
in the process of creation. Each created thing was 
now fulfilling its mission and was obeying the laws 
that Infinite Mind had made for it ; and, still, un- 
satisfied, it wished for more experiences. It de- 
sired that Its thoughts of determination, respon- 
sibility, persistency and strong individuality 
should also be expressed in forms. And then the 
birds and fowl were made, and were imbued with 



INFINITE INTELLIGENCE 247 

the desire to mate and to reproduce their forms, 
and to be, each, responsible, for a season, for the 
welfare of its family. 

After the fowl and the birds, then came the ani- 
mal forms and they also were imbued with all the 
thoughts that Infinite Mind had expressed in birds 
and fowls, and, added to these animal minds, were 
the desires for greater powers of endurance and 
for more physical strength. 

During the ages that passed, while Infinite Mind 
was expressing Itself in the various forms of birds 
and animals, Its destructive force began to mani- 
fest. Different natures were developed, as the 
results of necessity, and of the different experi- 
ences of Infinite Mind. There were new aspects 
of thought which produced different conditions, 
and different modes of living. In Its desire to 
express strong individuality, among the birds and 
animals, the destructive force obsessed the minds 
of some of the creatures, and birds of prey and 
carnivorous beasts were evolved. These crea- 
tures were the direct results of some of the in- 
harmonious thoughts which Infinite Mind some- 
times expressed; for there were the two forces, 
equally active, in Infinite Mind, and each 
force, being a part of It, had to manifest 
in forms. 

And so it was there, in the animal Kingdom, that 
the struggle between the constructive and de- 
structive forces of Infinite Mind began, in this 



248 FRAGMENTS OF TRUTH 

period of evolution, and both forces have been 
manifesting ever since. 

Ages passed while Infinite Mind was working 
in the animal kingdom and then came a time when 
It, still unsatisfied, desired to express Itself in a 
higher form. It desired a form with a better brain 
made of finer, more rapidly vibrating atoms — 
since further possibilities of evolvement had now 
been exhausted in the, then, existing brain of the 
four-footed creatures. 

It must evolve another form that could and 
would respond to higher thoughts than those of 
procreation and of reproduction of itself. This 
new form and brain must not only contain all the 
instincts of the animal, but it must possess more 
than these ; and then a form was made that stood 
upright and walked upon two feet instead of four, 
and Infinite Mind imbued this brain with more 
mind, from Itself, and finite mind, or man, was 
born. With these new forms for Infinite Mind's 
expression, another age began. 

In external appearance, this new creation dif- 
fered very little from many other animal forms. 
It walked upright, when not excited, and, like 
many other animals, was covered with a thick coat 
of coarse dark hair. Its skin also was coarse but 
not so thick as were the skins of some of the other, 
larger animals. Its nose was not so long, and its 
face and head were more expressive of intelli- 
gence. It had hands with fingers and feet with 



INFINITE INTELLIGENCE 249 

toes, instead of claws and hoofs, but its in- 
stincts were animal-like and its disposition 
fierce. 

Constructiveness and destructiveness were both 
manifested in its nature, with the destructive force 
predominant ; and it was of a strong individuality 
possessing prodigious physical strength. Every- 
thing considered, this new form was an advance- 
ment made in the evolvement of an animal form, 
and possessed much greater possibilities. 

With the birth of this new creation began a 
diminution, in size, of other large animal forms; 
and, gradually, the mammoth creatures that had 
roamed this earth began to disappear. This was 
because the creative force, of Infinite Mind, was 
producing more intelligent creatures now; for It 
had learned that, through more forms and brains, 
greater and more valuable experiences were to be 
gained, than through large forms with less brains. 
It had also learned that, to move many smaller 
forms, required less force than to move one large 
one ; and here came the first lesson in economy,, of 
force, for Infinite Mind. 

Infinite Mind had not reached perfection, in all 
Its parts, when It began Its work, on the morn- 
ing of this great Period of evolution; nor has It 
reached perfection yet, nor will It ever reach per- 
fection — so far as can be seen today. For, what 
seemed to be perfection once, is imperfection now ; 
and, so long as Infinite Mind remains unsatisfied, 



250 FRAGMENTS OP TRUTH 

and desires greater and more experiences for ex- 
pression of Itself, there will be no end to Its 
evolvement and Its perfected states will always be 
comparative. 

When Infinite Mind created the human-animal 
form and brain, It bestowed npon it the power to 
think more clearly than had any of Its previous 
creations done. The molecular vibrations of this 
new brain were greater, and its thoughts were pos- 
sible of being more constructive and creative, 
than were those of any other brain. It had a 
finite mind in contradistinction to an animal mind, 
and it became a link in the evolutionary chain 
which binds the animal to the Infinite. One of the 
duties of this finite mind is to train the animal 
mind to a higher state of consciousness ; and, since 
there were no more animal minds to be created, on 
this earth, after finite mind was born, this task 
is not an overwhelming one. 

But it was, and is, a responsibility added to 
finite mind, that has not been given to any animal 
mind; and it is a responsibility for which finite 
mind will be held accountable to Infinite Mind. 
But, responsibilities are necessary to the develop- 
ment of reason and of good judgment, and finite 
mind needed that responsibility and will need 
many more, as time goes on. 

Simultaneously with Its beginning to economize 
Its forces, Infinite Mind began using the same 
animal minds again and again in newly created 



INFINITE INTELLIGENCE 251 

forms. This was done in order that all possibili- 
ties of development should be exhausted, in one 
form, before that animal mind should pass on into 
another. And so, incarnation was followed by 
reincarnation, in the animal kingdom, and the 
evolvement of animal minds, to higher states of 
consciousness, began. 

The greatest crime, in all the Universe, that can 
be committed against Infinite Mind, is persistent 
and continued retrogression. This crime brings 
annihilation, or reabsorption of an individual 
mind back into the Infinite. This is the one great 
sin for which there is no forgiveness, and absolute 
mental death, as an individual mind, awaits the 
perpetrator. But it is only the finite mind who 
can commit this crime since it alone has absolute 
free will which gives it the power to choose what 
it will do. The animal has not free will, and 
therefore cannot make an evolutionary choice for 
itself. Its progress is controlled by Infinite Will; 
and it is forced onward and upward from the 
lowest state of consciousness, or expression, step 
by step, from incarnation through reincarnation, 
until it has evolved to where it may use the human- 
animal form and brain. And, even then it may 
not choose what it will do ; and not until intuition, 
a spiritual attribute bestowed upon it, by In- 
finite Mind, has come to lead it, has it the power 
to choose its path. 

To avoid a retrogression, or even an appear- 



252 FRAGMENTS OF TRUTH 

anee of it, in any form, Infinite Mind compels 
the incarnating animal mind to repeat again and 
again its experiences in every form of expression 
that it uses. Never going backward for any 
cause, whatever, but always pushing onward to 
higher forms. For it is the essence which has 
been retained from the most important experi- 
ences of animal mind, in all the various forms 
that it has used, which makes the animal mind 
evolve. 

This essence cannot be called a memory, since 
the incidents which produced it are forgotten ; but 
there has been awakened in its mind a fear of 
disaster, which followed the committing of certain 
acts, and thus it was that fear became an in- 
stinctive element, that helped to control the 
animal's behavior. 

Some one has said that " self-preservation is 
the first law of nature." This is true; but the 
element of fear is always the direct cause for 
the acceleration of movement which leads the 
animal mind in that direction. 

Ages passed and finite mind progressed and 
grew in power. Its thought creations also grew 
in numbers and in strength. Where once it had 
been satisfied with caves and hollow trees for 
habitations, it now desired more commodious 
homes; and where once each finite mind had 
served itself, it now desired to be served; and 
such minds as were strongest and most positive, 



INFINITE INTELLIGENCE 253 

imposed their thoughts upon the weaker and less 
magnetic minds and made them slaves. 

Slavery is the material manifestation of the 
results of selfish thoughts and of indolent desires. 
In essence, it is dishonesty; since it demands that 
something shall be given in exchange for nothing 
to be received. It works in opposition to the law 
of reciprocity and originated in the lowest realm 
of the selfish finite mind. It provides a rapid 
means by which a strongly individualized mind 
may make accumulations of material things, and, 
in this respect, aids that mind in expressing its 
cupidity; but, eventually, it brings mental and 
physical degeneration; since it provides a means 
of gratifying that mind in its indolent desires. 
Slavery removes the necessity for the slaveholder 
to think or to act for himself, and stultification is 
the result of mental and physical inactivity. 
Slavery also provides a means to gratify the 
desire to rule, and to be obeyed by other minds ; 
and it is here that the enslaving finite mind, 
through gratification of its selfishness, becomes a 
monarch, feared, or hated, by other minds accord- 
ing to the way it rules them. 

Anciently, when finite minds were in their in- 
fancy, the enslaving mind had the power to create, 
or to destroy, human forms according to its will. 
And, because such power rested in a single in- 
dividual, that ruling mind became an uncontrolled 
master of cruelty who killed, or tortured, any liv- 



254 FRAGMENTS OF TRUTH 

ing thing, within the realm it ruled — if it desired 
so to do. For, everything that lived within that 
realm belonged to it. Every child born to it, or 
to its subjects, was its slave; and, to enlarge its 
realm and to acquire more slaves, its own pro- 
creative powers were sometimes overdone. Then 
it was made a crime, punishable with death, for 
any female, finite mind to refuse to bring forth 
children ; and it mattered not how ill she was, or 
how wretched were her surroundings, motherhood 
was forced upon her annually as it is upon stock 
by stock breeders of today. 

It was in that barbaric age that the present 
thought originated that female finite minds are 
giving glory to God, by multiplying and replenish- 
ing the earth with human-animal forms. And the 
feeble-minded creatures, as well as the laboring, 
suffering millions, of finite minds who starve and 
slave, for just enough to live and breathe today, 
are the results of ancient slavery days when one 
finite mind ruled all other finite minds in its com- 
munity. 

In ancient days this cruelty to mothers was per- 
petrated in order that the ruler then should have 
more slaves and more possessions, and should 
grow richer and more powerful through the labor 
of the hands and feet of all the finite minds it 
owned. Now the belief, that female finite minds 
must still continue to bring forth children in 
large numbers, is due to the same old selfish 



INFINITE INTELLIGENCE 255 

thought which, like the shadows of the past, rests 
upon the Church and State today. For, under- 
neath, and cunningly hidden from the casual ob- 
server, are now the same greedy thoughts which 
actuated ancient monarchs in their desire for 
slaves. The Church wants more devotees, to sup- 
port its priests and its Institutions, and the State, 
or Nation, wants supporters for its officers and its 
armies. So, now as then, the female finite minds 
are impressed that they must bear the burdens of 
giving birth to more children than they can pro- 
vide for. 

The demand made for war brides through which 
the State, or Nation, could replenish its losses to 
its armies, was evidence of that same selfish 
thought. And the fight against birth control, that 
State and Church are making, is another evidence. 

It is not the fear of God's displeasure which 
actuates those finite minds, who frantically and 
furiously oppose a law which makes it possible for 
fewer but more highly developed finite minds to 
be born; but it is the fear of a loss of prestige, 
of power, and of wealth to those who control the 
destinies of the hordes of ignorant finite minds, 
who serve the rulers of both Church and State. 

In ancient times the ruling finite mind was not 
always satisfied with the obedience and abject ser- 
vitude of its slaves. It wanted to be worshipped; 
and here was where the first idea of a God came 
into the finite minds of the enslaved. The slaves 



256 FRAGMENTS OF TRUTH 

were told, and accepted the tale as true, that the 
ruler of their tribe was a superior being, who 
was to be revered as well as feared. And here 
originated the belief in the divine right of Kings. 
The enslaved believed their ruler was their god 
and everything that happened to the tribe, for 
which they did not understand the cause, came 
through the power of their god and ruler. And 
so long as no misfortunes came, and all went well, 
this pretending finite mind was worshipped. But 
when the destructive force of Infinite Mind began 
its disintegrating work among them, and their 
god and ruler began to suffer with his slaves, then 
the first doubts arose among some of the enslaved 
and the god and ruler found that some sort of an 
explanation must be made to save him from a loss 
of prestige. 

When drouth, or flood, or fire, destroyed the 
possessions of their god, and when disease had 
made that god as miserable as themselves, the in- 
fluence of that ruling finite mind began to wane; 
and then the tale was told to them that these mis- 
fortunes were the results of the work of another 
god, who, though invisible, also had the power to 
destroy — one who was wholly evil and therefore 
must be propitiated. That something must be 
given it, or it would ruin every one and every- 
thing—that it had been sleeping and had now 
awakened hungry. 

This statement satisfied the ignorant enslaved 



INFINITE INTELLIGENCE 257 

finite minds, since they, themselves, had often 
wakened hungry and had been angrily disposed. 
And so they offered sacrifices to this new god of 
evil. They brought to it the things they liked 
best to eat, and the things they liked best to have ; 
and here originated, in ignorant, enslaved, finite 
minds a belief in the power of the devil. And so 
it was that the visible results, of the operation of 
the invisible force of the destructive power of 
Infinite Mind, were attributed to the expressions 
of an angry god of evil who wanted sacrifices. 
And so that mythical personage, Satan, or the 
devil, was created by finite mind itself; and 
throughout all the ages, that have intervened, be- 
tween that remote past and the present time, the 
devil has been feared and propitiated by ignorant 
finite minds. 

With all religions and in every portion of this 
earth, the devil has held an equally prominent 
place with God; and a greater power has some- 
times been accredited to the god of evil, by re- 
ligionists, than they gave to the God of good. 
This was quite natural, since the destructive force 
of Infinite Mind destroys what, to the ignorant 
finite minds, seems good; and they do not know 
that old conditions must be destroyed in order 
that new and better ones may be created. 

Sometimes this destructive force of Infinite 
Mind has been described as an individual being 
who had the power to, not alone tempt and ruin 



258 FRAGMENTS OF TRUTH 

character, but to actually abduct finite minds and 
bodies and carry them away to the realms it 
ruled. With some religionists, it seemed an in- 
tangible, mental force, or consciousness, which 
they called " mortal mind, or error," and it was 
believed to have the power to penetrate into the 
innermost parts of finite mind, to tempt and to 
mislead it. 

Other religionists believed there were many 
devils, that one could not be doing destructive 
work everywhere at the same moment; and they 
multiplied their one original god of evil into many, 
and, still, there were scarcely enough to account 
for all the destruction that was done. 

But, whether the beliefs were ancient, or mod- 
ern, all believers agreed that there must be a 
way to either propitiate, or cheat, the god of evil ; 
and, since it was first discovered, finite minds 
have been searching for a way to get the better 
of it. And still the destructive force of Infinite 
Mind continues Its work with them, and with 
their possessions. 

When ancient finite minds who ruled communi- 
ties and tribes learned how easy it had been to 
shift the results, of their ignorance and their 
helplessness, to another god ; and when they had 
learned how to distract the attention of their 
slaves and subjects, from their own machinations, 
to something or some one else, they conceived the 
plan to hide their personal, selfish, brutal desires 



INFINITE INTELLIGENCE 259 

behind the thing they called a government; and, 
summoning to their aid such finite minds, as could 
be used by them to do their bidding, they gave 
them names and titles and decorations. They be- 
stowed upon them the things they did not want 
themselves, gave to each some trivial thing to do ; 
and an aristocracy was created — a representative 
government was supposed to have been estab- 
lished. 

The next move made, to get a stronger hold 
upon their subjects, was to arouse a sentiment in 
the tribe, or nation, which would drive those en- 
slaved finite minds to suffer and to sacrifice every- 
thing they possessed, even their lives, for the 
preservation of their ruler and their government, 
and then something that is now called patriotism 
was born. ^ 

This sentiment among the slaves and subjects 
made it possible for rulers to declare war upon a 
neighboring tribe, or nation, for a cause, or with- 
out one; and, blindly following all orders given 
by their rulers, or by the aids appointed by their 
rulers, those frantic slaves, imbued with a hyp- 
notic frenzy that had been put upon them by their 
priests, or rulers, went forth to battle and to be 
slaughtered by the thousands. 

It is the same old spirit manifesting now that 
manifested in ancient times. The ruler of a nation 
and the small circle of finite minds who compose 
its aristocracy, look greedily upon another na- 



260 FRAGMENTS OF TRUTH 

tion, whose progress in efficiency and whose gain of 
material wealth, it wishes to absorb. Some triv- 
ial thing occurs ; perhaps an aristocrat is killed, 
by a subject of the nation whose wealth is coveted. 
Or perhaps a ship, belonging to the covetous na- 
tion is sunk; and either of these occurrences is 
believed to be a sufficient cause for war. 

"Remember the Maine!" becomes the war cry 
of a nation ; and, by making use of such an occur- 
rence, the populace of a whole nation is driven 
into a frenzy of excitement. 

Then the greedy, finite minds who rule the na- 
tion, fan those emotional flames of fury into a 
tremendous conflagration by permitting a sub- 
sidized press to take up the war cry; and, with 
scare headlines, and horrible pictures, work upon 
the imagination of the frenzied populace. From 
both stage and pulpit, is sent the thought of war. 
Millions of yards of moving picture films depict 
the battles of the past, as suggestions, to arouse 
the fighting blood of the fighting subjects of the 
nation, and finally war is declared. 

Husbands and fathers leave their families to 
suffer from cold and hunger. Sons forsake their 
aged, helpless mothers, making them dependent 
upon the grudging charity of the town, or city, 
where they live. With aching hearts and tearful 
eyes, sweethearts separate not to meet again and 
all because the rulers of the nations demand these 
sacrifices in the name of patriotism. 



INFINITE INTELLIGENCE 261 

And what is patriotism? 

Will thinking, finite minds ever stop fighting 
long enough to learn the real meaning of that 
word? 

Is the nation that invades another nation, for 
conquest, patriotic? 

Because the ruler of a nation, in his egotism 
and selfishness, believes himself to be the chosen 
one of Infinite Mind, is it patriotic for the finite 
minds, who compose that nation, to go to battle 
in order that their ruler may get the control of 
another nation, that has the same rights to free- 
dom that they have ? 

What fantasies are these? 

How much have finite minds evolved since they 
were tribes instead of nations? 

There is an unwritten law which says : destruc- 
tion destroys itself ; which is another way of say- 
ing that like attracts like, and when an animal, or 
a finite mind, begins a destructive career, it at- 
tracts to itself the great primal destructive force 
of nature, and this force, sometimes, like a flood, 
surrounds and completely submerges that in- 
harmonious mind. It brings, for that mind's 
selection, all the disintegrating thoughts it had 
absorbed from other destructive minds. 

This destructive force, of Infinite Mind, is like 
a broad, deep, dirty waterway that is crowded 
with boats of all kinds and descriptions. Each 
boat that persists in sailing there, becomes laden 



262 FRAGMENTS OF TRUTH 

with destructive things ; and, as the boats meet and 
pass each other, some of their cargoes are ex- 
changed. But, soon or late, each boat becomes 
overladen with the evil things it carries, and, 
through collision with another, or by its inability 
to carry its load further, it goes down into the 
depth of that destructive, disintegrating force, 
and, through corroding influences, loses its form 
forever. 

In proportion to its power, the operation of the 
law of attraction, as directed by Infinite Mind, pro- 
duces creations more numerous, and varied, than 
are the creations of finite minds. This is due to 
th^ fact that the limitations, produced by indi- 
vidual selfishness and egotism, do not operate in 
Infinite Mind. Infinite Mind creates forms only 
for Its temporary expression. It knows that Its 
forms are temporary and regards them as such, 
while finite minds create forms which they hope 
and believe will be permanent. 

However beautiful, or desirable, a creation may 
be, it is impossible for it to become a permanency 
in nature, or the Universe. For, even the so- 
called eternal hills must sometime crumble and 
give way before that invincible, disintegrating, de- 
structive Infinite force which levels the mountains, 
elevated the plains, and grinds the rocks into 
powder. 

Nothing can stand forever before that force and 
retain its original form, because it is the de- 



INFINITE INTELLIGENCE 263 

structive aspect of Infinite Mind. Suns may burn 
for what seems to be eons to finite minds. The 
moon and stars may reflect their light for ages. 
The planets may swing in space, following their 
orbits and fulfilling their missions, for millions of 
years. Comets may appear and disappear; 
meteors may blaze, and burst, and fall : but there 
comes a time when all these creations of Infinite 
Mind, like the incandescent lamps made by finite 
minds, will flame up and go out, extinguished by 
that overpowering, reactionary, disintegrating 
force which eventually destroys all forms every- 
where in tiie Universe. 

Infinite Mind loves Its expressions of thought, 
only so long as they are actively useful instru- 
ments for It to use. Because they have served It 
once, Infinite Mind does not waste time, or space, 
in preserving worn-out, useless things. 

When an instrument, through crystallization, or 
lack of magnetic power, becomes a clod in the 
Universe, it is destroyed and its atoms are used 
to create a better and a more powerful form, one 
that will be more efficient in the evolutionary 
scheme. For, in proportion to the way nature 
hates a vacuum and fills it, so Infinite Mind abhors 
uselessness and destroys it. 

During the period of Its activity, Infinite Mind 
will have action in the Universe. It will not 
tolerate drones in Its great hive of energy. Prog- 
ress and production, from all Its forms of thought 



264 FRAGMENTS OF TRUTH 

expressions, are required. Progress and produc- 
tion, combined, compose the driving force of the 
edict that went forth throughout all space on the 
morning of this great Day of evolution ; and prog- 
ress and production will be required of every indi- 
vidualized center in the Universe until the great 
night comes on and Infinite Mind rests. 

It is only to the finite mind that forms seem 
to be eternal, and this is because it wants them 
to be. For, finite mind clings to the things it 
loves to look upon, and to possess, and, for a sea- 
son, becomes completely submerged in them. It 
dwells too long in its own creations, and this is 
because it admires and loves them too much. It 
does not wish to escape, but, of its own free will 
becomes a slave to its own material things. When 
this is true of finite mind, it becomes so circum- 
scribed, by its possessions, that it is limited by 
them, and no longer expands beyond the limita- 
tions it has made for itself. 

It resents disturbances and wishes to be left 
alone with its creations, as they are. This condi- 
tion is due to its fears and its lack of foresight. 
Like the child in the dark, it does not know what 
the future has in store for it, and fears what it 
does not understand. 

In contradistinction to Infinite Mind, it is so 
satisfied with its own creations, that it continu- 
ally tries to preserve them. It regrets past efforts, 
that have failed, and mourns for departed friends, 



INFINITE INTELLIGENCE 265 

and things, that have been taken away. It is sorry 
for itself and becomes discouraged when its crea- 
tions fail to do its bidding. It is selfish where 
Infinite Mind is selfless. It is penurious with its 
productions where Infinite Mind is lavish in Its 
distribution of forms. Finite mind hurries, be- 
cause it does not know that the time, for its crea- 
tions, is unlimited, and it worries because it does 
not know that it can accomplish all it undertakes 
to do, if it will but persevere in its efforts. 

The finite mind, as compared with Infinite Mind, 
is sometimes like a salt-water slough that has been 
separated from the sea. By the continued wash- 
ing of sand and debris, there has been made a 
temporary barrier between the sea and the slough. 
The greater the barrier grows, and the longer it 
exists, the more isolated and impure the slough 
becomes, until it finally loses all resemblance to its 
source; and, if it has not within it a spring of 
pure, fresh water to increase and to clarify it, 
then it becomes a stagnant, slimy pool, filled with 
all sorts of degenerate and dying things, that be- 
come an unmitigated offence to the senses. 

It is the barriers that are created, and allowed 
to stand, between Infinite and finite minds, that 
cause the limitations to the finite ; and those bar- 
riers are made of various kinds of mental states. 
Sometimes they are deceitfulness, anger and lust ; 
sometimes they are selfishness, and fear of indi- 
vidual loss; for the finite mind desires to get 



266 FRAGMENTS OF TRUTH 

things rather than to be good. It wishes to have, 
and to hold, what it thinks it possesses. It does 
not know that with the ebb and flow of the tide of 
Infinite Mind, all that goes out, in one day, will 
be replaced by something fresher and better the 
next. And so, with its greed to possess, more and 
more, and with its fear of losing what it has, it 
builds the barrier higher and stronger, between it 
and its source of supply and then becomes angry, 
or unhappy, in its belief that the Infinite Mind has 
forsaken, or is afflicting, it. 

Sometimes the element of self-appreciation be- 
comes so prominent, in a finite mind, that it be- 
comes very vain of its small successes. Egotism 
always grows out of too much self-esteem, and, 
with every added new possession, it becomes more 
and more convinced that it is a stronger and a 
more efficient mind than any other. Soon it be- 
comes imbued with the desire to direct other 
minds, and to rule their bodies. It wishes to make 
others subservient to its will and begins by giving 
directions to others. It assumes the position of 
self-appointed director, or dictator, over the af- 
fairs of other minds, and, after many reincarna- 
tions, it may become a King, or a Queen, or a 
President. 

Many experiences are required in many differ- 
ent forms of expression before a finite mind may 
become the ruler of a nation; but, where there is 
a strong will to do a thing, a way will always be 



INFINITE INTELLIGENCE 267 

found ; and, after many struggles and failures, the 
desired position will be gained. Then comes the 
belief that the zenith of honor and preferment 
has been reached, that there is nothing higher, or 
greater, to be had by finite mind. It believes its 
powers and possessions are established as su- 
preme; and, becoming filled with pompous satis- 
faction, it begins to crystallize, unless it finds that 
somewhere there is another finite mind who is at- 
tempting to do what it has done. 

Then comes the desire for conquest. The dis- 
appointment and chagrin of finding itself not the 
absolute ruler, of the destinies of all other minds, 
fills it with jealousy. Eesentment and bitterness 
come and flood it with the determination to pos- 
sess and to control other nations, and to depose 
their rulers. 

Sometimes, in its egotism and ignorance, it 
becomes imbued with the belief that it was born 
to be an instrument of Infinite Mind ; to crush any 
living thing that stands upright in opposition to 
itself and to its desires. So it works its little 
self into a frenzy of what it calls patriotic en- 
thusiasm. 

It orders its subjects to appear, in audience, 
and lectures them upon the subject of patriotism. 
It declares that Infinite Mind — God, is with it in 
all its thoughts and purposes. With flashing eyes 
and thunderous tones it promises its subjects that 
it, and God, will conquer every other finite mind 



268 FRAGMENTS OF TRUTH 

on land, or sea, and make them all subservient 
to it. 

Paradoxically it calls upon the Infinite Mind 
to become its battle god, and to help its human 
warriors to crush all finite minds, who rule where 
it would like to rule, and who possess what it 
would like to have. 

This greedy, selfish egotist would make a 
servant of the power it pretends to worship, and 
orders it about as if it were a corporal's guard. 
It dares to command Almighty God to serve it in 
its selfish purposes and directs its Creator to 
help it slay its fellow-men. 

Just why it claims such servitude from Infinite 
Mind, may be quite obscure to other finite minds ; 
but the fact remains it does. And, if by force of 
arms and by a greater cunning, this greedy finite 
mind succeeds in its designs, and gains its ends 
and purposes, then it makes the boast, and justi- 
fies itself, by saying that it was Infinite Mind — 
God — who perched Itself upon the standards and 
the banners of its conquering armies, and, through 
brutal bloodshed and terrific suffering, helped it 
to win the victory. 

And should that murderous finite mind, with- 
out restraint or interruption, continue in its career 
of bloodshed for possession, then every other finite 
mind would lose its independence and become its 
slave. There would be no peace, no progress, 
nor any freedom anywhere for other finite minds. 



INFINITE INTELLIGENCE 269 

That conquering mind, with military force, would 
rule all other minds and, machine like, every mind 
under its bondage would be compelled to think 
and act and live, to please its ruler ; and that rul- 
ing mind, self-satisfied and strong, would become 
so crystallized, in its conceit, that it could not 
expand beyond the limitations it had created for 
itself. But imbued with a desire to possess, there 
would be no limit to what it would acquire. It 
would, indeed, become the Emperor of this world. 
I>ut, before that selfish triumph could be attained, 
would come the disintegrating, repelling, destruc- 
tive force of Infinite Mind, as an equilibratory in- 
fluence, and begin its work. 

Unexpected things would occur. A blight would 
fall upon the crops, and food would become scarce 
for those whom that egotist ruled. Disease would 
appear in its military camps and warriors would 
disappear before its ravages. Fires and floods 
would destroy its munitions of war, and the mills 
producing them. Ships which should bring relief 
would be sunk and all their cargoes would go to 
feed the fishes. Earthquakes and tidal waves 
would destroy the abiding places, of warriors' 
wives and children, and an unaccountable and 
paralyzing fear of approaching evil, would come 
upon the finite minds of all the warriors who had 
been left to fight upon the battlefields, without 
their old companions. They would lose their cour- 
age and their energy and then, to each and every 



270 FRAGMENTS OF TRUTH 

finite mind who would be bearing the burdens of 
the war, the thought would come: 

"What are you fighting for?" 

And when that questioning thought was passed 
from mind to mind the warriors would whisper 
to themselves and to each other: 

"What are we fighting for?" 

And soon that same questioning thought would 
come to that egotist, the finite mind, who had 
planned the war, and it would then be forced to 
recognize the futility of further effort to conquer 
other finite minds, or to enslave them. 

Then, in the stillness of a night, when it was all 
alone with Infinite Mind surrounding it, a picture 
of the past would appear and pass before it as if 
it were a funeral train. That finite mind would 
see every incident that had occurred during its 
present form of expression. Slowly those pictures 
would pass, one after the other, as every incident 
in one's life passes by the mental vision of one 
whose soul is being required; and there, written 
in the Book of Judgment and held up for that 
finite mind to read, would be shown how greed, and 
envy, and desire for power, had colored all its 
vision and had fashioned all its judgment — how 
self-appreciation had grown into vanity and vanity 
into a supreme conceit. 

With sadness, that finite mind would see how it 
had prevented millions of other finite minds from 
working out their destinies, as they would have 



INFINITE INTELLIGENCE 271 

done, uninfluenced and uninflamed by its passion- 
ate desire for power. It would see the tiny forms 
of expression, of finite minds, who had not 
reached maturity and who had been robbed of their 
immediate future experiences. And then it would 
remember that all those cruel things had been done 
at its command. 

All the outrages that had been committed by its 
warriors, and all the crimes that had been per- 
petrated against their unhappy victims had been 
approved by it. And, bowing its head in sor- 
rowful humility, it would be compelled to say : 
, "For all these things, God, I am to blame." 
And the contrition felt by that egotist, that would- 
be conqueror of the world, would show that prog- 
ress had been made in its evolvement, since 
compassion and contrition, two of the highest emo- 
tions that finite minds may feel, are attributes 
only of the evolving, finite mind. 

And in a like manner will the destructive force 
of Infinite Mind demolish all State, Church, So- 
cial and Political combinations, after they have 
done their constructive work and have crystallized 
into unyielding, unbending, unprogressive insti- 
tutions. 

So long as the Church was imbued with the spirit 
of love, and so long as its members, and its priests, 
were filled with compassion for each other and for 
all mankind, great draughts of Infinite love and in- 



272 FRAGMENTS OF TRUTH 

spiration were being drawn into it ; and it was a 
living, throbbing, soulful thing created, and main- 
tained, for the uplifting of the hopeless, helpless 
souls who came to it for refuge and relief. 

When men and women worshipped God, on the 
banks of a stream, and in the woods; when their 
meeting places were beneath the blue vault of 
heaven and among the flowers and the birds, their 
hearts were tender with love and sympathy, in- 
spired by the Infinite constructive force : then they 
were evolving upward and onward, mentally and 
spiritually. But, when desire for individual ag- 
grandizement crept into the hearts of some of the 
members of those simple organizations ; when one 
of their members began to plan how he could make 
a living for himself and for his family, at the 
expense of all the other members, then the Infinite 
destructive force began to manifest as individual 
selfishness, and the bonds of love and sympathy 
which had united those friends and brothers began 
to disintegrate. 

But, even then, all members of that small society 
were not selfishly inclined. There were those whose 
hearts were filled with love and who were willing 
to make sacrifices for each other, and even for the 
one who wished to receive, and not to give. And 
so the constructive force still continued to exceed 
in power the destructive force and the organiza- 
tion still continued to attract new members and to 
grow in usefulness. 



INFINITE INTELLIGENCE 273 

After that, came the desire for Church posses- 
sions. The small society wished to have a home, 
an abiding place of its own. The fields and woods 
were no longer satisfying to some of its members. 
There must be builded an edifice, and sacrifices 
must be made, by all the members, to build a 
Church. 

And then, with hearts full of love and devotion 
toward their beloved Society and toward each 
other, and with the belief that their meetings 
would be more productive of good, to all, if they 
were to be held within walls and beneath a roof, 
they began the creation of a Church building. 
And here the Infinite destructive force began 
manifesting, as individual selfishness, again, when 
some of the members of that small Society saw 
an opportunity to gain a benefit by taking charge 
of the building of that new Church, and by con- 
trolling the funds provided for its construction 
by the simple, trusting members of the So- 
ciety. 

And here, again, graft and greed appeared, and, 
like the serpent in the Eden Garden of the sup- 
posed originators of the human race, raised their 
selfish heads and declared that this was an oppor- 
tunity for some one to acquire an individual bene- 
fit at some one else's expense. And here was 
where Church trustees and treasurers were made. 

In the beginning of the disruption of a Society, 
Church or State, it is the Infinite destructive force 



274 FRAGMENTS OF TRUTH 

that tempts the leaders, and those having au- 
thority, to be dishonest. And this destructive 
force may be called by any name, and its effects 
upon finite minds may be condemned as evil, or 
it may be condoned and called unfortunate. It 
exists because it must; and it will continue to 
affect finite minds until they have become harmo- 
nious and constructive in all their parts. Then 
there will be no sympathetic vibrations between 
the Infinite destructive force and such developed 
finite minds ; and then cyclones may pass them by, 
and they will be unscathed by fire, or flood, by 
earthquakes, or by pestilence; for, imbued with 
Infinite constructive power, a protecting wall of 
harmonious vibrations will surround each finite 
mind who dwells in peace and love within It. 

When the Infinite Constructive force was creat- 
ing the heavens and the earth, It created the min- 
eral and vegetable kingdoms and established them, 
within and upon the world, which was to become 
the abiding place of finite minds and of ani- 
mals. 

These two kingdoms were made, not alone for 
decorative purposes, but also to serve for 
food and medicines. It was out of Itself that 
the substance came to make all things that 
ever existed, and therefore there is not one blade 
of grass, or weed, or clod of earth, or stone, or 
anything that can be seen that is not a part of 



INFINITE INTELLIGENCE 275 

Infinite Mind, in some stage, or grade, of develop- 
ment. 

The atoms, that compose the minerals and the 
earth, are not so far advanced, in their develop- 
ment as are the atoms used to make the flowers, 
grass and trees. But there are essences in every 
mineral, and in the earth, which plants may draw 
upon which give them life and strength and 
beauty. For, in the laboratory of nature, the 
constructive force of Infinite Mind works con- 
stantly to bring the lower higher, that new forms, 
for Its expressions, may be made. 

It is the soul essence of the mineral lead, the 
lowest and most poisonous of all the metals in the 
earth, that, when combined with the essence of 
common salt, produces iron ore. And it is the 
soul or essence of the iron ore when combined 
with the essence of mercury that makes the dia- 
mond. 

And so it is that in the dark, damp earth, away 
from the sunshine and pure air, and hidden from 
the gaze of finite minds, Infinite Mind works con- 
stantly, pulverizing and separating, extracting 
and combining Its mineral creations to bring them 
into higher and better and more beautiful forms. 
Then, out of those apparently lifeless minerals, 
Infinite Mind brings upward into the roots of 
flowers, shrubs and trees the mineral essences that 
give to them a strength and beauty as wonderful 
as are in the diamond, the ruby, the sapphire, the 



276 FRAGMENTS OF TRUTH 

emerald and in all other precious and semi- 
precious stones. 

Gold and silver, copper and tin each are the 
products of a combination of the essences, or 
souls, from lower mineral forms. And it is some 
of these same essences which, when absorbed from 
foods and medicines, give health and strength to 
animals and men. 

But there are finite minds who, in their limita- 
tions, caused by their ignorance of the laws which 
govern life, refuse a knowledge of these truths. 
They ignore the handiwork of Infinite Mind in 
nature, or, denouncing it, they call it " error," 
and try to relegate it to the realm of "mortal 
mind" — wherever that may be. But, closing eyes 
to truth, or denying its existence, does not destroy 
the truth; and he who shuts himself away from 
sunlight, neither destroys the sun nor extinguishes 
its light, but only deprives himself of that which 
sunlight gives to everything that looks upon it, 
and lives within it ; and the finite mind is ignorant, 
indeed, who does not know that Infinite Mind 
creates, composes, controls and is a part of every 
material expression of Itself, within the Universe. 
And, whether that expression be above, below or 
on a parallel, with finite minds, it is a part of 
Infinite Mind and its value is determined by its 
usefulness. 

As a scrap of rusty iron may be thrown back 
into the melting pot of the smelter, to be cleansed 



INFINITE INTELLIGENCE 277 

of rust and dirt, so are finite minds forced back 
again and again into the melting pot of experi- 
ence, by Infinite Mind, to be purified and cleansed 
of their imperfections ; for nothing, in all the Uni- 
verse, is lost or wasted. It is but the individual 
forms of expression of Infinite Mind, that are 
moulded and re-moulded to suitably express the 
essences, or souls, within them. 

When Infinite Mind created animal and human 
forms, It used again the atoms that had been com- 
bined before in mineral and vegetable forms and 
essences ; and this is why animal and human bodies 
contain, in blood, bone and tissue, the same ele- 
ments that are found in minerals and in plants. 

It was many hundred years ago that ancient wise 
men learned this truth, and students of the Occult 
laws of nature have been working ever since to 
demonstrate, to other finite minds, this knowledge. 
Analogy and research have shown these students 
that there are but three primal elements that enter 
into the composition of mineral, vegetable and 
animal creations and these three elements are the 
souls, or essences, of salt, sulphur and of mercury; 
and any material form of expression that lacks 
one, or more, of these three essences, in proper 
proportions, is lacking in its strength, and fails 
to be an efficient instrument through which a mind, 
or soul, may be expressed. 

And so those ancient wise men taught their stu- 
dents how to look for food and medicines in the 



278 FRAGMENTS OF TRUTH 

mineral and vegetable kingdoms; and how to ex- 
tract those precious essences and fluids, and how- 
to prepare them that they should be used con- 
structively to supply the needs of men and 
animals. 

Experience has shown that there are essences 
constructive and essences destructive to human 
and animal forms. That the destructive force of 
Infinite Mind operates in the mineral and vege- 
table kingdoms as does Its constructive force ; and, 
therefore, finite minds who are on the constructive 
side of nature do not use, in their work of heal- 
ing, and in providing food, the destructive es- 
sences. 

The physician who gives his patient poisonous 
essences is not constructive. He is not a restorer, 
but instead is a destroyer of human and animal 
forms. He who injects into the veins of a human 
being, or of an animal, a poisonous essence, for the 
purpose of creating harmonious conditions in that 
body, is as wise as was the man whom Mother 
Goose described — he who "jumped into a bramble 
bush and scratched out both his eyes. And when 
he saw his eyes were out, with all his might and 
main, he jumped into another bush to scratch them 
in again/ } Even the infantile consciousness can 
discover the futility of such reckless imbecility and 
is amused by it. 

There are physicians who claim that poisons in 
the human, or animal system, can be overcome by 



INFINITE INTELLIGENCE 279 

adding other and more powerful poisons to 
them. 

Is a broken levee mended by forcing a flood of 
water through the break? Or is a conflagration 
destroyed by adding more fuel to the fire? 

It is true that a powerful poison, united with a 
weaker poison, may change the expression of the 
lesser one; but another and a greater inharmoni- 
ous condition will be produced by the combination. 
And while the victim may appear to have been 
cured of the first distressed condition, there will 
follow a worse one produced by the addition of 
more destructive medicine. 

There is the modern surgeon who believes in 
removing every organ from the human, or animal 
body, that it can exist without. The tonsils must 
be removed to prevent tonsilitis. The vermiform 
appendix must be removed to prevent appendi- 
citis. The uterus and ovaries must be removed 
to prevent congestion, nervousness and hysteria. 
A stomach must be removed to prevent indiges- 
tion. A kidney must be removed to prevent, or 
to cure, Bright 's disease. The gall bladder must 
be removed to prevent gall stones, and when will 
they remove the eyes to prevent blindness! 

If the modern wise( !) men would study the work 
of the ancient wise men, they would learn, through 
their investigations, to be constructionists instead 
of destructionists. They would learn through 
their investigations, of nature's occult secrets, 



280 FRAGMENTS OF TRUTH 

that there are essences that may be extracted from 
herbs and minerals that will not only cure every 
ill that a man, or an animal, may be afflicted with, 
but they would learn that for every organ in the 
material body of man and beast, and for every 
nerve center and for every gland, there is a 
ganglia in its brain which corresponds, and 
through which the mind operates to control those 
glands, organs and nerve centers. And they would 
also learn that when any of the various parts of 
the human, or animal, mechanism have been re- 
moved and there is nothing for the corresponding 
ganglia in the brain to do, it becomes atrophied 
and much of the brain's usefulness to the mind is 
lost thereby. 

It is a popular belief of intelligent individuals 
that the bodies of men and of animals reach a limit 
of age usefulness, at about five times the length 
of time required to reach maturity. But ancient 
wise men demonstrated the fact, by their experi- 
ences and experimentations, that, by judicious and 
persistent use of the constructive essences con- 
tained in minerals and plants, the life and useful- 
ness of the bodies and the brains of men and ani- 
mals may be extended much beyond the limit of 
age put upon them by popular belief. 

Is it because modern scientists are too egotistic, 
too self-satisfied and too vain of the infinitesimal 
fragments of information and misinformation that 
they possess, that they do not search further? Or 



INFINITE INTELLIGENCE 281 

is it because there may be no money to be made 
by such research? It is true that real wisdom is 
at a discount, these days, in the twentieth cen- 
tury, and perhaps that is the reason scientists do 
not search for it. 



CHAPTER FOURTEEN 

JUDGMENT DAY 

Every soul, whether upon the subjective or ob- 
jective plane of being, is now just where it has 
placed itself; and there is neither a God, a man, 
or a devil to bless, or to blame, for its present 
condition. And when men, who believe them- 
selves the unfortunate victims of circumstances, 
see and realize this truth, they will either begin 
to improve their mental, physical and financial 
conditions, or give up the struggle for evolve- 
ment. 

Waiting for dead men's shoes, or for fairy god- 
mothers, to bring wealth and honor is the result 
of mental, or physical, laziness, of gross ineffi- 
ciency, or of dense ignorance of the operations 
of the laws that govern progress; and each of 
these defects of character may be compared to 
the tying of a mill-stone to the neck of a swim- 
mer. He does not get far, however great his 
effort. 

Waiting, for something to turn up, is deaden- 
ing to energy and disappointing to hopes. Time 
is one of the most valuable assets an evolving 
ego possesses; and to waste it in waiting for 

282 



JUDGMENT DAY 283 

something that may never come, is a crime against 
the soul. 

It has been said that procrastination is the 
thief of time; and to the individual who knows 
the value of time, this statement is one of the 
truest things he ever heard. But for the time- 
killer, the man who has so much time he knows 
not what to do with it, procrastination is his prin- 
cipal occupation. It is true he never attains, but 
there are many who do not wish to attain and 
prefer stultification because, it is easy to get. 

Then there is that miserable, indefinite, irre- 
sponsible, shifting thing called bad luck that 
keeps a man from achieving. 

And what is bad luck? "Where did it come 
from and who created itl 

It must have had a cause, since nothing in the 
Universe came into existence without one. It is 
true there are individuals who, from the moment 
they begin cutting their baby teeth, pass from one 
calamity into another and their so-called misfor- 
tunes are all attributed to bad luck. 

Then there is the man who shifts the cause of 
his misfortunes to the stars. He says he has had 
bad luck since he can remember anything, and 
has but recently discovered the cause; that his 
horoscope shows he was born under bad astro- 
logical conditions; and it has been the stars that 
have kept him from succeeding in life. He admits 
that his efforts have been spasmodic, because he 



284 FRAGMENTS OF TRUTH 

had to watch his stars to avoid the accidents and 
disasters that might have come to him. 

He dared not start a business venture until all 
his good planets should be harmoniously assem- 
bled in his mid-heaven, or in some other equally 
benefic position, and since such a constellation, 
as he desires, comes in a man's life only about 
once in thirty years, he has been waiting for a 
long time for the right astrological conditions 
to do something for him. In the meantime, he 
has been too busy dodging the fiery bolts from 
Mars, the serpentine thrusts from Saturn and 
the sledge-hammer blows from Uranus, to make 
any constructive efforts in his own behalf. 

After such an existence, as this man has led, 
how could he expect anything better than his 
present poverty-stricken condition? 

The only difference between him and he who 
believes himself the victim of just plain bad luck 
is this; the man afraid of his stars thinks he 
knows the cause of his trouble and blames the 
stars for it, and the other man does not know the 
cause of his misfortunes and blames everybody, 
but himself, for them. 

The Occultist says there is no such thing as 
bad luck — as men understand the term. That so- 
called bad luck is always the result of bad judg- 
ment, or of a transgression of law, in a past, or 
the present, life; that so-called bad astrological 
conditions, in this life, are the results of bad 



JUDGMENT DAY 285 

judgment and the consequent mistakes made in a 
former life; that effects must, and will, follow 
causes, and laws transgressed, either ignorantly, 
or wilfully, bring unavoidable results. He also 
says a progressive ego will not wait for any- 
thing, or for anybody, to do things for, or to give 
things to it ; but gets up and goes after whatever 
it wants, regardless of stars and conditions. And 
if it has a sufficient amount of determination and 
perseverance, it will get what it goes after and 
that without robbing another. But if it has not 
the necessary determination and perseverance 
required for performing such a dynamic feat, then 
it should begin at once to cultivate those qualities 
until they are gained. 

The only disgrace, attendant upon labor, is 
that of not doing it well; and since hands and 
feet and brain were made to use in the acquire- 
ment of knowledge, it is only possible for a soul 
to gain it through the use of those bodily at- 
tributes. If a woman is afraid of soiling her 
hands, or of breaking her finger-nails, she will 
never get far in her search for knowledge. And 
if a man is content to let some one else do the 
work, and then tell him about it, he will never 
remember what he has been told, and the indi- 
vidual who did the work got the experience that 
gave him the knowledge he wanted. 

If a man is afraid of losing his rest and reposes 
comfortably upon his bed while some one else 



286 FRAGMENTS OF TRUTH 

burns the midnight oil, in an effort to work out 
some of the problems of life, the sleepy man will 
waken, some time, to find himself in the rear of the 
procession while the man who used his brain and 
his oil leads it. 

And since it is either fear, or laziness, mental 
or physical, which retards and possibly destroys 
the evolvement of an ego, and since it is in one, 
or both, of these faults, in the human soul, that all 
other bad qualities find root, the first work the 
earnest student should do is to uproot and cast 
out from his heart's garden those two obnoxious 
weeds, fear and laziness. 

There is the greedy individual who wishes to 
claim for his own the fruits of the labors of an- 
other. Mental vanity makes him crave the ad- 
miration and the homage of his fellows— which he 
knows he does not deserve. He wishes to pose 
for what he is not, and makes claims to knowl- 
edge and power that are entirely beyond his reach. 
Without hesitancy, he paraphrases another's work 
and gives, as his own, the ideas he has stolen. 
That individual is as great a thief as is he who 
steals a purse, or an overcoat. 

The Nazarene Occultist said, " Render therefore 
unto Caesar the things which are Caesar's and 
unto God the things that are God's." And, ac- 
cording to the same principle, be sure that full 
credit is given to every other individual for what 
he has done. Make no false pretences, for he who 



JUDGMENT DAY 287 

poses for what he is not, by his own pretensions, 
acknowledges his mental and spiritual poverty 
and his dishonesty shall be exposed ; for the time 
is here, now, when every individual whether he 
be a churchman, a statesman, a politician, a leader 
of society, or a common laborer, shall be known 
for what he is and nothing more. 

Because of the iniquitous manner of living, the 
hands of the Gods are being laid heavily upon the 
peoples of this earth. For they have sinned con- 
sciously and wilfully against each other, and have 
called upon God to help them in their sinning. 
They have set apart hours and days, during which 
time they have made prayers, asking God to aid 
them in killing their fellow-men; and they have 
tortured and robbed each other. 

Through the force of arms, they have taken 
away that which they could not replace, or re- 
store ; and, through the mandates of their rulers, 
they have invaded the homes and have destroyed 
the happiness of those helpless to resist them. 

Through their desire for power and posses- 
sions, men have forgotten, or ignored, the rights 
of others and have ruthlessly destroyed, or ap- 
propriated, for their own selfish purposes, what- 
soever they desired to have, belonging to others. 

Piracy has been practised upon the land and 
upon the sea, but the day of reckoning is at hand ; 
and every man, woman or child, who has aided in 
sinning against another man, woman or child, 



288 FEAGMENTS OF TRUTH 

shall pay the full penalty for the crime. Retribu- 
tion individually shall come, and it will not be the 
sins of the fathers visited upon the children of 
any other generation than this, but it will be the 
sins of each individual that will be visited upon 
himself. 

It will not be the aggressors, by war alone, who 
will meet their punishment now, but it will be the 
wife-beaters, the gamblers, the drunkards and the 
adulterers of both sexes; the unfaithful parents 
and the dishonorable children. It will be those 
who have done to others what they would not 
have done to themselves. 

Think not, those who have been blinded by 
ignorance and selfishness, that justice is dead, or 
that one individual can escape the consequences of 
his acts, for he cannot. 

For this is the "summing up" time for the 
lawyer and the Judge. It is the ' ' cashing in ' ' time 
for the banker and the business man; it is the 
"evening of the last day of grace' ' for the church- 
man, and, for all other individuals, "the time is 
up." 

And those who have not transgressed against 
another will be helpless to aid the transgressor, 
or, in the least degree, to delay or prevent his 
punishment. And those who, for a reason or 
without one, attempt to protect, or to conceal the 
transgressor, or to prevent him from receiving the 
consequences of his acts shall, as a violator of the 



JUDGMENT DAY 289 

law of justice, be punished with the transgres- 
sor. 

From the hilltops and from the valleys, from the 
mountain peaks and from the caverns, on the 
seas, and, from the river bottoms, will come the 
souls that must be judged. From the palaces and 
from the hovels, from the barracks, tents and 
dugouts will be summoned souls to meet their 
judgment. And there will be no human witnesses 
needed to testify either for, or against, each soul ; 
since each will bring the pictures made by his own 
thoughts and acts. 

Upon the screen that he, himself, has created, 
and which envelops him as a cloud, are printed 
every act, every purpose and desire both fulfilled 
and unfulfilled. Every hope and aspiration, 
every resolution made and broken, will be seen by 
those who read and judge each individual soul. 
Then there will be no caste, or class, no favored 
ones. The soul whose record is the best will stand 
the highest and will receive full credit for all 
that it deserves. 

There will be no man-made distinctions then. 
The King, the Queen, the priest, the nun, the 
rich, the poor, will stand alike before that bar of 
justice and the questions asked will be : 

"What have you done to others? What meas- 
ure have you meted to your fellows? What suf- 
fering have you caused? What happiness have 
you given? What has your influence been and 



290 FRAGMENTS OF TRUTH 

what was your example? Have your thoughts 
and deeds been constructive, or destructive, 
and which predominated in number and de- 
gree ? ' ' 

For it is not alone what a soul believes that 
raises, or lowers, it in its evolvement, but what it 
does. And since every individual mind is a part 
of the great Consciousness, ever seeking indi- 
vidual experiences through expression, whatever 
one part of It does to another part is done to what 
men call God. 

"When the Nazarene said " whatsoever ye have 
done to one of the least of these, ye have also done 
to me," he taught this truth; and it will not only 
be, what have you done to the other parts of the 
great Consciousness, who have reached the human 
stage of action and understanding, but it will also 
be what have you done to every other part that is 
coming upward toward the human stage. 

It is the individualizing mind, or soul, who 
thinks independently for itself, whether it be that 
of a man, or of an animal, who will be held ac- 
countable in this great day of reckoning. And 
every thinking soul will be judged according to 
its real value and understanding. 

Then the leaners will be deprived of their props 
and must stand for themselves, or fall; and the 
individual who has depended upon some strong 
character, to assume its responsibilities, will be 
made to realize that, for the remainder of its 



JUDGMENT DAY 291 

evolutionary journey, it must assume its own re- 
sponsibilities and solve its own problems. 

After those days of Judgment have passed there 
will be no more prayers offered to God in which 
men will ask that they be made to do their duties. 
Men will not ask God to give them clean hearts 
and lofty purposes, because they will then know 
that if their hearts are unclean they, themselves, 
must purify them; and if their purposes are not 
honorable, then they must make them what they 
desire them to be. 

And men will also understand that there is no 
God, in all the Universe, who will remove the con- 
sequences of their mistakes; but every mistake, 
whether ignorantly, or wilfully, made, must be 
paid for by the individual who makes it. 

As a consequence, for a time, during that period 
of judgment, the social conditions on this material 
plane of consciousness will be chaotic. As it was 
in Cosmos, during the fourth period of this Cosmic 
Day, when the heavens were filled with blazing 
worlds and sulphurous comets ; and when the suns 
were but unrestrained centers of bursting, flaming 
energy, so shall it be, but in a lesser degree, with 
the social conditions on this material plane. For, 
as it is above, so it must sometime be below. 

Then the artificiality of the present social 
fabric, of the present so-called civilization, will be 
torn into shreds; and, as ths dead and dying 
leaves in the forest are driven before the strong 



292 FRAGMENTS OP TRUTH 

winds of autumn, so shall the shreds of the pres- 
ent social fabric be scattered. Then will come 
restoration for such individuals as have passed 
through the adjustment period. And as each 
world and sun found its orbit, in the Fifth Cosmic 
Period, and as out of chaos came order and har- 
mony, in the heavens, then, so will every indi- 
vidual soul find its place and do its work without 
fear, or friction. 

And there will be real brotherly love and genu- 
ine friendships in those days. There will be no 
need for Yale locks, or burglar alarms, since no 
man, then, will covet his neighbor's possessions. 
" Swords will be beaten into plough shares,' ' and 
guns will be melted into constructive, instead of 
destructive, instruments. 

There will be no Courts of injustice in those 
days; and the fighting men, who have come 
through the adjustment period, will not be boast- 
ing of the number of men they have killed; but 
will be glad to forget them, and have others forget 
that they ever went to war; and there will be 
plenty of health and wealth and happiness, for 
the taking, for those who have earned them; and 
the new Aquarian cycle of evolution, for this 
world, will be entered into with peace and plenty 
for all who have passed the Judgment. 



INDEX 



INDEX 

Aaron — 47. 

Ability Is Self -acquired— 102. 

Abraham — 86. 

Abuse of Power Brings Retribution — 94. 

" Accident of Birth "—188. 

Acids in Body Cause Disease and Old Age — 145. 

Adepts Use Thought Bodies— 5, 29. 

Age — See Aquarian Age, Arine Age, Piscine Age. 

" Consummation of the — 206. 
Agnosticism Characteristic of Educated Class — 209. 
Alchemy, Actuality of, Proved by Paracelsus — 142-144. 
Essences— 275-281. 
Jesus' Knowledge of— 239. 
" Taught by Rosicrucians — 138. 

Taught in Arabian Schools— 136. 
Three Aspects— 144. 
Alexandria— 127, 132. 

" Arabian School and Library in — 136. 

Ambitions Will Be Realized— 102. 
America, Slavery in — 98-100. 
Ammonius Saccas — 130. 
Ancestral Worship — 171. 
Ancients, Lesser Magic of the — 2. 
Angel— 89, 191. 

Angels, Appeared to Mary — 222. 

Animal Bodies Contain Same Elements as Minerals and Plants- 
277. 
Has Not Free Will— 251. 
" Mind — See Mind, Animal. 
Animals, Diminished in Size — 249. 
Evolution of— 246-249. 
" On First Subjective Plane— 184. 
" Reincarnation Among — 251. 

Will Be Held Accountable— 290. 
Annihilation, Death Is, View of Materialist — 15. 

" Devolving Egos on Way to — 20, 187. 

Retrogression Brings — 251. 
Taught by Buddhist Priests— 131. 
Antioch— 127. 

Ants, Communal Appreciation — 153. 
Apocalypse Interpreted by Joachim — 137. 

295 



296 INDEX 

Apollonius of Tyana— 36, 126. 
Apparition — See Phantasm. 
Aquarian Age— 68, 201-204, 219, 292. 

" No Temples and Priests at First in— 207, 208. 
" " Teacher Incarnated Before Beginning of — 207. 

" Teacher Came in Nineteenth Century — 207. 
Arabia— 134-137. 

" Occult Records in— 93. 

" Occultists Went to Retreat in, in 1918—152. 
Archangel— 89, 191. 
Arians — 132. 

Arine Age— 106, 121, 225, 227. 
Aristocracy, Origin of — 259. 
Aristotle, Arabic Text of — 137. 
Arius— 132. 
Artemis — 122, 125. 

Astral Plane — See Subjective Plane, First. 
Astrological Conditions Blamed for Misfortunes — 283, 284. 
Astrology, Taught in Arabian Schools — 136. 
Atheism Characteristic of Educated Class — 209. 
Atlantis, Exodus from— 93-97, 100, 101. 
Atom Described — 53, 54. 
" Miniature Dynamo — 64. 
" Motions of— 53, 54. 
" Negative Aspect of — 53, 54. 
" Positive Aspect of — 53, 54. 
Atoms Compose Deity — 57. 

" Constructive and Destructive — 62, 242. 

" Emitted During Activity of Body— 175, 176. 

" Experienced and Inexperienced — 56, 57, 242. 

" In Animal and Human Forms Formerly in Mineral and 

Vegetable Forms and Essences — 277. 
" In Mineral and Vegetable Kingdoms — 275. 
" Mental Plane— 60, 64. 
" Negative— 56. 
" Physical Plane— 61, 63. 
" Positive— 56. 
" Spiritual Plane— 59, 60. 
" Vibrate— 53. 
At-One-Ment— 234. 
Atonement, Vicarious — 210, 232. 

After-death Condition Not Result of— 189. 
Among Athenians and Jews — 233. 
Attraction Established as Permanent Law — 76. 
Law of— 58, 261, 262. 
" Manifested by Centers — 61. 

Aura Contains Pictures of Past — 27. 
" Indicates Character — 12. 



INDEX 297 

Aura, Man Judged by Record in — 289. 
" Of the World— 92, 183, 210. 
" Vibration of, Lowered by Fear — 14. 

" " Raised by High Cosmic Forces— 17. 

Automatic Writing — See Writing, Automatic. 
Avatars Have Taught Reciprocity — 192. See Teachers. 
B., Teacher of Blavatsky— 215. 
Bagdad, Arabian School and Library in — 136. 
Balsamo, Impersonator of Cagliostro — 150. 
Banks Will Be Owned by Government — 204. 
Baptism, Meaning of — 224. 

Barriers Between Infinite and Finite Minds — 265, 266. 
Basilides — 129. 

Baska, Arabian School in — 136. 
Bees, Communal Appreciation — 153. 
Belief Not Alone Important — 290. 
Berkeleyan Philosophy — 211-213. 
Birth Control, Fight Against — 255. 
Blavatsky, Madam— 48, 215. 
Blood, Injections Into, Are Destructive — 278. 
" Magnetic Portion of — 8. 
" Sacrifices— 3. 
Blue Cosmic Force, Concentration on — 17, 18. 
Electricity a Part of— 50. 
Body, Cremation of — 180. 

How Controlled by Mind, 64. 
Matrix of— 179, 180. 
" One of St. Paul's Three Divisions of Man— 178. 
Origin of— 109, 110. 
Boehme, Jacob, Teacher of Blavatsky — 215. 
Bokhara, Arabian School in — 136. 
Books of Occultists Collected and Published — 219. 
Botany Taught in Arabian Schools — 136. 
Brahminism, Soul of — 5. 

Brahmins, Teaching About Death and After — 168. 
Brain Suffers Through Removal of Parts of Body — 280. 
Brotherhood, Object of Theosophical Society — 215. 

" Occult, Magi and Jesus Members of Same — 227, 232. 

Brotherhoods, Occult— 5, 133. 
Buddha— 131, 222. 
Buddhism, Corrupted — 131. 

Soul of— 5. 
Buddhistic Teaching About Death and After— 170, 171. 

That Man Is Sevenfold— 177. 
Bury Bodies Without Embalming — 181. 
Byron— 21. 

Cabala, Basis of — 103. 
Cagliostro— 149-151. 



298 INDEX 

Cagliostro, Teacher of Blavatsky — 215. 

Cairo, Arabian School and Library in — 136. 

Cancer — 64. 

Carlyle Collected Misinformation about Cagliostro — 151. 

Catacylsm, Readjustment of Perverted Forces — 94. 

Catherine II. of Russia — 147. 

Catholicism, Soul of — 5. 

Cause and Effect— 71, 192, 196. 

Center of Force — 53. 

" Gravity, Personal— 180. 
" Universe— 54, 55, 57, 70. 
Centers, Constructive and Destructive — 61. See Atoms. 

First Created— 54. 
Central America Settled by Atlanteans — 94. 

" Suns in Last Cosmic Day — 76. 
Ceremonial Magic — 2. 
Chaldean Priests— 136. 

" Records Basis of Genesis — 105. 

Character Determines Quality of Thoughts — 52. 
" Indicated by Aura — 12. 

Man Goes to Plane Determined by — 16. 
Chemistry Established as Science by Paracelsus — 142. 

Taught in Arabian Schools— 136. 
Cherubim — See Seraphim and Cherubim. 
Child, Ideals of— 162. 

Chinese, Origin of Ancestral Worship — 171. 
Chosen People— 97, 105. 
Christ, Esoteric— 220-241. See Jesus. 
" " Symbolism of— 240. 

" Meaning Anointed — 223. 
Oracle— 225. 
Christian Brotherhood— 131, 137. 
Science— 213, 217. 

Miracles— 34, 41. 
Scientists Changed Carving on Stone — 39, 40. 
Christianity, Mythology of— 126, 129, 131. 
Real— 125, 126. 
Teachings of— 169. 
" Was Merely Formal— 205. 

Church, Catholic, Has Always Justified Its Mission by Its 
Miracles — 37. 
Ceremonies Rooted in Fear and Dishonesty — 197, 200. 
Christian Science and New Thought Drew Largely 
from — 214. 
" Compelled to Abandon or Suppress Some Dogmas — 219. 
" Degeneration of Primitive — 272. 

Emphasized Death and Resurrection of Jesus — 167. 
" Fallacies Taught by the— 198-200. 



INDEX 299 

Church, Institutions, Destructive Force Will Destroy Unpro- 
gressive — 271. 
Nations Dominated by — 211. 
Occult Brotherhoods in the — 133. 
Science Attacked Dogmas of — 210. 
View of Miracles — 34. 
Wants More Devotees — 255. 
Churches Are Being Destroyed — 199. 
Churchianity Born at Council of Nice — 133. 

Caused Ignorance of Europe — 136. 
Fed to World for 1500 Years— 200. 
Opposed Psychic Phenomena — 210. 
Reaction on — 214. 
Slave to— 118. 

Teaches Useless and Absurd Sacrifice of Jesus — 234, 
235. 
Civil War, Compensation for Slavery — 98-100. 
Civilization, Artificiality of Present — 291. 

Of Twentieth Century Must Perish— 99. 
Clairaudience — See Clairvoyance and Clairaudience. 
Clairvoyance, False — 30. 

Necessary to Observe Obsession — 7. 
and Clairaudience— 3, 18, 29, 30, 42. 
Clairvoyant Can See First Subjective Plane — 183. 
Can See Silver Cord— 180. 

Independent, Distinguishes Phantom from Phan- 
tasm — 27. 
" Independent, Not Deceived — 29. 

Class, There Will Be No Privileged— 204. 
Classes, Adjustment of Relations Between — 202, 204. 
Comets, Destructive Centers — 62, 66. 
Communication with Dead, Among Jews — 170. 

" " " Priesthood Discourages — 1. 

Compassion — 271. 
Compensation, Gods of — 209. 

" Law of— 83-107. See Equilibrium, Law of. 

Concentration Necessary to Tap Source of Inspiration — 22. 
" Of Consciousness — 59. 

" Practice at All Times— 13. 

" Studied First in Lesser Magic — 17. 

" To Use Cosmic Forces — 48, 49. 

Consciousness, Atomic — 54. 

Communal, Division of — 154. 
" Concentration of — 59. 

Continuity of, Destroyed by Death — 145, 146. 
" Evolves Through Maiiifestation^-60. 

Of Man Is Dual and Separable— 176-178. 
Unifying Human with Divine — 88. 



300 INDEX 

Consciousness, Universal — See Deity. 

Consciousnesses, Ascending and Descending Scale of — 89. 

Consequences, Escaping— 193, 196-202, 233, 234, 288. 

No God Will Remove— 291. 
Constantine, Convoked Council of Nice — 132, 133. 

" Influenced by Eusebius — 129. 

Constructive Atoms— 62, 242. 
Centers— 61. 

How Made from Destructive— 66, 243. 
" Essences— 278-280. 

Force— 242, 247, 272, 274. 
" " Protecting Wall of Harmonious Vibra- 

tions — 274. 
" " Reinforcement of, from Destructive Force — 

66, 243. 
" Occult Bodies— 141. 

Consummation of the Age — 206. 
Contagion of Action — 58. 
Contrition — 27 1 . 

Control, None, in Good Suggestion and Inspiration — 22, 24, 25. 
Copper— 276. 

Cord Connecting Soul and Body, 179-181. 
Cordova, Arabian School in — 136. 
Corruption in American Politics — 99. 
Cosmic Currents — See Force, Cosmic. 
" Day — See Day, Cosmic. 
" Evolution — See Evolution, Cosmic. 
" Force — See Force, Cosmic. 
" Night — See Night, Cosmic. 
" Period — See Period, Cosmic. 
Council of Nice — See Nice, Council of. 

Creations of Infinite Mind More Numerous and Varied — 262. 
Credit, Give Full— 286. 

Creed, After-death Condition Not Result of Acceptance of — 189. 
Cremation, Proper Mode of Disposing of Body — 180. 
Crime, Greatest, Persistent and Continued Retrogression — 251. 
Cross, Meaning of— 241. 
Crucifixion, Alleged, of Jesus— 106, 235-238. 

" Of the Divine in the Material— 241. 

Crystal Gazing — 3. 

Crystallization— 157, 159, 267, 269, 271. 
Curiosity, Phenomenon Challenges — 1, 209. 
Custodians of Occult Knowledge— 68, 69, 71, 79, 136. 
Cycle, A Great Saviour Comes for Each Solar — 206. 
" A Teacher Comes for Each Zodiacal— 206. 
" All Religions Will Pass Away at End of Present— 219. 
Daniel Produced Miracles — 36. 
" Reference to Aura — 93. 



INDEX 301 

Dante— 187. 
Darwin— 109. 
David— 89. 

Davis, Andrew Jackson — 174. 
Day, Cosmic, Defined — 74. 
First— 69. 

Morning of— 54, 56. 
Our— 72, 74. 
" End of— 67. 

Morning of— 57, 62, 242, 249. 
Ripened Fruit of— 82. 
" " " Saturday Afternoon in — 80. 

" Preceding— 74-76. 
Second— 72, 73. 
Days, Cosmic, Have Grown Shorter — 72. 
" " Previous — 54. 

Wave Lengths of— 73, 75. 
Dead, Communication with, Among Jews — 170. 

" " " Priesthood Discourages — 1. 

Death and After— 166-191. 

" Caused by Too Low Vibrations of Body— 176. 
" Does Not Change Nature of a Man — 5, 184. 
" Ego Greeted by Friends at— 178. 
" Ego Sometimes Dazed at — 179. 
" Fear of, in Occident — 166, 178. 
" " " Removed by Psychism — 14. 
" Interruption to Consciousness — 145, 146. 
" Is Annihilation, View of Materialist — 15. 
" Is Dissolution — 67. 
" Is Painless — 174. 
" Not To Be Dreaded— 175. 
" Occultist's View of — 15. 
" Personality Survives — 18. 
" The Chief Phenomenon— 1. 
" Vision of Incidents of Lifetime at — 270. 
Declaration of Independence — 116. 
Degeneration Produced by Mediumship — 7. 
Deity— 242-281. See Mind, Infinite. 

Composed of Atoms — 53, 56, 57. 

Connection with, in Inspiration — 21. 

Desires Light and Expression in Forms — 53, 69, 194. 

Entities Pose as — 21. 

Everything a Part of— 274-276. 

Evolvement of — 69. 

Finishing Its Work for This Cosmic Day — 80. 

First Desire of — 69. 

Greatest Crime Against — 251. 

Has Not Reached Perfection — 249. 



302 INDEX 

Deity, Heals — 31. 

In First Chapter of Genesis— 109. 
Knew When Its Rest Would End— 54. 
" Not Now Self-conscious in All Its Parts — 72. 

Not Vindictive— 187. 
" Particled and Unparticled Portions — 54. 
" Eests in Cosmic Nights — 54. 
" Ruler Dares to Command— 268. 
" Shows Progress Since Last Cosmic Day — 75. 
" Superabundance of — 56, 57. 

Undifferentiated Part of— 57. 
" What Is Done to Another Is Done to— 290. 
" Will Again Become Vibrationless — 67. 
Deities, Solar— 191. 
Deluge— 86. See Flood. 
Democracy — 88. 
Demonism — 3. 

Demand and Supply, Explanation of Some Miracles — 37. 
" " " Moses' Coming Example of — 87. 

" for Healing— 31. 
Density, Planes Are of Different — 182. 
Depletion Made Up for by Sleep— 175, 176. 

" Physical — See Vampirization. 
Desire, First, to Exist— 194, 195. 
" Second, to Possess — 195. 
" Third, to Continue Transgressions— -196. 
Destruction Destroys Itself — 65, 187, 261. 
Destructive Aspect of Law of Cause and Effect — 196. 
Atoms— 62. 
Centers— 61. 
" " Destroy Themselves— 20. 

" " How Changed into Constructive — 66, 243. 

" Essences — 278-280. 

Force— 242, 247, 257, 272-274. 

Career of Conqueror Stopped by — 269. 
Described— 261, 262. 

Reinforcement of, from the Infinite — 243. 
Will Affect Finite Minds Until They Be- 
come Constructive — 274. 
Will Destroy All Unprogressive Institu- 
tions — 271. 
Forces, Use of— 50, 51. 
Occult Bodies— 141. 
Tendency of Mankind — 50, 51. 
Thoughts Disintegrate and Annihilate — 187. 
Determination Expressed in Forms — 246. 

Should Be Cultivated— 285. 
Devil, Belief in Power of— 257. 



INDEX 303 

Devil, Worship — 3. 

Devolvment Destroys Identity — 14. 

Diamond — 275. 

Diana— 125. 

Disease Cured by Philosopher's Stone — 145, 146. 

" Quimby Applied Berkeley's Philosophy to Curing — 212. 
There Are Essences That Will Cure Every— 280. 
Dishonest, Slavery is Essentially — 253. 
Dishonesty, Religious — 198. 

Will Be Swept Away— 201-204. 
Disintegration, Physical Phenomenon — 43, 44. 
" Result of Demagnetization — 8. 

Dissolution, Death Is — 67. 
Divine Mind — See Deity. 

Right of Kings— 104, 256. 
Earthbound Egos— 16, 20, 32. 

East, Sacred Books of, Collected and Published — 219. 
Ego — See Man, Mind, Soul. 
As Phantasm— 27-29. 
Control of Body by— 8. 
" Crowded Out by Obsessor — 13. 
" Greeted by Friends at Death— 178. 
" Has Form and Color — 186. 

In Sleep, Leaves Body to Rest It— 175. 
Liberated— 181, 189. 

Magnetically Attached to Body— 27, 28, 180, 181. 
Make-up of— 176-178. 
" Progressive, Goes After What It Wants— 285. 
Egos, Incarnated, Produce Phenomena — 4. 
Egypt, Goal of Exodus from Atlantis — 94. 
Plato Visited— 93. 
" Priests and Pharaoh in — 88. 
Egyptian Magicians — 16. 
Egyptians, Plagues of — 51. 

" Relations with Jews— 86-88. 

Electrical Invisibles Compose Body — 27. 

Vibrate— 53. 
Electricity a Part of Blue Cosmic Force — 50. 
Elemental Can Be Controlled— 32, 43. 

Producer of Psychic Phenomena — 5. 
Elements, Three Primal— 277. 
Eleusis— 122. 
Elijah— 89, 142, 166. 

Miracles of— 36, 170. 
Elisha— 227. 

Miracles of— 36, 170. 
Elizabeth— 89, 222. 
Elliptical Motion for Manifesting — 53, 54. 



304 INDEX 

Elohim— 89, 191. 

Created Subjective Minds— 193-195. 
" Disgusted with Atlanteans — 96. 

Efforts to Evolve Mankind— 85, 86. 
" Gods of Compensation — 209. 

Embalmed, Bodies Should Not Be— 181. 
Emotionalism, Excessive — 78. 

Employers and Serving Class, Adjustment of Relations Be- 
tween— 202. 
Energy — See Force. 
Entities Pose as Deity — 21. 
Environment, Man Can Make Desired — 51. 
Ephesus— 122, 125, 126. 

Equilibrium, Law of — 98. See Compensation. 
Equinoxes, Precession of the — 121. 
Essence of Experiences of Animal Mind — 252. 
Essences of Food Absorbed by Soul Body — 171. 
of Minerals and Plants— 275-280. 
Will Cure Every 111—280. 
Essenes — 122. 

Jesus Studied with— 228. 
" Occultism of— 169. 

Ethical Precepts Based on Laws of Nature — 52, 188. 

" Principles, Laws Based on — 103. 
Ether, Basic Wave Lengths of — 73. 

" Wireless Waves in — 44. 
Etheric Substance, Mind of Man Is — 176. 
Europe, Compensation for Industrial Slavery in — 100. 
Eusebius of Caesarea — 129. 
Evil and Good Both Parts of Deity— 244. 
Evolution, Cosmic — 68-82. 

Life Is— 67. 
Evolutionary Plan, Relationship of Man's Inner Nature to — 2. 
Evolvement Preserves Identity — 14. 

Exist, First Desire of Subjective Minds Was to — 194, 195. 
Exodus from Atlantis— 93-97, 100, 101. 
Experience Gained Only Through Expression — 245. 
Fallacies Taught by the Churches— 198-200. 
Falsehood — See Truth and Falsehood. 
Fear Became Instinctive with Animals — 252. 
" Caused Man to Build Temples— 197. 
" Lowers Auric Vibration — 14. 
" Must Be Uprooted— 286. 
" of Death Removed by Psychism — 14. 
" of Public Opinion— 114. 
Finite Mind — See Mind, Finite. 
Flood, Foundation of Story of — 96. See Deluge. 
Foods, Constructive and Destructive — 63. 



INDEX 305 

Foods, Essences in— 171, 276-280. 
Force — See Constructive Force, Destructive Force. 
" Cosmic, Action of Mind on — 41, 48, 49. 
" " Blue — See Blue Cosmic Force. 

" Concentration on — 17, 18. 
" " Creation of Subjective Minds out of — 193. 

" Green — See Green Cosmic Force. 
" Healing by Conscious and Expert Manipulator 

of— 31, 32. 
" Idealistic Mind in Rapport with Higher — 61. 
" Orange — See Orange Cosmic Force. 
" Poured on Animals and Human Beings — 79. 
" Probably Concentrated by Joshua — 39. 
Red— See Red Cosmic Force. 
Uses of, Taught in Magic— 88. 
Yellow — See Yellow Cosmic Force. 
" Economy of — 249. 
Form, Creation and Growth of — 55, 58. 
" Is Expression of a Thought — 245. 
Forms Disappeared in Cosmic Night — 54. 

" Vibration of Atoms Cause of — 53, 54. 
Fox Sisters— 7, 209. 

France, Compensation for Industrial Slavery in — 100. 
Francis I, King of France — 139. 
Franciscans, Accepted Teachings of Joachim — 137. 
Fraud— 4, 19. 
Free Will— 251. 

Freedom from All Limitations — 119. 
from Slavery— 116. 
Key to— 121. 
Funeral, Man Usually Conscious at Own — 179. 
Future Prospects, No One Will Live upon — 203. 
Gambling Will Be Unknown— 204. 
Ganglia of Brain— 18, 280. 
Genesis — 84, 85. 

" Based on Chaldean Records — 105. 
" Man's Origin According to — 108. 
Genius— 102. 

German School, Materialism of Dominant — 210. 
Gestation of Infant, Evolvement of Deity Compared with — 55, 69. 
Gibbon's " History "—133. 
Glaucus— 129. 
Gnostic School— 127. 
God— See Deity. 

Godhood, Attained by Jesus — 229. 
Gods, Creative,- in Second Chapter of Genesis — 110. 
" of Compensation-^209. 
" of Rome— 121, 132. 



306 INDEX 

Gold— 276. 
" and Silver Will Be Medium of Trade — 204. 
" Transmutation of Baser Metals into — 146. 
Golden Rule— 288. 
Good and Evil Both Parts of Deity— 244. 

" Positively and Negatively — 230. 
Gospel, Fourth— 127. 
Gospels, How Written— 223. 

" Interpretation of the — 129. 
Government, Origin of — 259. 

Governments Will Own Banks and Public Utilities — 204. 
Gravity Draws Each to Own Plane— 16, 29, 186. 
" Prevails on First Subjective Plane — 183. 
Great Schism— 137. 
Greed Will Be Unknown— 203. 
Greek " Land of Shades "—185. 
Greeks Knew of Persistency of Soul — 171. 
Green Cosmic Force, Minds in Lower Shades of — 61. 

Planets That Vibrate as— 81. 
H. P. B., Teacher of Blavatsky— 215. 
Happiness Is Harmony — 244. 

" Lost and Must Be Found— 112. 

Spiritual— 113, 116, 119. 
Hartmann, Biographer of Paraceslus — 143. 
Healing, Miraculous — 36. 

Psychic— 3, 31, 32. 
Suggestion All-powerful in — 45. 
Heart of Deity— 55, 70. 
Heaven, Christian Teachings on — 172. 

" First — See Subjective Plane, Second. 
" In Church Doctrine — 210. 
" Jesus Ascended to — 239. 

of Theology— 14. 
" Second — See Subjective Plane, Third. 
" Subjective Mind Came from — 240. 

Third— See Subjective Plane, Fourth. 
Heavens— 183, 189-191. 
Hell, Christian Teachings on — 172. 
" First— 186, 187. 
" In Church Doctrine— 210. 
" of Theology— 14. 
" Second— 187. 
Hells— 182, 186, 187. 
Henry VIII, King of England— 139. 
Herod — 89. 
Hezekiah — 39. 
Hindoo Gods — 205. 
History, Critical Estimate of— 90. 



INDEX 307 

History, Occult, Stray Leaves of— 120, 152. 
" History and Power of Mind," Referred to — 17. 
" Hunch " from Subjective Mind — 25. 
Hydrogen Discovered by Paracelsus — 143. 
Hypnosis, Self -induced — 31. 
Hypnotism Induces False Clairvoyance — 30. 
" Perverted in Atlantis— 93. 

" Shows Man's Mind Is Dual — 176. 

" Subjective— 13. 

Ice, Used as Illustration — 55, 56. 
Iconoclasts — 221. 
Ideals— 162. 
Idealism in Sacred Books of East — 213. 

of Socrates— 212. 
Idealistic Minds — 61. 
Illuminati — 140. 
Immortality, Believed in — 1. 

Consciously Surrendered in Nirvana — 191. 
" Foundation Laid for by Psychism — 14. 

" How Attained— 14. 

" New Revelation to Orient — 131. 

" Not Proven by Persistency for a Time — 174. 

Indian's "Happy Hunting Ground" — 185. 
Individualism, Persistent — 131. 

Individuality Consciously Surrendered in Nirvana — 191. 
Expressed in Forms — 246, 247. 
" Not Lost by Developed Souls — 81. 

Individualization, Tendency to — 3. 
Infinite Intelligence — See Mind, Infinite. 
Mind— See Deity. 
The— 242, 243. 
Injections into Blood — 63, 278. 

Insanity Produced Through Study of Psychism — 11-13. 
Inspiration — 21-25. 

Inspirational Writing and Speaking — 3, 20-25. 
Intelligence — See Mind Finite and Mind Infinite. 
intelligences Less Than Man Produce Phenomena — 4. 

" Superior— 89. 

Intuition Gives Free Will— 251. 
Iron Age — 135. 
" Ore— 275. 
Isaiah — 39. 

James, Brother of Jesus — 123. 
Jehovah Had Lost Most of His Followers — 205. 
Jerusalem, Fall of— 126. 
Jesus, Alleged Crucifixion— 106, 206, 235-238. 
" Alleged Death— 223. 
" Baptism— 224, 228. 



308 INDEX 

Jesus, Birth of— 223-227. 

" Birthday of— 224, 225. 

" Childhood of— 228. 

" Clair voyantly Saw Nathaniel — 42. 

" Death and Resurrection Emphasized by the Church — 167. 

" Disciples of, Produced Miracles — 36. 

" Emotional Nature of — 229. 

" Former Lives— 226, 227. 

Life Compared with That of Moses — 87. 

" Lived at Monastery for One Thousand Years — 239. 

" Miracle of Destroying the Fig Tree — 51. 
" Draft of Fishes— 49. 
" " Fish and Piece of Money— 43. 
" " Loaves and Fishes-^46. 

" " " Raising Lazarus — 50. 

" Stilling the Storm— 50. 

" w " Turning Water into Wine— 48. 

" Miracles— 36-38, 41-51. 

Did Not Commence with— 34. 

" Mission to Jews and to Whole Western World — 122, 123 

" Neophyte of the Essenes — 122. 

" Personality vs. Teachings — 226. 

" Power in Lives of Occultists— 222,. 227. 

" Quoted— 107, 192, 201, 202, 206, 239, 286, 290. 

" Retired to Occultists' Retreat— 123. 

" Society of, Soul of Catholicism — 5. 
Temptation of— 230-232. 

" Used Suggestion — 46. 

" Will Return— 208, 209, 239. 
Jewels Made by Count de St. Germain — 147. 
Jewish Psychism — 3. 
Jews, Ancestors of, Enslaved by Atlanteans — 97. 

" Early History in Genesis — 86, 87. 

" Greed of— 105, 106. 

" In Times of Moses and Jesus, Compared — 87. 

" Massacres of, in Russia — 107. 

" Miracle Workers of — 37-40. 

" Reformation of, Mission of Jesus — 122. 

" Sects of— 169. 
Joachim of Flora in Calabria — 137. 
John Baptized Jesus — 228. 

" the Evangelist, in Alexandria — 127. 

Maoi Led Schools Founded by— 131. 

" " " Work of, in Asia Minor— 124. 

Joseph — 122. 
Joshua — 36, 39. 

Name of Jesus— 223. 
Judas — 134, 235. 



INDEX 309 

Judgment, Bad— 284, 285. 
Day— 282-292. 

Those Who Have Passed the— 292. 
Justice — 98. See Reciprocity. 
Is Not Dead— 288. 
Must Be Done— 203. 
K. H., Teacher of Blavatsky— 215. 
Kaliyuga — 135. 
Kingcraft — 88, 104. 
Kings, Divine Right of— 104, 256. 
Knowledge, Custodians of Occult — See Custodians. 
" Esoteric, of Priesthood — 2. 

Gained by Deity from Past Experiences — 246. 
" . Labor Necessary to Gain — 285. 

Of Laws Enables Man to Control Natural Forces — 2. 
" Result of Interaction of Subject and Object — 212, 213. 

" Tendency to Acquire Direct — 3. 

Krishna — 222. 

Labor Necessary to Gain Knowledge — 285. 
Law, Divine — See Deity. 
" of Attraction — See Attraction. 
" " Compensation — See Compensation. 
" " Demand and Supply — See Demand and Supply. 
" " Psychic Phenomenon — 8. 
Laws of Moses Based on Ethical Principles — 103. 

" " Nature Same for All Planes— 186. 
Laziness Must Be Uprooted — 286. 
Lead, Essence of — 275. 
Lemurians — 136. 
Life and Death, Mystery of — 1. 
" Force — See Orange Cosmic Force. 

" Former, Present Astrological Conditions Result of — 284, 285. 
" Is Evolution— 67. 
" Processes Are Chemical — 143. 
" Recedes First from Extremities — 77. 
Light, Establishment of Vibration of — 71. 
First Desire of Deity for— 69. 
" Freedom from All— 119. 
Limitations of Finite Mind Due to Mental States Made by It — 

264-266. 
Lincoln, Abraham — 220. 
Lions, Story of the — 84, 85. 
Literary Current in Deity — 21. 
Literature Taught in Arabian Schools — 136. 
Locke— 212. 
Logos — 132. 
Longevity— 239, 280. 

" Attained by Using Philosopher's Stone — 144-147. 



310 INDEX 

Louis XV— 147. 
Luck, Bad— 283, 284. 
M., Teacher of Blavatsky — 215. 
Macrocosm, Organs of — 55. 
Magi at Birth of Jesus— 223, 227. 
" Helped in Education of Jesus— 228. 
" Helped Jesus When Condemned to Death— 236, 237. 
" Returned with Jesus to Monastery — 238. 
Magic — 42-44. 

" Among Egyptian Priests — 88. 
" Ceremonial — 2. 
Defined— 2. 

Higher— 16, 21, 31, 88. 
Lesser— 2, 16, 31. 
" Perverted in Atlantis — 93. 
" Taught by Rosicrucians — 138. 

Temple— 2. 
" Used by Moses to Awe Jews — 104. 
Magnetic Force, Center of — 53. 
Magnetism Drawn into Body During Sleep — 176. 

" Of Creative Gods Used in Creating Subjective Minds- 

195 
" Of Ego, Part Played at Birth and at Death by 
Portion of— 179-181. 
Of Medium Drawn on— 32. 
Used in Psychic Phenomena — 8. 
Man — See Ego, Mind, Soul. 
" Accountable for Acts to Every Part of Deity — 290. 

Birth of— 240, 248. 
" Can Make Environment Desired — 51. 
". Creator of Own Destiny— 188, 189. 
Early— 248. 

" History of, in Genesis— 85, 86. 
" Has Neglected Study of Occultism — 2. 
" Has Tried to Penetrate the Veil — 1, 
" Interested in Objective — 2. 
" Nature of, Not Changed by Death — 5. 

Origin of— 108-110. 
" Phenomenon Challenges Curiosity of — 1. 

St. Paul's Three Divisions of— 178. 
" Teaching about Very Complex Make-up of — 177, 178. 
Mankind Redeemed by One of the Great Gods— 96. 
Maoi— 131. 

Martyr Frequently Hero of Myth — 220. 
Mary— 89, 122, 222. 
Masonry, Free, Enlarged by Cagliostro — 149. 

" Founded in Germany by Count de St. Germain- 
147. 



INDEX 311 

Masonry, Free, Why Rome Objects to — 149, 150. 
Masons, Free, Interested in Illuminati — 140. 
Masses, After-death Condition Not Result of— 189. 
Master, Denned— 89. 
Materialism — 4, 210, 211. 

Attacked by Locke— 212. 
" Spiritism Will Aid in Destroying — 5. 

Materialists, Earthbound — 20. 
Materialization Produced by Astral Entities — 32. 
Mathematics Taught in Arabian Schools — 136. 
Matrix of Physical Body— 179, 180. 
Matter, Negative Aspect of Atom — 54. 

Planes Composed of Different Grades of— 182. 
Matthew— 129. 

Oldest Extant Text of— 222. 
Medicine Reformed by Paracelsus — 142. 
" Taught by Rosicrucians — 138. 
" Taught in Arabian Schools — 136. 
Medicines, Constructive and Destructive — 63-65. 
Destructive— 278, 279. 
Essences in— 276-280. 
Medium Consulted by Saul — 170. 
" Magnetism of, Drawn on — 32. 

" Place of, Taken by Ouija Board or Automatic Writing — 3. 
" Resorts to Fraud— 19. 
" Sensitive May Become a — 26. 
" Sincere Souls Unwisely Seek to Use — 20. 
" Vampirization of — 9, 19. 

Yields to Another Entity— 6. 
Mental Plane Forms Are Individualized — 60. 

" Powers, Revealed by Christian Science and New Thought 
—217. 
Mercury, Essence of — 275, 277. 
Mesmer— 148. 

Mesmerism Induces False Clairvoyance — 30. 
Messiah Comes for Each Solar Cycle — 206. See Aquarian Teacher. 
Meteors — 62. 

Mind — see Ego, Man, Soul. 
" Action of, on Mind — 41. 

" " Occult Forces— 41, 48, 49. 
" Animal, How Made to Evolve — 252. 

No More Created after Birth of Finite Mind— 250. 
" To Be Trained by Finite Minds— 250. 
" Change in, Sometimes Cause of Healing — 45, 46. 
" Controls Body, How— 64. 
Finite— 250-252. 

" Compassion and Contrition Attributes Only of 



312 INDEX 

Mind, Finite, Evolving — 271. 

Deity Expresses Itself Through— 75. 
Has Free Will— 251. 
" " Hopes Its Forms Will Be Permanent— 262-264. 

" " How Behaves When Worlds Are Dying— 78. 

" " How Disintegration Seems to — 77. 

Will Be Affected by Destructive Force Until It 
Becomes Constructive — 274. 
Infinite— 242-281. See Deity. 
" " Abhors Uselessness — 263. 

Is Substance— 176. 
" Must Gain in Knowledge and Power of Concentration — 67. 
" None Continually Positive — 10. 

" Objective, Far Surpassed by Subjective Mind — 23, 24. 
Jesus Possessed a Powerful — 229. 
Origin of— 109, 110. 
Part of Ego— 176-178. 
Product of This Planetary Evolution — 240. 
Struggle for Possessions — 153. 
" Power of, Lesser Magic a Phase of — 2. 
" Subjective, Abode of Permanent Memory — 33. 
" " Awakening — 24. 

Creation of— 193-195. 
" Deserts Objective Mind, and Body — 117. 

" Forced to Separate from Objective — 30. 

" " Incarnation in Human-animal Body — 110. 

Is Esoteric Christ— 240. 
" " Jesus a Strong— 229. 

No Vanity Originally— 153. 
Of Investigator, Entity Can Read— 33. 
Part of Ego— 176-178. 
" " Produces Phenomena — 4. 

" True Subject of Psychology, 211. 
Minds, Destructive — 63. 

Two Classes of— 217. 
Unusual— 60. 
Mineral Kingdom Created for Food and Medicines — 274. 
Minerals, Essences of — 275-280. 
Miracle, Defined — 40. 

" Worker, Unearned Increment of — 39, 40. 
Miracles— 34-52. 

" All Men Use Forces Which Produce — 51. 

" Identical, Differently Explained— 37, 38. 

Misrepresentation of Value Will Be Unknown — 204. 
Mohammedan Renaissance — 136. 
Mohammedanism — 205. 
Moon, Life of Subjective Minds on — 153. 



INDEX 313 

Money, Commercial Paper Will Not Be Used in Place of— 203, 204. 
Mortal Mind— 258, 276. 
Moses— 47, 83-107. 

" and Jesus, Lives Compared — 87. 
Birth— 87, 101. 

Contradictions of Character— 91, 92. 
Death— 105. 
Education— 88, 101. 
Laws— 92, 103. 
" Leader of Atlantean Exodus— 94-97, 100. 
" Produced Miracles — 36. 
" Purified Waters of Marah — 40. 
" Turning-point in Life — 89. 

Moses-ben-Levi — 127. 
Mothers, Cruelty to — 254. 
Moving Pictures, Astral — 26. 
Mulford, Prentice — 214. 
Myers' Book on Survival of Death — 173. 
Mysteries of Eleusis — 122. 
Mystics in Jewish Church — 127. 

" Jesus' Life Inspiration to — 227. 
" Never Accepted Atonement — 232. 
" Teach There Is No Death— 174. 
Myth, Martyr Frequently Hero of — 220. 
Myth-making Tendency— 220, 221. 
Mythology May Again Be Created — 208. 

Of Christianity— 126, 129, 131. 
Myths, Built by Priesthood— 232. 
Nation, Life of a— 88, 121. 

New, Will Justly Claim a National Pride— 165. 
" No Present, Entirely Honorable — 165. 
" Wants More Supporters — 255. 
National Institutions, Destructive Force Will Destroy Unpro- 

gressive — 271. 
Nations Dominated by Church — 211. 
Nature Automatic, Not Vindictive — 188. 

" Laws of, Investigation of, Object of Theosophical Society 
—216. 
Unaided Fails— 240. 
Necromancy — See Communication with Dead, and Magic. 
Negative Mind Vulnerable — 10. 
Negatively Good— 230. 
Negativeness, Positiveness Overcomes — 65. 
Negro Leaders Formerly White Men — 100. 

" Outrages — 99. 
Neo-platonic School — 130. 
New Age — See Aquarian Age. 



314 INDEX 

New. Thought— 178, 213, 217. 
Miracles— 41. 
Nice, Council of— 133, 200, 232, 238, 239. 
Nicene Creed — 214. 

Night, Cosmic, After First Comic Day — 72. 
Defined— 74. 
Deity Rests in— 54, 264. 
Nights, Cosmic, Have Grown Shorter — 72. 
Nihilism in Sacred Books of East — 213. 
Nineteenth Century, Psychic Phenomena in — 4. 

" " Spiritual Renaissance of — 205-219. 

Nirvana — See Subjective Plane, Fourth. 
Noah — 86. 

Northerners Became Slavehunters and Traders — 98. 
Objective, Man Interested in — 2. 

" Mind — See Mind, Objective, and Soul. 

Obsession Begins Often with Telepathy from Entity — 25. 
" How to Guard Against— 12-14. 
" None, in True Inspiration— 22, 23. 
Of Medium— 6, 28. 
Occult Bodies, Constructive and Destructive — 140, 141. 
" Brotherhoods — 5. 
" History, Stray Leaves of— 120-152. 
" Practitioners — 41. 
" Retreats— 134, 135. 
Occultism, an Explanation for Psychic Phenomena — 4. 
Occulists, Books of, Collected and Published— 219. 
" Carry on Work of Great Teacher — 206. 

" Caused Phenomena — 5, 6, 29, 32, 209. 

Instruments of Divine Will — 141. 
" Lodge of, Jesus at— 228, 238. 

" Modern, Complementary Writings of — 219. 

" Of Piscine Age— 120. 

" Records of — See Custodians of Occult Knowledge. 

Twelve, Know How to Prepare and Use the Phi- 
losopher's Stone — 145. 
Use Elementals to Produce Physical Phenomena — 32. 
" Who Specialized in Magic, Work of— 209-211. 

" Philosophy, Work of— 211-218. 
Old Conditions Must Be Destroyed— 221, 257. 
" Testament— 83-85. 
" Wine in New Bottles— 2, 15, 33. 
Omnipotence — 119, 191. 
Omniscience — 119, 191. 
Orange Cosmic Force Directed by Jesus — 50. 

" Minds in Lower Shades of— 61. 
Order of Universal Harmony — 148. 



INDEX 315 

Organs of Macrocosm — 55. 

Removing— 279. 
Orient Has Preserved Traditions of Things Subjective — 168. 
Origen— 130. 

Ouija Board Takes Place of Medium — 3. 
Paladino — 9. 
Paracelsus— 142-146. 

Parsis, Teaching about Death and After — 168. 
Particled Portion of Deity — 54. 
Passivity Essential in Mediumship — 6. 
Past, How to Recall— 27. 
Patriotism— 259-261, 267. 
Paul, Angel Visit to— 18, 89. 
" Seemed to Teach Atonement — 234. 
" Sent to School at Ephesus— 125, 126. 
" Three Divisions of Man— 178. 
Period, Cosmic, Fifth— 292. 

Of Last Cosmic Day— 75. 
" " Fourth— 291. 

" Seventh— 80. 
" " Sixth, Afternoon of Our— 80. 

Periods, Cosmic — 75. 
Perseverance Should Be Cultivated — 285. 
Persistency Expressed in Forms — 246. 
Peter, Angel Visit to— 89. 
" Teacher of Glaucus — 129. 
" Work of, in Rome— 123, 124. 
Phantasms — 3, 24, 27. 
Phantoms— 3, 24, 26, 27. 
Pharisees — 169. 

Phenomena, Attracting and Convincing People with — 213. 
" Physical— 3, 32, 40. See Miracles. 

How Produced— 9, 43. 
" Produced as Credentials— 35-37. 

Production of, by Miracles — 34. 
" in Egypt— 88. 
" Psychic — See Psychic. 

Phenomenon Challenges Curiosity — 1. 

Death the Chief— 1. 
Philosopher's Stone — 143-146. 
Philosophy, Berkeleyan— 211-213. 

Religious, of Theosophical Society — 216. 
Taught in Arabian Schools — 136. 
World Densely Ignorant of — 211. 
Photosphere — See Aura. 
Physical Plane Forms — 61. 

" *' Repercussion on — 94, 



316 INDEX 

Physician Who Uses Poisons Not Constructive — 278. 

Pineal Gland, Inner Vision — 18. 

Pioneer, Unwilling, of Shadow World — 1. 

Piscine Age— 2, 68, 106, 120, 130, 135, 205, 206, 239. 

Pituitary Body, Inner Hearing — 18. 

Planet, Fifth— 190. 

Planets, Other— 191. 

Planetary Chains— 74, 89. 

Spirits— See Elohim. 
Plato Visited Egypt— 93. 
Platonic School— 127. 
Poetry Taught in Arabian Schools — 136. 
Poisons Must Not Be Used— 278, 279. 
Positive Attitude, Cultivate at All Times — 13. 
" Mind Not at First Influenced — 9. 
No Mind Continually— 10. 
Positively Good— 230. 
Positiveness Overcomes Negativeness — 65. 
Possess, Desire to — 195. 
Possession — 12, 23. 
Power — See Force. 

" of Mind, Lesser Magic a Phase of — 2. 
Prayers, Dishonest— 198, 199. 

Of New Era— 291. 
Precession of the Equinoxes — 121. 
Precipitation, Physical Phenomenon — 43, 44. 
Predestination, Man Not Subject to — 189. 
Premonitions— 3, 24-26. 
Present Civilization, Artificiality of — 291. 

Conditions, Cause of— 79, 198-202, 287, 288. 
Press, Subsidized— 260. 

" Will Print the Truth— 204. 
Pressure at Present on Humanity — 78-80. 
Pretences, Make No False— 286. 
Pride— 163. 
Priestcraft— 88, 104. 
Priesthood Discourages Communication with Dead — 1. 

" May Again Arise — 208. 

Printing Rediscovered — 138. 
Privileged Class, There Will Be No— 204. 
Probationer, Acceptance of, by Baptism — 224. 
Would-be, of Rosicrucians — 139. 
Progress Is Required— 263, 264. 
Prohibition Movement, Psychic — 33. 
Prophetic Knowledge from Deity — 25. 
Protestants, French — 139. 
Psychic Healing— 3, 31, 32. 



INDEX 317 

Psychic Phenomena— 1-33, 185, 209, 210. 

" " In Theosophical Society— 216. 

" " Proper and Improper Study of — 16. 

" Phenomenon, How Produced — 5. 
" " Is Lesser Magic — 2. 

Law of— 8. 
Modern— 3. 
" Plane — See Subjective Plane. 

" Powers, Latent, Investigation of, Object of Theosophical 
Society— 216. 
" " Revealed by Spiritism— 217. 

Psychical Research Societies — 173, 211. 
Psychism, Jewish — 3, 170. 
Psychology, True — 177. 

" World Densely Ignorant of — 211. 

Public Utilities Will Be Owned by Governments — 204. 
Purgatory, Christian Teachings on — 172. See Subjective Plane, 

First. 
Quimby, Dr.— 211-213. 

Rebirth, Buddistic Teachings on Delivery from — 131. See Re- 
incarnation. 
Reciprocity— 192-204, 253. See Justice. 
Records of Occultists— 68, 93, 120, 136. 
Red Corpuscles, Magnetic Portion of Blood — 8. 
" Cosmic Force, Minds in Lower Shades of — 61. 
" Planets that Vibrate as — 81. 
" Sea— 40, 96. 

" " Terminus of Atlantean Exodus — 100. 
Reformation, Seed for, Sown by Rosicrucians — 138, 139. 
Reincarnation Among Animals — 251, 252. See Rebirth. 

Ego Projects Part of Itself at Time of— 179. 
" Former Thoughts and Acts Determine Circum- 

stances of — 188, 194. 
Of Atlanteans, Present Humanity Is — 96. 
Taught by Brahmins and Parsis — 168. 
" Buddhists— 170, 171. 
Reintegration, Physical Phenomenon — 43, 44. 
Relative, All Values Are— 83. 
Religion Decadent at End of Age — 205. 

Life of a Nation's Dominant — 121. 
Primitive— 196, 197, 255-258. 
Religions Will Pass Away — 219. 
Religious Forms, Object of Aquarian Teacher to Destroy Old — 207. 

Orders, Effect on, of Communication with Dead — 2. 
Renaissance Aided by Paracelsus — 142. 
" Mohammedan — 136. 

" Spiritual, of Nineteenth Century— 205-219. 



318 INDEX 

Repulsion Established as Permanent Law — 76. 

" Manifested by Centers — 61. 

Responsibility Expressed in Forms — 246. 
Retreat, Jesus in Occultists' — 123. 

" Occultists Went to Arabian, in 1918—152. 
Retreats, Occult— 134, 135. 

" " Rosencreutz Sent Emissaries to — 138. 

Retribution Brought by Abuse of Power — 94. 
Revelation, Interpreted by Joachim — 137. 

" Reference to Aura — 93. 

Roman " Land of Shades " — 185. 
Romans Knew of Persistency of Soul — 171. 
Rome, Gods of— 121, 132. 
Rosencreutz, Christian — 138. 
Rosicrucians — 138-140. 
Rosy Cross, Order of the— 138-140. 
Rotary Motion for Generating — 53, 54. 

" Motions Lessened Near End of Last Cosmic Day — 76. 
Ruler, How Finite Mind Becomes a— 252, 253, 266. 

Worship of— 255. 
Russia, Compensation for Industrial Slavery in — 100. 

" Massacres of Jews in — 107. 
Saccas, Ammonius — 130. 
Sacrifices, Blood — 3. 

Origin of— 197, 257. 
Sadducees — 169. 
Saint— 89, 191. 

St. Germain, Count de— 146-152. 
Salt, Essence of— 275, 277. 
Samuel Called Back by Saul — 170. 
San Diego, Water Supply of — 40, 41. 
Saul Consulted Medium — 170. 
Saviour, Objective Mind Looked to God for a — 240. 

Will Help Souls in Hell— 187. 
Saviours, Similarity in — 239, 240. See Teachers. 

Ten Crucified— 221. 
Scepticism Characteristic of Serving Class — 209. 
Schism, Great — 137. 

Schools, Arabian, in Middle Ages — 135-137. 
Science Attacked Dogmas of Church — 210. 
Sciences, Mediaeval Occult— 41. 
Scientists, Phenomena Produced for — 5, 10. 
Self-appreciation — 266, 270. 

Distinguished from Vanity — 155. 
In Animals and in Human Baby — 154, 155. 
Self-control, How Acquired by Jesus — 229. 
" Learn to Practise-*-13. 



INDEX 319 

Self-reliance Distinguished from Vanity — 155. 

" In Animals and in Human Baby — 154, 155. 

Selfishness, Birth of— 195. 
Seraphim and Cherubim — 89, 191. 
Serving Class and Employers, Adjustment of Relations between — 

202. 
Seven Planes of Existence — 181. 
Shadow World — See Subjective Plane, First. 
Silver— 276. 

and Gold Will Be Medium of Trade— 204. 
Simeon-ben-Jochai — 126, 127. 
Simon— 36, 38. 

Sins of Each Individual Will Be Visited upon Himself— 288. 
Siva— 221. 
Slade— 9. 

Slave to Belief in Disease and Fear of Death — 117. 
" " Habits— 114. 
" " Material Things— 264. 
" " Mistaken Duty— 115. 
" " Public Opinion— 114. 
" " Religious Beliefs— 118. 
« White— 116, 117. 
Slavery— 253-259. 

" Consequences of — 98-100. 

In United States— 98-100, 116. 
Industrial— 99, 113. 
Soul— 108-119. 
Sleep, Artificial— 30, 31. 

" Ego Slips out of Body in — 175. 
" Knowledge from Deity while on Border of — 25. 
" One Mind at a Time May — 176. 
" Why Necessary — 64. 
Social Conditions Will Be Chaotic— 291. 
" Institutions, Destructive Force Will Destroy Unpro- 
gressive — 271. 
Society of Jesus, Soul of Catholicism — 5. 
Socrates — 142. 

" Idealism of— 212. 

Solar Cycle, A Great Saviour Comes for Each — 206. 
Something for Nothing— 98, 99, 102, 203, 253. 
Sons of God — See Mind, Subjective; Soul; Spirit. 
Soul — See Ego, Man, Mind; Essence. 

Has Placed Itself in Present Conditions— 282. 
" Of One Substance and Form— 178. 

One of St. Paul's Three Divisions of Man— 178. 
" Power, in Magic — 2. 
Slavery— 108-119. 



320 INDEX 

Soul, Strong and Developed, Will Not Lose Individuality— 81. 
" Tries to Remember Its Origin — 112. 
" Weak and Wicked, Returns to Infinite — 81. 
Sound, Establishment of Vibration of — 71. 
Southerners, Effect of Slavery on — 99. 
Space, Planes Occupy Same General — 182. 
Speculation Will Be Unknown — 204. 
Spirit — See Mind, Subjective. 

" One of St. Paul's Three Divisions of Man— 178. 
Spiritism— 3-7, 19, 22, 29, 209-211, 217. 
Spiritual Plane Forms— 59, 60. 

" Renaissance of Nineteenth Century — 205-219. 
Spiritualists— 173, 190, 210. 

Spirituality Hard to Awaken in Nineteenth Century — 206. 
Squirrel, Self-appreciation of a — 154. 
Stoddard, Biographer of Paracelsus — 143. 
Students, Accepted, in Arabian Schools — 136. 

" " Occult Records Accessible only to — 92. 

" Aided Aquarian Teacher — 208. 
Subjective Hypnotism — 13. 

" Man More Interested in Objective than in — 2. 

" Mind — See Mind, Subjective; Man; Soul. 

Plane, First— 181-185. 
" " " Developed Ego Quickly Passes — 16. 

Entities on— 11. 
" How Studies— 18. 
Picture Gallery— 26. 
" " " Unwilling Pioneer on — 1. 

Fourth— 190, 191. 
" Second— 189, 190. 
Third— 190. 
Planes— 182. 
Suggestion — 42-48. 

" Jesus Used — <*6. 

" Perverted in Atlantis— 93. 

" Used in Applying Quimby's Teachings — 212. 

" Used on Investigators of Psychism — 10, 11. 

Sulphur, Essence of — 277. 
" Summer Land " of the Spiritualists — 190. 
Sun, Disintegrating — 77, 78. 

" Gods — See Deities, Solar 
Surgeon Who Removes Organs Not Constructive — 279, 280. 
Survival of the Fittest— 77. 
Swedenborg— 174. 

Sympathy — See Attraction, Law of. 
Teachers Come for Each Solar and Zodiacal Cycle — 206. 
Telepathy Used by Entity — 25. See Suggestion. 



INDEX 321 

Temple Magic — 2. 
Tennyson — 21. 

Theology Being Destroyed by Facts — 4. 
" Painted Death Horribly— 14. 
Theosophical Society — 48, 216. 
Thought, A Form is Expression of a — 245. 

" Determines Personal Vibration — 187-189. 
" Persists— 219. 

" Travels Like Wireless Waves — 44. 
Time One of the Most Valuable Assets— 282. 
Tin— 276. 

Transmutation of Baser Metals into Gold — 146. 
" Man's Nature— 144, 164. 
" Physical Body— 144. 
Trinitarians— 132. 
Trinity— 205. 

Trowbridge, Biographer of Cagliostro — 151. 
Truth Always Colored by Medium— 84, 212. 

" and Falsehood, Blended on First Subjective Plane — 19, 

20 29 
" Press Will Print the— 204. 
Universal Consciousness — See Deity. 
" Harmony, Order of — 148. 

Universe Builded of Atomic Bricks — 53. 

Center of— 54, 55, 57, 70. 
Unparticled Portion of Deity — 54. 
Usefulness, Value Determined by — 276. 
Useless Things Not Preserved — 263. 
Valentinus— 128. 

Value Determined by Usefulness — 276. 
Vampirization of Medium — 9, 19, 28. 
Vanity— 153-165, 266, 270. 
Birth of— 155. 
" Distinguished from Self-reliance and Self-appreciation — 
155 
Goeth Before a Fall— 164. 
Jesus Had No— 164. 
Mental— 159, 286. 
National— 164. 
Of Head of Nation— 165. 
Parental— 162, 163. 
Physical— 156. 
Spiritual— 160. 
Vegetable Kingdom Created for Food and Medicines — 274. 
Veil, Man Has Tried to Penetrate the — 1. 
Vibration— 53-67. 

Begins and Ends in Center of Universe — 54. 



322 INDEX 

Vibration. Cause of Everything That Exists as Form — 63. 
" High, Repels Lower— 18. 

Of Body, Too Low, Causes Death— 176. 

Personal, Determines After-death Condition — 188, 189. 
Vicarious Atonement — See Atonement. 
Virgin Birth, Not Corroborated— 222. 
Visions— 3, 24-26. 

At Time of Death— 172, 270. 
Voodooism — 3. 

Waite, Translator of Paracelsus — 143. 
Wars Will Soon Be Ended— 202. 
Water Supply of San Diego — 40, 41. 
Waters of Marah — 40. 
Wave Lengths of Cosmic Days — 73, 75. 
Wealth, Desire for— 195. 
Will, Divine— See Deity. 

" Word," Arius Declared Jesus Was Not the— 132. 
World, Aura of the— 92, 183, 210. 
Writing, Automatic— 3, 13, 23. 
Yellow Cosmic Force, Concentration on — 18. 
Yoga— 3, 31. 

" Your Forces and How to Use Them "—214. 
Yucatan Settled by Atlanteans — 94. 
Zacharias — 89. 

Zodiacal Cycle, A Teacher Comes for Each — 206. 
Zohar— 127. 



